diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 02:17:36 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 02:17:36 -0700 |
| commit | 06c4143a219d1731219683ad2d7d2413413a53cd (patch) | |
| tree | bd970dc277bbdd08a632d1acd152527e74f934f1 | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 25514-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 163152 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 25514-h/25514-h.htm | 6848 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 25514-h/images/003.jpg | bin | 0 -> 9487 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 25514-h/images/fig002-300dpi.jpg | bin | 0 -> 32374 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 25514.txt | 6780 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 25514.zip | bin | 0 -> 114328 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
9 files changed, 13644 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/25514-h.zip b/25514-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..35fc0ae --- /dev/null +++ b/25514-h.zip diff --git a/25514-h/25514-h.htm b/25514-h/25514-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b07896f --- /dev/null +++ b/25514-h/25514-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,6848 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> + <head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" /> + <title> + The Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers, by Claude A. Labelle + </title> + <style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[ XML blockout */ +<!-- + p { margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .75em; + } + h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; + } + hr { width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; + } + + table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + + body{margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + } + + .pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ + /* visibility: hidden; */ + position: absolute; + left: 92%; + font-size: smaller; + text-align: right; + } /* page numbers */ + + .linenum {position: absolute; top: auto; left: 4%;} /* poetry number */ + .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%;} + + .bb {border-bottom: solid 2px;} + .bl {border-left: solid 2px;} + .bt {border-top: solid 2px;} + .br {border-right: solid 2px;} + .bbox {border: solid 2px;} + + .center {text-align: center;} + .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + .u {text-decoration: underline;} + + .caption {font-weight: bold;} + + .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center; margin-top: 3em;} + + .centerbox { width: 65%; /* heading box */ + margin: 0 auto; + margin-top: 3em; + text-align: center; + padding: 1em; + } + .cpoem {width: 18em; margin: 0 auto;} /* centers text and maintains left justified margin */ + .cpoem1 {width: 28em; margin: 0 auto;} + .cpoem2 {width: 30em; margin: 0 auto;} + + + .author {text-align: right; margin-right: 5%;} + + div.trans-note {border-style: solid; border-width: 1px; + margin: 3em 15%; padding: 1em; text-align: center; font-size: 75%;} + + + // --> + /* XML end ]]>*/ + </style> + </head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers, by +Claude A. Labelle + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers + +Author: Claude A. Labelle + +Release Date: May 18, 2008 [EBook #25514] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RANGER BOYS *** + + + + +Produced by Barbara Tozier, Bill Tozier and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + +</pre> + + + + + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 386px;"> +<img src="images/fig002-300dpi.jpg" width="386" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">"This fellow has a chamois money belt on, and unless I'm +greatly mistaken, that's where the Jewels are." + +(<i>The Ranger Boys And the Border Smugglers</i>) <a href="#Page_197"><i>Page 197</i></a></span> +</div> + + + + <h1>THE RANGER BOYS<br /> + AND<br /> + THE BORDER SMUGGLERS</h1> + + <h2>By CLAUDE A. LABELLE</h2> + + <h4>Author of</h4> + + <p class="center">"<i>The Ranger Boys to the Rescue</i>," "<i>The Ranger Boys</i><br /> + <i>Find the Hermit</i>," "<i>The Ranger Boys Outwit</i><br /> + <i>the Timber Thieves</i>," "<i>The Ranger</i><br /> + <i>Boys and Their Reward</i>."</p> + + <div class="figcenter" style="width: 200px;"> +<img src="images/003.jpg" width="200" height="154" alt="" title="title decoration" /> +</div> + + <p class="center"><i>A. L. BURT COMPANY</i><br /> + <i>Publishers—New York</i></p> + + + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> + <h4>THE</h4> + <h3>RANGER BOYS SERIES</h3> + + <p class="center">A Series of Stories for Boys 12 to 16 Years of Age</p> + + <h3>By CLAUDE A. LABELLE</h3> + +<div class="cpoem"> + <p>The Ranger Boys to the Rescue<br /> + The Ranger Boys Find the Hermit<br /> + The Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers<br /> + The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber Thieves<br /> + The Ranger Boys and Their Reward</p></div> + + <p class="center">Copyright, 1922<br /> + By A. L. BURT COMPANY<br /><br /> + + THE RANGER BOYS AND THE BORDER SMUGGLERS<br /><br /> + + Made in "U. S. A."</p></div> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[Pg 3]</a></span></p> + +<h2><br /><br /><br />CONTENTS</h2> + + +<div class='center'> +<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="CONTENTS"> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_I">CHAPTER I.—OFF FOR NEW FIELDS.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_II">CHAPTER II.—THE OLD HOUSE.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_III">CHAPTER III.—IN THE HANDS OF THE LAW.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_IV">CHAPTER IV.—THE TORN MAP.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_V">CHAPTER V.—PHIL GETS A CLUE.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_VI">CHAPTER VI.—THE NEW STATION.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_VII">CHAPTER VII.—THE TRAIL BEGINS.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII">CHAPTER VIII.—THE GUM HUNTER.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_IX">CHAPTER IX.—THE NIGHT VISITOR.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_X">CHAPTER X.—A SIGNAL OF DISTRESS.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XI">CHAPTER XI.—THE RESCUE.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XII">CHAPTER XII.—THE COMING OF THE BEAR.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII">CHAPTER XIII.—TRAPPED.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV">CHAPTER XIV.—CHUMS TO THE RESCUE.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XV">CHAPTER XV.—THE PLOT.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI">CHAPTER XVI.—DANGEROUS BUSINESS.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII">CHAPTER XVII.—THE RUSSIAN'S TALE.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII">CHAPTER XVIII.—FERNALD COMES.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XIX">CHAPTER XIX.—SMUGGLERS' LANE.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XX">CHAPTER XX.—THE MAP AGAIN.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXI">CHAPTER XXI.—THE QUEST OF THE MINE.</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXII">CHAPTER XXII.—CONCLUSION.</a></td></tr> +</table></div> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><br /><br /><a name="THE_RANGER_BOYS_AND_THE_BORDER_SMUGGLERS" id="THE_RANGER_BOYS_AND_THE_BORDER_SMUGGLERS"></a>THE RANGER BOYS AND THE BORDER SMUGGLERS.<br /><br /></h2> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I.</h2> + +<h3>OFF FOR NEW FIELDS.</h3> + + +<p>"Now I believe you boys understand just what is wanted of you, as I +explained it yesterday afternoon, but just to make sure, I'll go over it +briefly again while you are waiting for your train," said the Customs +Chief to the three Ranger Boys.</p> + +<p>Our three friends were sitting in the office of the chief at the capitol +in Maine, preparatory to bidding him goodbye before starting out for the +Canadian border to try and run down a band of fur smugglers.</p> + +<p>As they sit there, let us describe them and introduce them to those of +our readers who have not read "The Ranger Boys to the Rescue," and "The +Ranger Boys Find the Hermit."</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[Pg 4]</a></span></p><p>First is Garfield Boone, known to his chums as Garry. He is the +accepted and chosen leader of the trio on all their expeditions. Garry's +father, known to the backwoodsmen as "Moose" Boone, is a wealthy +lumberman.</p> + +<p>Next is Phil Durant, a dark-haired youth of French descent. He is able +to talk French fluently, but keeps this knowledge under cover, as the +boys once found it useful for him to do. He is the son of a father and +mother who are situated in very moderate circumstances.</p> + +<p>Last, but by no means least, is Dick Wallace, the ward of Garry's +father. Dick is the son of a college professor, who was a chum of Mr. +Boone. He fell from a horse and injured his head when Dick was a +youngster, and then disappeared. Dick's mother had died when he was a +baby, so Mr. Boone took him into his own home to bring up. Dick, by the +way, is rather fat; "plump" he calls himself.</p> + +<p>These three boys form an extraordinary unit of the Maine Ranger service, +that body of men whose duty it is to protect the great forest lands of +the state from the danger of fire.</p> + +<p>These boys were made Rangers through the influence of Mr. Boone, and had +been in the woods about a month, where they had some stirring +adventures, meeting an old hermit who has helped them, and making +enemies of a half-breed guide, Jean LeBlanc, and a rascally ex-deputy +Ranger, Ander<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[Pg 5]</a></span>son by name, who was supplanted by Nate Webster, a +warm-hearted old Maine guide and a firm friend of the boys.</p> + +<p>Among their adventures was the rescue of little Patty Graham, child of a +rich broker who was camping in the woods, from the half-breed LeBlanc. +As a reward for their brave deed, Mr. Graham presented them with a +specially made wireless telephone outfit, complete with home station and +compact carrying 'phones.</p> + +<p>Now that we know who our heroes are, let us hear what the Customs Chief +has to tell them.</p> + +<p>"As I told you boys yesterday, this is our problem. We know that +somewhere along the border, there is a regular smugglers' lane, where +valuable shipments of seal and other furs have been smuggled into the +United States with consequently a great loss of duty to the customs +house. Now it is impossible for our men to find anything out, and if I +get men from Washington, they don't know anything about the woods, so +there you are.</p> + +<p>"Now I think you boys can go up there, and by acting as campers, or even +in your role of Rangers, you may find out just the things my agents have +been unable to unearth. Ordinarily I wouldn't think of sending boys on +this job, but you three have proven yourselves to be unusually alert +and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[Pg 6]</a></span> reliable, also being boys, you may not be regarded as dangerous by +the woods people in that section.</p> + +<p>"You had better go back to Bangor and have a conference with this man +Webster, and get what supplies you need, then strike off across the +state till you come to the border town of Hobart. That, I have reason to +believe, is the base of operations of the smugglers.</p> + +<p>"That I think is all. Before you go out, you will each be given a little +gold customs badge. Secrete this somewhere on your persons and never +show it except as an absolute last resort. Also, you will be given one +or two signals by means of which you may find out whether anyone is in +the service or not. Now good luck go with you."</p> + +<p>The Chief shook hands with the three, and they filed into the outer +office where an assistant gave them their badges and some simple +signals.</p> + +<p>"If you should meet a man who gave his collar a tug at the throat as +though it were too tight, you would think nothing of it, but if he gave +it two little tugs, and then waited while you could count five and gave +it three more little tugs, you would be told he was a customs man. Your +reply would be two tugs, and in order to check up, he would give two +more in answer. That is for meeting in a room, on a train, or in the +street. If you should happen to be in a restaurant, the signal would be<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[Pg 7]</a></span> +two taps of a cup on a saucer followed by three, or if it is a mug, the +same number of taps against the table. Your answering signal would be +the same. Don't ever do this just because you are inquisitive about a +person. Have some sure grounds for believing that the man you are +signalling is part of the service. Now goodbye and good fortune."</p> + +<p>The boys left the capitol and made their way down the long hill to the +main business part of the town.</p> + +<p>As they struck onto the main business street, Garry noticed the familiar +blue bell sign of the telephone company.</p> + +<p>"Say, boys, I have an idea. Let's stop in here and put in long distance +calls and say hello to our folks. How does the idea strike you?" said +Garry, almost in one breath.</p> + +<p>"Ripping," shouted Phil, while Dick didn't wait to make any remark, but +dived in through the door, and in a trice was putting in his call. Phil +followed suit, while Garry waited, as he would talk when Dick had +finished.</p> + +<p>This pleasant duty done, they went to a restaurant for dinner. Here they +attracted no little attention, for their khaki clothes looked almost +like uniforms. Added to this was the fact that they wore forest +shoepacks, those high laced moccasins with an extra leather sole, and +felt campaign hats.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[Pg 8]</a></span></p> + +<p>Most of those who saw them, however, after an interested look, put them +down as boys about to go on a camping trip, never dreaming that this +same trio had been through more adventures in the previous month or so, +than the average boy, or men, for that matter, has in half a dozen +years.</p> + +<p>Even the boys, hopeful as they were of adventures, did not dream of the +stirring times that lay ahead of them in their quest of the border band +of smugglers.</p> + +<p>The boys thoroughly enjoyed the well-cooked, well-served meal, it being +a welcome change to have someone else do their cooking for them.</p> + +<p>"Eat up, fellows," advised Dick, who was ever ready to eat, "just two or +three more restaurant meals, and then we'll be cooking our own again +over a bed of red embers under the merry greenwood tree."</p> + +<p>Luncheon over, the boys consulted a time-table and found they could get +a train immediately or one quite late in the afternoon for Bangor.</p> + +<p>"What say we take the late one, and go to a movie this afternoon?" +queried Dick.</p> + +<p>The matter was put up to Garry for a decision and as he was the leader +his word always went, though he was never arbitrary and generally talked +things over before making a real decision.</p> + +<p>"I think we ought to take the early train. By<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[Pg 9]</a></span> doing that, we will get +to Bangor at five o'clock, just the time we would be leaving here, +should we take the later train. Then we can have dinner, see an early +movie, and buy what few things we need and get a good sleep, for we have +a two-day train journey. Doesn't that strike you fellows as the most +logical thing to do?" he concluded.</p> + +<p>Put to them in this light it seemed best, so it was unanimously agreed +to start at once. They proceeded to the station where they had checked +their rifles and knapsacks on leaving the hotel that morning.</p> + +<p>"I must get several things when we get to Bangor," remarked Phil. "You +know LeBlanc and Anderson stripped me of rifle, knife and axe that time +they left me tied to the tree."</p> + +<p>"Yes, you'll have to, also I am going to get a compass, as I lost mine +the time I lost my way in the forest," said Garry.</p> + +<p>"Well, all I've to get when we reach that city," announced Dick, "is +something to eat!"</p> + +<p>The others laughed and poked fun at Dick for his appetite, for his +willingness to eat at any time of the day or night was a source of +constant merriment to the other chums.</p> + +<p>"Some day you will have to go a whole day without food, Dick," remarked +Garry, "and I don't know what will happen to you. I imagine that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[Pg 10]</a></span> you'll +just wither up and die before help reaches you."</p> + +<p>"Don't worry, I'll find some way to prevent going a day without a meal," +said Dick emphatically.</p> + +<p>The ride to Bangor was uneventful. As they passed through Waterville, +they saw the great shaded campus of Colby College, deserted for the +summer except for a few students who were pursuing extra courses.</p> + +<p>"By golly, there's a pretty college there. I almost think I'd like to go +there," remarked Dick.</p> + +<p>"Well, according to things as they now stand, we have a couple of years +to think that over," said Garry.</p> + +<p>They reached the city of Bangor, on the wide Penobscot River about five +o'clock. This city is famous for its paper mills and as a center for the +gathering of lumberjacks for the woods work. Bangor is also famous for +its great "Salmon Pool."</p> + +<p>Garry remarked about this:</p> + +<p>"Some first of April we must make plans to come up and try our luck at +salmon."</p> + +<p>"Why April first?" queried Phil.</p> + +<p>"You see the law goes off at that time, and they are the best at that +season. A little while later, during the spawning season, they are again +protected. It is a wonderful sight, by the way, to see the twenty<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[Pg 11]</a></span> or +twenty-five pound salmon jump up over falls and dams eight and ten feet +in height. The Orono Indians, who used to inhabit this region, used to +stand at the top of the falls and dexterously spear the fish as they +jumped."</p> + +<p>Supper was eaten at the Penobscot Exchange, and then the boys journeyed +down Canal Street to an old store where they intended to get a new rifle +and some other things. They found the old gunsmith was out and would not +be back until about eleven o'clock, so decided to go to the movies, and +return at that hour.</p> + +<p>They enjoyed the motion picture show immensely, particularly because one +of the scenes in the News Weekly showed forest fire fighters combatting +the flames in the Michigan woods.</p> + +<p>After the show they made their way back towards the old gunsmith's shop. +The street was deserted save for a party of roisterers, who passed them, +singing at the top of their voices. They were passing a badly lighted +spot, when, from a ramshackle old three-story house, they heard a shriek +followed by an appeal for mercy.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[Pg 12]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II.</h2> + +<h3>THE OLD HOUSE.</h3> + + +<p>"Did you hear a scream, Garry?" asked Dick, as he stopped in his tracks.</p> + +<p>"I am sure I did, Dick," answered the leader, "but I was wondering +whether it meant anything. You know this isn't the quietest and most +lamb-like part of the city, it is probably only some carousing +lumberjacks."</p> + +<p>"Let's wait a minute or two and see if we can hear anything more," +suggested Phil.</p> + +<p>They waited a short time, and were about to move on, when the scream was +repeated, and the boys distinctly heard a call for help.</p> + +<p>"All set, boys, let's see what this is all about," cried Dick, who +though fat, and sometimes inclined to take things easily, was not a bit +of a coward.</p> + +<p>"Wait a minute, fellows, let's see what our plan is," said Garry, +hurriedly. "Remember we have no weapons, so every move must be made +carefully. There are three floors. Dick, take the top, Phil you<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[Pg 13]</a></span> search +the second, I'll take the ground floor. Go through the halls, listen +carefully, and at the first sign of anything, whistle three times and +the others will join whoever gives the whistle. Now, let's go!"</p> + +<p>"One more thing," said Garry; "when you climb the stairs, step on the +end either near the wall or the balustrade, then the steps won't be so +apt to creak."</p> + +<p>They found the front door open and made their way inside. The interior +of the house was in inky blackness.</p> + +<p>"Careful, now," warned Garry. "Whistle at the first sign of trouble, no +matter how slight it is."</p> + +<p>Phil and Dick sprang up the stairs, noiselessly, yet speedily. There was +not a sign of noise, all was as quiet as a cemetery at midnight.</p> + +<p>Left alone, Garry went along the hall, stopping at each door and +listening intently. He was unrewarded until he came to the end door.</p> + +<p>Here he thought he heard a sound of scuffling and squealing. Cautiously +he tried the door, holding a flashlight ready in his hand. As he opened +the door and stepped into the darkness, he saw the gleam of two small +eyes, then heard a frightened scampering across the floor.</p> + +<p>Garry snapped on his flashlight and then gave a relieved laugh. The +noise had been caused by noth<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[Pg 14]</a></span>ing more than a pair of rats, who had been +feasting on the remains of a supper on a rickety old table.</p> + +<p>The broken bits of food, the unwashed dishes, and the empty cans showed +that someone evidently lived in the house, and only recently and +probably surrepticiously as the thick dust that lay everywhere seemed to +indicate that the house had not been regularly occupied for some time.</p> + +<p>Garry saw a door at one side of the kitchen, for that was the room into +which he had penetrated, and carefully opened it. The door led into a +long room, with a half a dozen tables, bare of cloth, and with chairs +stacked on them.</p> + +<p>From the appearance of this room, and judging by the big range in the +kitchen from which he had just come, Garry decided that the house was +used in the winter as a boarding house for lumberjacks.</p> + +<p>He went back to the kitchen and opened the only other door. A cool draft +told him this was the cellar, and he listened intently, then flashing +his light, went down the steps. A few moments' investigation showed him +that there was no living person down there. The air was musty, and the +cellar seemed damp.</p> + +<p>While Garry was examining the lower floor, Phil and Dick had gone up the +stairs. Here, too, all was quiet. Wishing Phil a hasty good luck, Dick +began the ascent of the flight that led to the third floor.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[Pg 15]</a></span></p> + +<p>Left alone, Phil stood stockstill for a few minutes, getting his +bearings. There was a long hall from which led off ten doors, five on +either side.</p> + +<p>Phil decided he could do nothing better than go from door to door, +listening intently at each one, then enter the room and flash his light +about, for each of the boys had provided himself with a heavy batteried +flashlamp.</p> + +<p>He wondered where the screams could have come from, as there wasn't a +sound of anyone stirring on the floor. He could hear Dick's stealthy +footfall above him occasionally.</p> + +<p>He listened at each door intently, and peered at them for a sign of +light creeping through a keyhole or chance crack, but his vigilance went +unrewarded.</p> + +<p>Finally at the very last door he saw a mere speck of light through the +keyhole. He dropped to his knee and glued his eye to the keyhole. By the +flaring light of a couple of candles stuck into bottles, he could make +out the still form of a man on a cot.</p> + +<p>The room was considerably torn up, as though a search for something had +been made.</p> + +<p>Then a man crossed his line of vision and shook up the form on the cot. +The sleeping, or unconscious man, made no move, and the other +disappeared for a moment and then returned, bearing a small pail +containing water which he proceeded to splash vigorously on the face of +the recumbent man.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[Pg 16]</a></span></p> + +<p>Presently this had its desired effect for the form stirred, and in a +voice hardly above a whisper the man began to speak.</p> + +<p>Phil could not distinguish the words, but the other spoke loudly, and +Phil heard him say:</p> + +<p>"Now listen here. You come through with that map, or I'll leave you here +to be carried out feet first!"</p> + +<p>The old man feebly protested and Phil was about to whistle for help when +he saw the assailant rip away the old man's shirt and disclose a cloth +bag. It was the work of a second to tear this open and extract from it a +paper.</p> + +<p>Phil could hear the chuckle of satisfaction and then he gasped, for the +old man rose from his cot and tried to grapple with the younger man, who +gave him a brutal push, throwing him back onto the cot.</p> + +<p>Phil hesitated no longer, and so excited was he that he failed to give +the signal. Throwing open the door, he rushed into the room, and +directing the flashlight directly into the eyes of the man, partially +blinded him. At the same moment he made a grab for the paper, but +succeeded only in getting a part of it, one piece remaining in the hands +of the man.</p> + +<p>The old man lay back on the cot gasping for breath, so could be of no +harm, nor yet of any assistance. The younger man was undersized, hardly<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[Pg 17]</a></span> +more than a match for Phil, who was an exceptionally strong lad, yet so +great was the evident worth of the paper, that he started for Phil, +slowly and warily.</p> + +<p>Phil was unarmed, but a happy stratagem occurred to him. Hastily +reaching into his pocket, he drew forth a shiny pair of wire cutters, +and pointed them at the culprit, at the same time ordering him to throw +up his hands.</p> + +<p>The momentary gleam of the polished wire cutters was enough to convince +the man that a pistol was being pointed at him, but instead of obeying +the order to hoist his hands, he made a spring for an open window, +jumped over the sill, and a bare second later, Phil heard a dull thud.</p> + +<p>He dashed to the window and flashed his light about, to find that a very +few feet below was an ell roof, and he just caught a glimpse of the +fugitive letting himself over the edge, probably to drop into a yard +below and so make his way to freedom.</p> + +<p>Foiled in his attempt to capture the fellow, Phil turned his attention +to the old man. He shoved the paper, the seeming cause of all the +trouble, into his hands and told him he had nothing more to worry about.</p> + +<p>To his surprise, however, the old man weakly pushed it back to him, +saying in laborious gasps:<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[Pg 18]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Take it, boy, it's yours. I'm—going—out—a fortune in——"</p> + +<p>His words trailed into nothingness and he dropped back, ceasing to +breathe. Startled, and a little bit frightened, Phil ran and put a hand +to his heart. There was no vibrating response.</p> + +<p>Stuffing the paper into his jacket pocket, he ran to the door and gave +two low but distinct whistles. Hardly had he given the signal when there +was an unearthly crash and a muttered expression of disgust.</p> + +<p>Phil made for the stairs, and was about to descend when he was joined by +Dick, who whispered sibilantly:</p> + +<p>"Dig out of here; this is no place for us," and seizing Phil by the arm, +started down the stairway. At the bottom they found Garry extricating +himself from a heap of splintered wood and debris.</p> + +<p>"All out in a hurry," commanded Dick.</p> + +<p>Garry and Phil both sensed that there was danger in the air, or, at the +very least, a need for extra care, and followed the lead of Dick in +making a quick exit from the house.</p> + +<p>They hustled down the sidewalk, and noticing an open hallway, unlighted, +Dick led the way in there.</p> + +<p>"Not a whisper, now," he cautioned.</p> + +<p>Hardly had they found shelter in the doorway when three men came +tumbling out of the deserted<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[Pg 19]</a></span> lodging house they had just left, and ran +past the hallway where the boys were crouching, finally to disappear +around a corner farther up the street.</p> + +<p>"Say, for the love of Pete, Dick, what's all this mystery about, and who +found anything and where did the screams come from?" queried Garry, +amazed at the strange turn events had taken.</p> + +<p>Dick was about to make a reply, when Phil interrupted.</p> + +<p>"All our stories can wait. First we must get the police. I've just left +a dead man, and I have good reason to believe there was foul play."</p> + +<p>"Then let's save our breath and hustle after an officer; we can compare +notes later," said Garry.</p> + +<p>They branched off Canal Street, up through a narrow thoroughfare, more +alley than street, and soon found themselves on a well lighted business +street. Here they moderated their pace, and after a brisk walk of three +blocks, saw a policeman.</p> + +<p>"You're the spokesman in this case, Phil, you know what this is all +about, and we don't," directed Garry.</p> + +<p>Approaching the officer, Phil stated the case. The policeman looked at +them curiously, then appeared to be convinced of their honesty, and +turning to a police box, notified the station, asking that the night +lieutenant come at once. He told his superior where the place was, for +knowing that section of the city,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[Pg 20]</a></span> thoroughly, he immediately recognized +it from Phil's description.</p> + +<p>They made their way back, and going up the stairs, went at once to the +room. Here the police officer looked about and then asked a few +perfunctory questions of the boys.</p> + +<p>"I guess you fellows better wait here till the lieutenant comes," he +said finally.</p> + +<p>"Does that mean we are under arrest?" queried Garry.</p> + +<p>"No indeed, just a formality. You see that is what I have to do in all +cases like this, but you can tell your story to the lieutenant."</p> + +<p>They waited a few minutes and then the sound of tramping feet was heard +on the stairs and the lieutenant of the police force entered the room +followed by a man carrying a black bag, evidently a doctor and probably +the coroner.</p> + +<p>The police officer cast a scrutinizing look over the room and then waved +the doctor to make his examination. This took only a few minutes.</p> + +<p>"What do you find Doc?" asked the officer familiarly.</p> + +<p>"This man was stabbed or cut some time ago, probably two or three weeks, +but the cause of his death seems to be heart failure, induced no doubt +by lack of care, improper nourishment, and a severe<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[Pg 21]</a></span> shock that finished +him off with his organically weak heart."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean, stabbed or cut, accidentally?" asked the officer +gruffly.</p> + +<p>"Not accidentally, but by a blow inflicted by someone," returned the +doctor.</p> + +<p>"What do you chaps know about this?" he asked, turning suddenly on the +three boys. Garry opened his mouth to answer.</p> + +<p>"We——"</p> + +<p>"Wait till I get through talking before you are spoken to. What are you +chaps, runaways, and where did you get those clothes, steal 'em?"</p> + +<p>A dark flush crept up under Garry's ears.</p> + +<p>"Look here officer, you keep a civil tongue in your head, with all due +respect to your rank and authority, and before we answer any questions, +just what is our status now?" he said.</p> + +<p>"If you mean, are you under arrest, you are!"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[Pg 22]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III.</h2> + +<h3>IN THE HANDS OF THE LAW.</h3> + + +<p>Arrested!</p> + +<p>Both Dick and Phil started to make a vociferous protest but were quickly +silenced by Garry.</p> + +<p>"All right, officer. But we answer no more of your questions and ask to +be taken immediately to the station and the services of a lawyer +procured for us," said Garry firmly.</p> + +<p>"Huh, pretty smart youngsters, aren't you. Well, let me tell you one +thing, laddy buck. You'll answer any questions I ask of you and answer +them quick. Now who are you and how were you in this room at the time +this man died—or was killed," said the officer in a threatening tone.</p> + +<p>The three boys held their silence, taking their cue from their leader, +Garry.</p> + +<p>"Won't talk, eh, well we'll make you open your mouth in a hurry," and +the officer advanced on the boys.</p> + +<p>Just what steps he would have taken will never be<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[Pg 23]</a></span> known, for the +physician, who was the city coroner, interposed.</p> + +<p>"That will do, Murphy. You have just told these boys they were under +arrest, and you have failed to give them warning that anything they may +say can be used against them. You are barking up the wrong tree anyway. +These are no runaways nor young desperadoes. My advice is that you let +them go immediately, or else take them to the station and let the chief +talk to them. He was still there when we left the house. And, boys, I'll +see that you get a lawyer as soon as you get there unless the captain +shows more sense than the lieutenant has."</p> + +<p>The lieutenant glowered at the coroner. Evidently there was bad blood +between them, but he realized that he had overstepped his authority, and +was in the wrong, so he ordered everyone present to repair to the +station.</p> + +<p>The walk to the headquarters of the city police consumed only a few +minutes, and soon the boys were standing in the office of the Chief.</p> + +<p>"What's all this, Lieutenant Murphy?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"There's been foul play of some sort down in that old shack that's used +in the wintertime for a lumberjack boarding house. These three boys were +there at the time the man died and don't seem to be able to give a +satisfactory account of themselves.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[Pg 24]</a></span> They have been put under arrest," +answered the officer sulkily.</p> + +<p>"Well, boys, what have you to say to this," asked the Chief as he swung +around on his chair and surveyed the three.</p> + +<p>By this time Garry was boiling mad.</p> + +<p>"I first want to ask that we get a lawyer. I don't propose to have a +continuation of the bullying that the lieutenant started down at the old +shack continued, nor do I propose to let my companions be questioned +without competent advice," he said respectfully but decidedly.</p> + +<p>The Chief's face darkened.</p> + +<p>"Have you been up to your old tricks again, Murphy?"</p> + +<p>"I've just been doing my duty," said Murphy sullenly.</p> + +<p>"I am afraid you exaggerate your duty at times, then, lieutenant. Now, +boys, what have you to say? This is only an informal questioning and you +are under no obligations to answer. I think, however, that there has +been nothing more here than the stirring up of a mare's nest, and I +think the best thing to do is to come out and say what you have to say. +If there is nothing against you, then that is your best course."</p> + +<p>Garry recognized that the Chief was a fair man, and decided to tell +their story.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[Pg 25]</a></span></p> + +<p>"We are Forest Rangers, sir, just going to a new post of duty. We were +down on that street in search of a gunsmith's shop to procure a new +rifle to replace one that one of my companions lost. We heard screams +coming from the old house and ran to see if we could be of assistance. +One of the boys found the old man who is now dead being attacked by a +younger man. He was driven out, making his escape by a window and over +the roof of the ell. Then we went and summoned the policeman from his +beat, and now here we are."</p> + +<p>"How does it happen you do all the talking?" asked the Chief.</p> + +<p>"Why, the boys have seen fit to make me the leader and spokesman at all +times. We have always done that."</p> + +<p>"You seem to tell a straight enough story in some ways," said the Chief. +"But I have seen a good many Forest Ranger service men go through this +town, and I never saw boys doing that work before. As far as the death +of the old man is concerned, I see nothing to hold you on, as I +understand that he died and was not killed while you were there. I am +inclined to think you are stretching things a bit, however, when you +claim to be Rangers. You are sure you boys aren't making tracks for the +Big Woods in search of supposed adventure, are you?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[Pg 26]</a></span></p> + +<p>"That is the second time tonight that we have been accused of that, and +it is getting a bit tiresome. I think we can satisfy you very quickly, +however. There are probably men in town who know my father, who is part +owner of the pulp mills up the river. The best way, however, is to get +the Chief Ranger, Mr. Ardmore, on the long distance 'phone. Till then I +think we won't say anything more."</p> + +<p>The Chief looked at them quizically for a moment. He was still inclined +to be suspicious, but the mention of Garry's father made him think that +perhaps he was on the wrong track. He pulled an extension 'phone to him, +and called the long distance operator.</p> + +<p>"This is the Chief of Police talking," he said. "I want you to get the +Chief Forest Ranger, Mr. Ardmore, at Augusta. You can get his home +telephone number from the night operator at the State House. This is an +emergency, so rush it through," and he replaced the receiver on the +hook.</p> + +<p>"That will do for now, Murphy, and Coroner, I suppose you want to make +out your report. You will find a desk not in use in the next room. In +the meantime, you boys make yourselves comfortable for a few minutes, I +don't expect that the call will be more than five minutes in going +through," and the Chief began to busy himself with some papers around +his desk.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[Pg 27]</a></span></p> + +<p>The boys withdrew to a corner of the room, and found chairs.</p> + +<p>The minutes seemed to drag horribly. None of the boys was exactly +worried, except for the fact that they were losing precious time. They +wanted to go back to Canal Street and buy the rifle and such other +things as they might need. If they were held for some sort of a hearing +in the morning, it would delay them considerably as their train left +early, and there was no other until late in the afternoon, meaning they +would lose almost a day on their journey.</p> + +<p>After a few minutes of silence, Dick cautiously whispered to Garry, "How +about showing him our customs papers and badges?"</p> + +<p>"Only as a last resort," answered Garry in a low tone.</p> + +<p>They looked up when they saw the Chief reaching for the telephone.</p> + +<p>"How about that Augusta call?"</p> + +<p>He listened a moment, then hung up the receiver and turned to the boys.</p> + +<p>"Operator says she is still working on it, that they cannot find him +now, but are trying places where he might be. Still of the opinion you +want me to talk to him?"</p> + +<p>"Positively," answered Garry.</p> + +<p>The Chief resumed his newspaper, and the boys<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[Pg 28]</a></span> fidgeted a minute until +Garry bethought himself of the pocket checkerboard they generally +carried. He fished it out and suggested they play to while away the +time. Dick elected to play first with Garry, and let Phil take on the +winner.</p> + +<p>Seeing them at their game, the Chief walked over and stood watching. +Garry had just succeeded in getting a king after an unusually clever +play, and the Chief, who was quite a player himself, was applauding +softly when the 'phone bell rang.</p> + +<p>"Guess there's our call now," he remarked, as he hurried back to his +desk.</p> + +<p>Sure enough it was the call, and in a moment the Chief was talking with +Mr. Ardmore.</p> + +<p>"Listen, Mr. Ardmore, this is the Chief of Police of Bangor. I have +three boys here who were picked up after finding a dead man in a room +here. There is nothing against them on that score, but they claim to be +Forest Rangers, and I say they are too young, so to settle the matter I +am calling you. They give their names as Boone, Wallace and Durant," and +here the Chief described them. "They're all right, you say?" queried the +Chief, in a slightly surprised tone. "All right, guess I was wrong then. +All right, here's one right here." Then he turned to Garry and said:</p> + +<p>"He wants to talk to you."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[Pg 29]</a></span></p> + +<p>Garry exchanged greetings with the Chief Ranger and heard him say:</p> + +<p>"Can't you three take a step without running smack into something +exciting? I declare, you fellows see more and do more than men who have +ranged the woods for these past ten years. Keep it up, and keep out of +trouble. Write me all about this, not an official report, only a +personal letter, to satisfy my own curiosity. Best of luck to the +others. Goodbye. I had to leave the theatre to answer this call, and I +am anxious to get back to my seat."</p> + +<p>Garry hung up the receiver, and then turned and asked the Chief if he +was satisfied.</p> + +<p>"Indeed I am, and I wish you boys all the luck in the world in your new +station," said the Chief. The three boys then took their leave. They +returned immediately to Canal Street to see if they were still in time +to buy a rifle for Phil from the old gunsmith.</p> + +<p>They arrived at the shop just in time to find him locking the door. He +recognized them immediately, and had no hesitancy in opening up his +store again. Phil soon found a rifle to his liking, and Garry replaced +the compass that he had dropped when he was lost in the woods; +ammunition was also procured, and then Garry purchased a small automatic +revolver, deciding that this would be a wise project in view of the kind +of work that they might be<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[Pg 30]</a></span> called upon to do in running down the band +of smugglers.</p> + +<p>"Now," said Garry, "I wonder if there is anything more that we will +need?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Dick, "I think we should procure new, heavy pocket knives. I +have broken the big blade of mine, and you remember that Phil's was +taken away from him by LeBlanc and Anderson that time that they left him +tied to the tree in the forest."</p> + +<p>"That is a wise suggestion," remarked Garry, as he turned to the old man +and asked to see something in combination knives.</p> + +<p>"Here is something that I frequently sell, both to campers and +woodsmen," said the old gunsmith. "You see it has one heavy blade, +suitable for skinning a small animal, and in addition has a heavy +canopener."</p> + +<p>The knives met all requirements, so each boy procured one. The last +thing bought was an ample supply of batteries for their flashlights.</p> + +<p>"There," said Garry, "I think that completes everything we have to buy +except a supply of food. We can get that in the morning, and I have some +ideas of what we should buy. Of course, this time we won't have to +supply ourselves with enough food for a month, as we will probably make +the town of Hobart our base of supplies. However, my idea is to get a +very small compact bundle of concentrated<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[Pg 31]</a></span> foods, such as bar chocolate +and highly concentrated soup. This, with a small portion of tea and +coffee, can be packed into a very small bundle, and yet were one lost in +the woods, he would find that such a supply would last him more than a +week."</p> + +<p>Bidding the old gunsmith goodnight, they returned to the hotel, meeting +Lieut. Murphy on the way. "Sure boys, I hope you will forget everything +that has happened this evening. It was only last week that I picked up +three boys who were going up into the woods to shoot Indians, and I +didn't know but that you might be tarred with the same brush."</p> + +<p>"Don't let that bother you at all, Lieutenant. I suppose you have to do +your duty just as you see it, so we will forget about it, and say +goodnight."</p> + +<p>They reached the Penobscot Exchange, and getting their key from the +clerk, went directly to their room. As Garry popped open the door, he +uttered a shout of surprise, for there, making himself comfortable in an +easy chair, sat Nate Webster.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[Pg 32]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV.</h2> + +<h3>THE TORN MAP.</h3> + + +<p>"Well," said Nate, "it seems to me you fellows keep rather late hours. I +have been waiting for you upwards of two hours. Where have you been +keeping yourself? I calculate likely as not you fellows have been to a +theatre."</p> + +<p>"Half of your guess is correct," said Garry, with a laugh, "but since +leaving the show, we have had a wild time. First place, we found a dead +man, and second place, we got arrested."</p> + +<p>"'Sho' now, you don't say so. What have you fellows been doing that got +you in the grip of the law?"</p> + +<p>"Why, as to that, Nate, I can hardly say myself," said Garry. "Things +came so thick and fast, that I haven't yet found out what it was all +about, so I think now would be as good a time as any for each one of us +to tell his story, and just for the sake of having things in order, and +because I have so little to tell, I will take the first turn. When we +went<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[Pg 33]</a></span> into the old abandoned boarding house, for such as I discovered it +to be, I searched the entire lower floor and the cellar, and finding +nothing, was about to make my way up the stairs, when I leaned too heavy +against the balustrade, and in another moment I found myself crashing to +the floor below. Next thing I knew, Dick and Phil here came tumbling out +after me, and in another few moments, we found ourselves arrested and +taken to the police station; now that lets me out. Now Dick, your story +is the next shortest, and I don't suppose that anything happened to you +that was any more exciting than my search."</p> + +<p>"Don't you fool yourself on that score," said Dick, "because I think I +have some very startling news. There has been so much excitement in the +last hour or two that I have given little or no thought to it. I went, +as you know, to the top floor, and there hearing nothing or seeing no +light, I simply crept from door to door, peeking through the keyhole, +and then listening closely to see if I could hear anything stirring +within. Search of several doors revealed nothing, until I came to one +back of which I believed was several men, as I seemed to hear a low +murmur of voices. The keyhole was plugged up, so I got down on my knees; +I could see no light coming out from beneath the door. I was certain +someone was in the room, so very cau<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[Pg 34]</a></span>tiously I turned the handle, but +the door refused to budge an inch. However, there was one way to find +out. In getting out my knife, I drilled a small hole through the door, +using the point of the knife. I had no sooner finished this, when a +small gleam of light came through the door, showing that I had not been +wrong in my conclusions. Without making any noise, I enlarged the hole, +so that I could get a clearer view of the room. There were three men +sitting about a table, playing cards. It was certain that the screams +did not come from this room, and I was about to knock on the door, when +suddenly I recognized the men. You remember the week before we went into +the big woods, and the adventure we had when we caught the three tramps +in our shack by the river? Well, right there, sitting at that table, +were the identical three men for whom we received the reward!"</p> + +<p>"You must be mistaken Dick," remarked Garry. "Those three were dangerous +men, but I don't believe they could have escaped from the jail in +Portland."</p> + +<p>"Nevertheless," said Dick, "I am absolutely certain that those are the +three. There are any number of ways in which they might have gotten +away. There is even a chance that they have been tried by this time, and +have been released."</p> + +<p>"That seems hardly possible," interrupted Phil.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[Pg 35]</a></span> "The authorities were +sure they had the right men or they would never have given us the +reward."</p> + +<p>The entire matter was very puzzling to the boys, when Nate, who was +always on the job, broke in with a suggestion. "Why don't you fellows +telephone down to 'Moose Boone' and ask him if the tramps got away."</p> + +<p>"I don't think he would know anything about it," said Garry, "for I was +talking with him on the 'phone, when we were in Augusta, and he didn't +make any mention of it."</p> + +<p>Then Dick came to bat with a suggestion. "Why don't we telephone to Sam +Preston, the newspaper man, surely he would know if anybody would." The +call was immediately put in, and while they were waiting for an answer, +they made use of the opportunity, and asked Nate how it was he happened +to be there. "Why, I simply got a long distance call from the Chief +Ranger, asking me to meet you boys here, to give you whatever +suggestions I could as to the place you are going, and also to see if I +could remember the names of two or three of my friends in that part of +the country who might be of some help when you need it."</p> + +<p>"Why, of course, Garry," remarked Dick, "you remember the Chief of +Customs telling us he would arrange to have Nate meet us here? However, +per<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[Pg 36]</a></span>haps we had better defer getting any advice from Nate until Phil has +told his story."</p> + +<p>That moment the telephone rang, and on answering it, Garry found that +the person on the other end of the wire was Sam Preston. After chatting +a moment with Sam, he asked if there was any news of the three burglars +whom they had caught early in the summer. There was silence for several +moments in the room, while Sam talked, and then with a goodbye, Garry +replaced the receiver on the hook, and turned around to face his +companions.</p> + +<p>"Well, Dick, you sure hit the matter about right. The three burglars +were brought up for a hearing, and were allowed to go free on bail, +pending their trial. They took advantage of the opportunity to +disappear. Now the authorities of Portland are searching high and low +for them."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Dick, "the reason I hurried out of the house there, bringing +you fellows with me, was because I saw one of them starting toward the +door, and believe me, I knew more than to stack up against three of them +all alone. We have made enough enemies in the past few weeks without +getting others on our trail.</p> + +<p>"That is something we can discuss later. I suggest now that Phil tell us +what happened on the second floor, as he seems to be the one that had +the real adventure of the night." Phil told his story,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[Pg 37]</a></span> and in the +speaking of it, recollected the torn piece of paper that the old man +with his dying words had given him. He pulled it from his pocket, and +the three boys, as well as Nate, spread it out on the table and began to +examine it. It seemed to be a rough, crudely drawn map with a dotted +line, running from the spot marked by a figure 1, with a circle drawn +around it. The dotted line, however, unfortunately ran direct to the +part that had been torn off when Phil seized the paper from the old +man's assailant. On the reverse of the paper, written in a laborious and +cramped hand, was the following inscription: "The lost mine lies 100 +paces from the spot marked 2. The land mark noted on the map as figure +1, is a ravine, exactly two miles east of the Shohela River, at the +point where it makes a sharp turn above the town of Jennings. Start at +the mouth of that ravine and travel directly north for about two miles +and one-half, until you come to——"</p> + +<p>Here the boys found that the missing part of the note corresponded to +the portion which had been torn off during the struggle.</p> + +<p>"Well," said Nate, "the pesky map doesn't mean to do you much good now, +does it? I know of the place mentioned in that note, but I have never +been there, so I can't tell you much about what the old something or +other might be. Without wanting<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[Pg 38]</a></span> to throw any cold water upon your +plans, I should say to forget about the whole business. I know the Maine +woods pretty well, and I never heard tell of any mines which have been +found in this part of the country, except, maybe, limestone mines, and +surely nobody would have a secret map as to where a limestone mine would +be, so I think you had better just tuck that piece of paper away and +forget all about it."</p> + +<p>The boys, however, with romantic ideas of finding a lost gold mine +hidden away somewhere in the wilds of the Maine woods, refused to be +discouraged by Nate's pessimistic remarks, and each one decided, that at +the first opportunity, they would visit the scene told of in the map, +and see if possible they could not discover the secret of the lost mine.</p> + +<p>"Now boys," said Nate, "we might as well get over the main business of +the evening, that being to tell you about what I know about Hobart. It +has been a good many years since I was in that part of the woods, but I +remember it as well as though I had been there only yesterday. Hobart is +a small town, nowhere near the size of Millinocket. About ten years ago +it was the center of industrial lumbering operations. As a matter of +fact, Garry, I believe that your father was interested in the timber +cutting of that place at that time. It is only four or five miles away +from the Canadian border,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[Pg 39]</a></span> and about fifty miles to the south the States +of Maine and New Hampshire and the Dominion of Canada are joined +together. It is right about that point, also, that is, where the three +territories come together, that the National Forest Preserve begins; +that you know, without my telling you, is the movement recently started +by the Government for conservation of the timber lands of the State. +Eventually, every bit of forest land in the State will be under the +control of the government. That means that timber cruisers, appointed by +the government, will go on everybody's land, marking the trees that may +properly be cut. This will prevent ruthless timber owners from clean +cutting great tracts of land, and there will be a perpetual source of +new timber."</p> + +<p>"As for the town of Hobart itself, I have been trying to think ever +since I heard from Augusta of some people that I knew there, but can't +seem to remember a single one. However, as soon as I get back home, I +will inquire from Silas Peabody and some of the other guides if they +remember any people in that section, and I can write you in care of the +postmaster at Hobart. However, I will warn you of this, that as I +remember it, it was a mighty tough town,—border towns nearly always +are,—for you get a good deal of the rougher element of both countries. +That doesn't mean, of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[Pg 40]</a></span> course, that you won't find a few mighty nice +people up there, although I don't suppose your work will allow you to +make many friends. I am sorry that I can't tell you more about the +country, but I don't doubt that you will be able to take care of +yourselves as well there as you have in your first station. The only +thing I do hope is that you have seen the end of LeBlanc and his +friend."</p> + +<p>The hour by this time had grown late, so the boys all hopped into bed. +Nate retired to his own room, promising to arouse them at an early hour, +so that they might get a good start for their new station.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[Pg 41]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V.</h2> + +<h3>PHIL GETS A CLUE.</h3> + + +<p>True to his word, old Nate woke the boys up almost with the dawn. +Hurrying into their clothes, they went into the dining-room, where a +sleepy waitress took their orders for a substantial breakfast. They +chatted merrily with Nate during the meal, and then bade him goodbye, as +his train went an hour earlier than theirs. Nothing remained for them to +do in Bangor except to buy the provisions that Garry had spoken of the +previous night. They found what they sought at a large grocery store +which, on account of the early hour, had barely opened its doors for +business.</p> + +<p>"There," said Garry, "that completes our work in Bangor. We might as +well take a last look at the town, because it is probable that we won't +come back here for some time."</p> + +<p>They proceeded to the station and found that their train was being made +up at that moment.</p> + +<p>"I suggest that we take seats in the smoker,"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[Pg 42]</a></span> remarked Garry, "for +although none of us smoke, we might make some acquaintance there as we +did with Nate when we first went into the big woods."</p> + +<p>This suggestion met with hearty approval from the boys, and being the +first on the train, they were able to pick a double seat, and found +plenty of room in which to stow away their knapsacks and rifles. The +train slowly filled up with a motley assemblage. There were several men +in the usual garb of the forests, as well as a number of farmers. Two or +three well dressed men looked as though they might be traveling +salesmen. Half a dozen card games were soon started, and the boys found +plenty to watch and thus occupy their time. Directly in back of Phil sat +two men clad in rough corduroys and high boots. Both of the men were +talking confidentially in the French language. Phil, as our readers +know, was as conversant with French as he was with English, and for a +time paid no attention to the remarks of the pair in back of him. Garry +and Dick, in the meantime, were chatting away like a couple of magpies.</p> + +<p>Suddenly Phil pricked up his ears and after a moment signalled his two +chums to keep silent.</p> + +<p>Garry immediately had a hunch that Phil was hearing something that might +prove to be of advantage to them later on, so in order that their +silence might not be noticed, fished out the pocket checker<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[Pg 43]</a></span>board, and +soon he and Dick were immersed in the intricacies of the game, leaving +Phil free to devote his entire attention to the conversation that was +taking place in back of him.</p> + +<p>After nearly a half of an hour, Phil lifted his head, and catching the +eye of Garry, made it known to him that he wanted him to follow him out. +Getting up and stretching, Phil nonchalantly made his way into another +car, followed shortly by both Garry and Dick. Finding seats in the far +end of the car, where their conversation could not be overheard, Garry +eagerly inquired what Phil had heard.</p> + +<p>"I want both of you boys," remarked Phil, "to pay special attention to +those two men who were sitting in back of me, and impress their +appearance upon your memories, as I believe they are the first clue to +our mission at Hobart. Unfortunately, they do not talk very much about +their plans, but from what I gather, they are on their way there to +purchase furs, and they made special remarks about the good bargains +they could drive, hinting at the fact that the furs were smuggled in +across the border. Of course, it is hardly probable that they belong to +the smugglers' gang, although, if we keep close tabs on them, it seems +to me that they will eventually lead us to the headquarters of the +border smugglers."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[Pg 44]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Don't you think you should have stayed there?" inquired Garry.</p> + +<p>"No, it was safe enough to leave," answered Phil, "because they had +begun to talk on entirely different topics, one remarking to the other +that they had better stop further talk of the furs, for fear they might +be overheard by someone. Fortunately for us, they have no idea that they +have already been overheard."</p> + +<p>"There is one thing we ought to consider," said Garry. "In the event +that they get off the train before we do, it seems to me that one of us +should get off at that same time and follow them. Whoever it is can +leave his knapsack and rifle behind, and the remaining two will take +care of them. In the event of such a thing, boys, I would recommend that +Phil be the one to get off the train, as he is the only one of us whose +knowledge of French is great enough to allow him to understand what a +native Frenchman is saying."</p> + +<p>This plan being decided upon, the boys made their way back to the +smoker. The two men had left their seats, and for a moment the boys were +worried, then remembered that no stop had been made during the time +which they had left the smoking car. A hasty search soon revealed the +fact that the men had joined in a card game at the far end of the car. +Knowing that the men would not talk busi<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[Pg 45]</a></span>ness while in the game, the +boys did not bother to try and find some way of overhearing their +conversation.</p> + +<p>The boys, in guarded tones, so that they might not be overheard by +anyone in an adjoining seat, talked over the importance of the clue, +that they had so fortunately stumbled upon.</p> + +<p>"It strikes me that this is our lucky morning," remarked Garry. "Here we +might have been days and days before we ever found the slightest bit of +evidence on which to base our search for the band of smugglers, but in +less than an hour after the starting of our mission, we stumble upon +this very important bit of help."</p> + +<p>As Garry talked, he kept glancing out of the corner of his eye at a +tall, rangy individual, who since the boys had entered the car, had kept +constant watch on them.</p> + +<p>"Don't look up now," he whispered to his companions, "but a few minutes +later casually glance across the aisle two seats up from where we are +sitting, and look at that tall chap who is sitting there reading a +newspaper. Ever since we got on board the train he has been watching us +over the top of the paper. I wonder if there isn't some way in which we +could get into conversation with him, and see who he is."</p> + +<p>The words were hardly out of Garry's mouth,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[Pg 46]</a></span> and before his chums had +had a chance to survey the stranger, the object of their conversation +threw down his newspaper and getting up sauntered over to where the trio +was sitting. The boys looked up and gazed inquiringly at the newcomer, +who seemed not a whit abashed at their scrutiny.</p> + +<p>"Going on a camping trip?" he inquired with a pleasant smile.</p> + +<p>"Why yes, we are," said Garry quickly, before either of the others could +make a reply. "Are you also?" for Garry had noticed that a cased rifle +and blanket roll were stowed under the stranger's seat.</p> + +<p>"Why yes and no," answered the stranger. "I am going partly on business +and partly on pleasure. Mind if I sit in with you a few minutes"</p> + +<p>"Why, no indeed," said Garry cordially, as he moved over and made room +for the tall stranger. "I suppose we might as well make ourselves +acquainted, so I will start in by introducing myself. My name is Garry +Boone, and these are my two chums, Dick Wallace and Phil Durant."</p> + +<p>"My name is Fernald, Arthur Fernald, having no particular home, nor any +particular business. Where are you boys bound for?"</p> + +<p>"Why," said Garry, after a moment's hesitation, "we're bound for the +border, but just where we will make our headquarters we do not know as +yet, probably just whatever the fancy seizes us."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[Pg 47]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Expect to get any hunting?" inquired the stranger. "Some mighty fine +specimens of moose and caribou are to be found in that locality."</p> + +<p>This remark made Garry suspicious, and he immediately shot this question +at the stranger. "Don't you know that the law is on moose and caribou, +and that there won't be an open season for at least five more years?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said the stranger, laconically. "I just wanted to see whether you +boys knew that."</p> + +<p>Garry was inclined to be angry at the man's answer, but as Fernald made +the remark with a smile, Garry felt that they could not take offence at +him.</p> + +<p>Dick broke into the conversation with a query as to whether the stranger +knew anything about the town of Hobart. Too late, Garry gave him a +warning kick, but the danger was done. Fernald looked intently at Dick, +and then at the other two.</p> + +<p>"Why, yes," he remarked, "I know considerable about the town. It is only +two or three weeks since I have been there. Anything in particular that +you want to know about it?"</p> + +<p>"Not especially," answered Dick, who was on guard now that Garry had +warned him. "We just happened to hear a friend of ours, a guide named +Webster, saying that it was not very far above the National Forest +Reserve."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[Pg 48]</a></span></p> + +<p>"You aren't, by any chance, speaking of Nate Webster of Millinocket are +you?" he inquired with a smile.</p> + +<p>Here Garry broke in the conversation.</p> + +<p>"Do you know Webster?"</p> + +<p>"I should say I do," said Fernald. "I have known him for a good many +years. It may surprise you to know and hear," he turned to Garry, "that +I know your father, 'Moose' Boone."</p> + +<p>This, for a moment, seemed to free the man of suspicion, although, as +Garry told himself, the man had not said or done anything to warrant +their being suspicious of him. Garry was simply following the wise rule +not to tell any more about yourself than the other person does to you.</p> + +<p>They chatted for some time about many things concerning the woods, and +while the boys were careful not to mention anything that would give the +man who called himself Fernald any inkling as to their mission, they +could not help notice but that he was trying very hard to pump them as +to their reason for going to the particular part of Maine for which they +were bound. By this time, it was nearly noon and Fernald volunteered the +information that there was a restaurant in the station of a little town +where they would make their next stop, and at which the train would stop +long enough to allow them to get their lunch. Just before the train drew +into the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[Pg 49]</a></span> station, Fernald remarked in a bantering tone, "I suppose you +fellows know there is considerable smuggling going on all the time, +across the International line."</p> + +<p>Garry looked up quickly, and met the stranger's quizzical glance +squarely. "Why, I suppose I have heard about as much of it as the +average citizen of Maine has. Why do you ask that question? Do you know +anything special about it?"</p> + +<p>"No," answered the stranger, "I was just merely asking for the sake of +asking a question. Well, so long boys, I may see you at luncheon, just +now I want to finish an article I was reading in a newspaper about the +low price that furs are bringing this summer."</p> + +<p>With that as a parting shot, he returned to his seat, leaving the three +boys wondering just who he might be.</p> + +<p>"I am very suspicious about this man Fernald," Garry told his two +companions. "He seems very anxious to know all about our business, and +his two hints about smuggling and the low price of furs lead me to +believe that he was trying to pump us. Do you fellows think the same, or +am I unduly suspicious?"</p> + +<p>Phil, who was naturally a solid-headed boy, thought for a moment, and +then agreed that there was something mighty peculiar about the actions +of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[Pg 50]</a></span> their new acquaintance, while Dick claimed that he had been +suspicious of him from the moment that he had first come over to their +seat.</p> + +<p>By this time the train drew into the station, and the boys hastened out +of the train and into the restaurant, where they were soon eating a +hearty meal. They were joined by Fernald, who took the vacant seat +opposite Garry. Fernald ordered a cup of coffee to be brought to him +immediately, and suddenly, to the amazement of the boys, he looked +straight at Garry, and gave his cup two sharp raps against the edge of +the saucer. He waited a moment, and followed this by three taps. Garry +waited for an instant, and then deciding to find out whether or not the +tapping was accidental, gave the same signal. The man called Fernald +smiled, and gave two soft taps of the cup before he replaced it on the +saucer. The man of whom they had been so suspicious during the last +hour, was unmistakably a customs officer!<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[Pg 51]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI.</h2> + +<h3>THE NEW STATION.</h3> + + +<p>"Listen, boys, not a word. Wait till we get back on the train, where the +rumbling of the wheels over the rails will help to cover our words. Even +if we could talk without danger of being overheard, we would not have +time, for this train stops barely long enough to allow one to eat."</p> + +<p>The boys made haste to finish the meal. They had not recovered from +their surprise at finding the stranger was a customs agent even by the +time they were through eating and were back in their seats in the +smoking car.</p> + +<p>"I don't suppose you boys have even started to formulate a plan of +campaign, have you?" asked Fernald.</p> + +<p>"Not yet, sir," replied Garry. "That is, we haven't made up our minds +how to proceed after we have arrived at our headquarters. However, we +have stumbled, or rather Phil has, on what we con<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[Pg 52]</a></span>sider to be a very +important clue, if such it may be called."</p> + +<p>Garry's eyes swept the car, and in a moment he had located the two fur +dealers, who had spoken of the cheap furs to be bought near the border.</p> + +<p>"Do you see the two men who are in the fourth seat from the front of the +car, facing us and playing cards?" he asked.</p> + +<p>Casually, and without attracting any notice, Fernald studied the faces +of the two men. At last, their features having been stamped on his +memory, he turned to Garry, saying:</p> + +<p>"Well, I'll know them if I ever see them again, but what of them?"</p> + +<p>Hastily Garry related the instance of their conversing together in +French, and their remark about the furs.</p> + +<p>"We have planned that if they get off, Phil here will follow them, so +that we won't lose track of them altogether. We are in hopes that they +will eventually lead us to the fountain head of what we are seeking," he +concluded.</p> + +<p>"That would have been the wise thing to do in case you were alone," +Fernald told them.</p> + +<p>"But my being here with you changes the complexion of the matter +somewhat. I think if they get off, it would be best for me to follow +them. That is best for two reasons. Seeing the three of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[Pg 53]</a></span> you together, +would give rise to suspicions were one of you to detach himself suddenly +from the rest and try to take up the trail of these men in their own +town, for that is what it would be should they get off. Then there is +another matter to be taken into consideration. Once let the smuggler +band be caught, and only half of the job is done; the rest lies in +finding the receiving point of these furs so that they may be seized, or +the receivers be made to pay duty that they have evaded. Of course +whoever is buying these furs knows they are shipped across the border as +contraband. I shouldn't be a bit surprised if these men could lead me +direct to something that would show where immense quantities of fur have +gone in the past six months."</p> + +<p>"I wonder where they are going to get off," remarked Garry.</p> + +<p>"That is an extremely simple matter to ascertain. Why not look at the +conductor's checks that are sticking out of their hatbands?" queried +Fernald with a smile.</p> + +<p>"Solid ivory," said Garry disgustedly, as he rapped his forehead sharply +with his knuckles.</p> + +<p>"Nothing to be ashamed of at all, old fellow," said Fernald easily. "It +isn't to be expected that you should know all the tricks of the trade +that you have known about not much more than a day. I've been doing this +sort of work for twenty years now,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[Pg 54]</a></span> and naturally many little bits of +knowledge such as that are second nature to me, as natural as breathing +or sleeping. Wait a minute while I go up and investigate."</p> + +<p>Fernald got up, and acting as though his main idea was just to stretch +his legs, strolled up to the front of the car. Passing the men, he +stopped quite naturally to watch them play. When one of the men under +observance took a trick with an exceptionally good play, he commented +audibly on it. The man turned and smiled, showing his seat check as he +did.</p> + +<p>The system on the railroad was to give different colors for different +stations. Fernald noticed that the checks of both men were of an +identical color, and had the same number of holes punched in them.</p> + +<p>After carelessly watching a moment or two longer, he returned and +without stopping to speak to the boys, went past them and into the next +car.</p> + +<p>Here he engaged a brakeman in conversation, and at last returned to the +boys, who were on tenterhooks to learn of his findings.</p> + +<p>"I have found out that they are going to get off at the third station +from here. However, we do not come to that for nearly two hours, so we +have time enough to make any plans we need. I will follow them, and as +soon as possible will come on to Hobart. However, when I get there, do +not let on<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[Pg 55]</a></span> you know me, as we can be of infinitely more help to each +other if it is not known that we are working together or even know each +other. Whenever the need arises, I will find some way to communicate +with you."</p> + +<p>For the next hour or so, the conversation switched from one topic to +another. Fernald was an interesting talker, and told the boys one or two +of his adventures in the custom work of the United States.</p> + +<p>Suddenly Dick slapped his leg and exclaimed excitedly:</p> + +<p>"By George, our old friend the Hermit has no idea where we have +disappeared to. I wish that we had had a chance at least to say goodbye +to him and explain that we have been sent to a new station."</p> + +<p>"Why not write him a note?" suggested Garry. "You can enclose it in one +to Nate, asking him to deliver it the next time he goes into the woods +to make an inspection trip. Mr. Fernald here will mail it for you when +he gets off the train."</p> + +<p>"That's a bully idea, Garry. Didn't have brains enough to think of it +myself," chattered Dick.</p> + +<p>"Never mind, old timer. Two heads are better than one you know, as the +barrel said," laughed Garry.</p> + +<p>Diving into his pocket, Dick drew forth the substantial notebook he +always carried, and was soon<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[Pg 56]</a></span> busy writing a note, doing it as well as +the jogging motion of the train would allow.</p> + +<p>Finally he finished the note to the Hermit, and hastily scribbling one +to Nate, enclosed the two in an envelope, addressed to the Deputy Ranger +in Millinocket.</p> + +<p>"There," he said, as he sealed the flap of the envelope. "Seems funny to +be writing a note to the Hermit, doesn't it. The shoe generally used to +be on the other foot when we were on the Patrol. By the way, there's one +thing that's been puzzling me for some little time. What led you to +think we were in any way connected with the same branch of work that you +are, Mr. Fernald?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, I'm no mind reader, or Sherlock Holmes," said Fernald with a hearty +laugh. "It simply happens that I saw you in the Chief's office at +Augusta, when I was there getting some final instructions. The Chief was +going to introduce me, but I told him I preferred getting acquainted in +my own way. To tell you the truth, at that time I thought the Chief had +gone crazy, sending boys, but after looking you over, and unsuccessfully +trying to pump you, I decided you boys had the right stuff in you, so +made myself acquainted. Then too, I had a quiet bit of fun with you. Own +up, now. Didn't you make up your minds that I was a suspicious +character,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[Pg 57]</a></span> especially after I had tried to get out of you what your +business was?"</p> + +<p>The boys looked sheepishly at each other, and then began to laugh.</p> + +<p>"We must admit it, Mr. Fernald. We had you all ticketed as a person to +keep a sharp eye on, until you gave the signal," confessed Garry.</p> + +<p>"That's right, boys, one cannot be too careful. When you are on a +mission of this kind, a mighty safe rule to follow is never to trust a +person until he has unmistakably proven himself to be absolutely +trustworthy. If you follow that rule, you'll never go wrong. Once in a +while, of course, you'll find yourself in a position where you must use +your own judgment. In that case, make sure you are dealing with a good +patriotic American citizen, and you'll hit the key pretty nearly every +time. Guess that little lecture will conclude our conversation for a +while. We will be at the station where our friends disembark in a few +minutes now, and I want to beat them to the door, so they will have no +idea I am interested in their movements."</p> + +<p>He got up and shook hands with the trio, and then in a loud tone, for +the benefit of anyone that might be listening:</p> + +<p>"Goodbye Boys, have a good camping trip and don't get lost in the Big +Timber."</p> + +<p>The boys echoed their goodbyes, and their new<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[Pg 58]</a></span> friend made his way to +his seat where he unearthed a shabby old black traveling bag that +appeared to have seen long and constant usage, as well as his blanket +roll and rifle.</p> + +<p>In the meantime, the card players had returned to their seat near that +of the boys to get their luggage. They were chattering volubly in +French, and Phil strained his ears, hoping to catch some additional +clue, but their conversation was mainly about the pleasures of the trip +they were just concluding.</p> + +<p>"What are we going to do for supper?" inquired Dick.</p> + +<p>"There! He's off again, Phil!" declared Garry. "It's only been four +hours since he ate, and now he's thinking about supper."</p> + +<p>"Well, four hours is four hours, and two more will make six, and persons +should eat once every six hours. That's just human nature," protested +Dick. He knew his chums were just ragging him, as they always did about +his appetite, but he could never resist the temptation to argue with +them, and protest that there was nothing abnormal about his capacity for +food.</p> + +<p>"I'm going back and find the conductor and see what arrangements have +been made for feeding the hungry. And I'll bet a cooky you two are just +as interested in the matter as I am," and Dick flounced out of his seat +and went in search of the conductor.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[Pg 59]</a></span> He came back shortly and announced +they would stop an hour at the next town, about an hour's ride distant, +for supper.</p> + +<p>"Also they put on a sleeper there, and me for that. It beats sleeping in +a day coach all hollow."</p> + +<p>Came at last the station, and they hustled out to the little frame hotel +that stood on the other side of the tracks. This town was more or less +of a freight junction. They had a surprisingly good dinner, topped off +with a famous New England pudding composed of Indian meal, baked, with +grated maple sugar and pure cream poured on top of it.</p> + +<p>Finishing the meal, they crossed the tracks back to the train. A sudden +breeze lifted Phil's hat, causing him to chase it along the side of a +string of freight cars. He stooped to recover it, looking under the +freight car, as he did so. What he saw on the other side sent him back +to his chums hotfoot.</p> + +<p>"Say, fellows, don't think I'm just 'seeing things,' but those three +tramps are sitting down there by the tracks eating!"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[Pg 60]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII.</h2> + +<h3>THE TRAIL BEGINS.</h3> + + +<p>"Make a break for the train, boys," ordered Garry hastily. "We don't +care to have them get a glimpse of us. I'll wager that they are making +for the Canadian border, since as we know they have jumped their bail +and are probably making for the national boundary line. Bringing them +back will be a more difficult task than it would should they stay in the +State of Maine."</p> + +<p>"All I hope," remarked Phil, "is that they don't linger on the way, but +keep right on going. The chances are that our search for the smuggling +band will provide us with a new crop of people who are not especially +friendly toward us, and old enemies will not be welcomed at the new +headquarters."</p> + +<p>The boys hunted up the conductor, and provided themselves with berths +for the long night ride. They turned in early, for the adventures of the +previous night had robbed them of some of their wonted sleep. Morning +found them making their<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[Pg 61]</a></span> way through vast tracts of forest lands. The +train made its usual stop at an eating place and the passengers +disembarked for their morning meal. The boys hurried through the +breakfast, in order that they might avail themselves of the remaining +few minutes to make a hasty search of the train and vicinity of the +depot to see whether or not the tramps were anywhere in the +neighborhood.</p> + +<p>The search proved unavailing, and they returned to their place in the +smoking car, as the sleeper had been taken off at that station. The +remainder of the ride for that day passed uneventfully. About the only +topic of conversation was where they should make their headquarters when +they arrived in their new location. They discussed the feasability of +hiring lodgings in the town of Hobart, and after a short discussion +discarded this plan, since it would not be in keeping with their +characters as campers.</p> + +<p>"My idea," explained Garry, "is to branch out from Hobart some little +distance in the woods, and there for a time being, build a double +lean-to. The weather gives promise of being fair for some time to come, +and if we find that circumstances warrant our staying in that vicinity, +we can without a great deal of trouble build a pole cabin."</p> + +<p>Late afternoon brought them to the town of Hobart, and cramped and weary +from their thirty-six hour ride on the train, they gladly disembarked.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[Pg 62]</a></span></p> + +<p>The little town of Hobart lay on the other side of the railroad tracks. +It was like so many other small Maine towns, consisting of a huge +general store, a smithy, which was also a garage, a great ramshackle +building that was once a restaurant and a rooming house, evidently used +by trappers who came there to dispose of their furs, and lumberjacks on +their way to lumber operations in that vicinity. The boys proceeded +directly to the general store, and here made inquiries as to the owner +of the vast timber lands that entirely surrounded Hobart.</p> + +<p>The shrewd old Yankee storekeeper told them that all the timber land in +that section was controlled by one of the great paper and pulp companies +of the State, and that campers never bothered to get permission to use +the land.</p> + +<p>Further inquiry brought out the information that the national boundary +line was only about three miles from Hobart.</p> + +<p>The boys decided to hike directly into the woods, build for themselves a +fire, and sleep in the open, reserving the next morning to find a +suitable camping place where they might erect their lean-to. They +provided themselves with a week's supply of provisions, finding that +they could come into town often enough to replenish their supplies as +they ran out.</p> + +<p>"Now," remarked Garry, after their provisions had been purchased, "we +can do one of two things,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[Pg 63]</a></span> either strike directly into the woods and +cook our supper over a camp fire, or we can go over to the restaurant +and have our meal there, which appeals most to me."</p> + +<p>"I would suggest," said Phil, "that we eat tonight at the restaurant, +not that I am too lazy to cook in the woods, but because it is probable +that a good share of the people who live in this town, but who do not +have real homes here, also eat there. In this way, we can become +familiar at least with faces of those who inhabit the place, and who +knows but what it may be the headquarters of the very crew that we are +seeking."</p> + +<p>"I think that's a prime suggestion," said Garry heartily, "so I move we +leave our rifles and knapsacks here at the general store, and get our +supper."</p> + +<p>Before leaving they inquired from the storekeeper what would be the best +route to take to bring them into the woods. They were told that to the +eastward was a small farming community, and that the timber line did not +begin in that direction for a matter of ten miles, but that to the +southwest, a half-hour's walk, would bring them to the dense forests.</p> + +<p>Making sure before they left their supplies at the store, that it would +remain open until they had time to finish their meal, they repaired +directly to the restaurant. Here they found a picturesque scene.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[Pg 64]</a></span> A long +counter ran the entire length of the room, presided over by an old +French Canadian, clad in a red flannel shirt, rough corduroy trousers +and high boots. To one side of the room were several tables, at which +men were already seated, playing cards or checkers. A number of fine +specimens of moose and deer heads hung from the walls.</p> + +<p>The boys, perched upon high stools, were soon enjoying their meal. While +they were eating, they kept their ears and eyes wide open, but their +diligent attention brought them no reward. True, there were a number of +rough looking characters about the room, who might have been members of +or even heads of the particular band they had come to that country to +find. The meal over, Phil wanted them to remain for a while, in the hope +that some stray bit of conversation would give them something to work +on, but Garry vetoed this idea, for the reason that there still remained +only a half hour or so of daylight and he thought it would be wise for +them to get to a point to make themselves a camp before darkness fell.</p> + +<p>Retrieving their packs and rifles from the general store, they started +for the woods, first filling their canteens, for it would probably be +unlikely that they could find a spring immediately on their arrival. A +half an hour's brisk walk brought them to the beginning of the timber +line. The rapidly gather<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[Pg 65]</a></span>ing dusk signalled the quick approach of +nightfall, and they had barely penetrated the forest when Garry called a +halt.</p> + +<p>The first duty was to build a fire, and in a short time they had +gathered enough brush to start their camp fire. A short search soon +resulted in their finding an old fallen tree, and in a few minutes they +had procured from this enough firewood to last them out the night. The +last task before rolling in for the evening was to get a number of +spruce boughs for making the usual mattress for anyone sleeping out in +the open in the great forests of Maine.</p> + +<p>Garry awoke with the dawn, and soon tumbled his companions out. Fresh +wood was thrown on the few remaining embers, and in a short time coffee +was boiling and bacon was being fried, while Dick superintended the +making of a big batch of spider bread. It was the first meal that the +boys had cooked over a camp fire in several days, and they heartily +enjoyed every mouthful of it.</p> + +<p>Breakfast over, the first task of the morning was to locate a suitable +place in which to pitch their temporary camp. Striking out to the +southwest, they spread out fanshaped, but not so far away that they +could not hear the sound of each other's voices. Zigzagging back and +forth, they searched for a spring. It was nearly a half of an hour +before their<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[Pg 66]</a></span> search was rewarded with success, when Dick's call brought +the three together.</p> + +<p>Accidentally he had stumbled on an ideal camp site. It was one of those +natural clearings that are so often found in the densest forests. Nearby +was a clear spring, with cold water that trickled into an ever widening +forest stream.</p> + +<p>The boys immediately decided that a day's search might not have provided +them with a better spot, and in a short time were bustling actively +about building their new camp. This consisted merely of throwing +together a brush lean-to.</p> + +<p>The brush lean-to is the simplest sort of forest home. It is made by +erecting two poles, six to seven feet in height, and about six to eight +feet apart. In back of these, at a distance of some six feet, are placed +two more poles about one-half the height of the first pair. Four poles +are laid on the tops of these, secured by cutting a cleft in the tops, +and laid so as to form the frame work for the roof of the lean-to. The +next step in the building of such a habitation is to lay poles at an +interval of a foot or a foot and a half along the roof part of the +lean-to.</p> + +<p>When erecting the uprights, care is taken to leave two or three bits of +branch project at intervals along the length of the poles. On these long +saplings are laid. The frame work of the lean-to is<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[Pg 67]</a></span> then complete, and +the finishing step consists of cutting great quantities of brush.</p> + +<p>These pieces of brush are hung on the saplings that have been spread +across the frame work, the branches being crudely woven in and out of +each other. The front of the lean-to is generally left open. Some +woodsmen prefer to enclose all four sides, but the case of the brush +shack being built by the boys, the front part was left open, since their +idea was to build another lean-to directly opposite and about four feet +away. In the open space between the two shacks could be built a camp +fire.</p> + +<p>The crude shacks thus constructed furnished them with ample protection +during fair weather, and even during a moderate summer shower. Of +course, in an extended rain, such shacks would be next to useless, as +the steady downpour of rain would soon beat through the brush roof.</p> + +<p>The shacks being completed, they chopped a quantity of firewood, using +parts of fallen trees, wind wracked ruins that had dried and seasoned +under the summer sun. This was stored away in one of the lean-tos. A +balsam tree being found, quantities of the branches were cut to furnish +beds for the three. The camp was now completed, and it being nearly +noon, Dick departed into the woods to knock down a few squirrels for +lunch. He was back in less than a half of an hour with three fat<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[Pg 68]</a></span> +squirrels, and these skinned, impaled on a sharp stick, and wrapped with +a slice or two of thickly cut bacon, were soon roasted over the red +embers of the fire.</p> + +<p>"Now, before we get down to business, who's for a trip to the border +line? I want to see just how it feels to be in two countries at once," +suggested Phil.</p> + +<p>The boys agreeing, Garry drew out his pocket map and consulted it, +bearing in mind the directions given them by the storekeeper. He decided +they were less than five miles distant from the boundary, so striking +out, they trudged steadily in what they believed was the proper +direction. A walk of about an hour and a half brought them within what +they considered was the proper location of the boundary line, then +striking out toward the north-east, they spread out in search of one of +the monuments or cairns that are erected at frequent intervals along +border lines. Luckily, a few minutes' search brought them to one of the +white stone posts which are common wherever two countries come together. +On the top of the monument, chiseled in deep letters, were the words +"Boundary Line." On the one side was cut "United States," while on the +other was the word "Canada." Dick immediately straddled the post, +exclaiming:</p> + +<p>"Well, this is the first time that I have ever been<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[Pg 69]</a></span> in two countries at +exactly the same moment." His enthusiasm was so infectious that Garry +and Phil immediately followed suit and tried the novel experience.</p> + +<p>Doubling back on the trail over which they had come, mid-afternoon found +them back at their camp site. Here a surprise awaited them, for making +free use of their coffee pot and one of their frying pans was a man, +cooking a meal over their camp fire.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[Pg 70]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII.</h2> + +<h3>THE GUM HUNTER.</h3> + + +<p>"That chap seems to be making himself right at home in our camp, doesn't +he, Garry," remarked Phil.</p> + +<p>"So he does, but that is the way of many of the old timers in the woods. +They consider it all right to make use of anyone's camp so long as they +take nothing and do no harm, and leave some sign that they have been +there, provided the owners do not return before he leaves. He's a +picturesque-looking old fellow, isn't he? Looks something like our old +Hermit friend. Let's go and see who he is," concluded Garry.</p> + +<p>They made their way to the lean-to, for they had stopped when they saw +the new occupant of the camp.</p> + +<p>"Howdy, stranger," hailed Garry.</p> + +<p>"Howdy, boys," he returned. "This your camp here?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[Pg 71]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Yes, we just threw it up yesterday. Are you from round these parts?" +asked Garry.</p> + +<p>"Callate that's just what I am. Name's Dudley, George Washington Dudley, +generally called 'Dud' for short by my friends."</p> + +<p>Garry then proceeded to tell his name and those of his companions. The +old man left off his cooking long enough to shake hands, and then +resumed his turning of the bacon.</p> + +<p>"Got hungry and didn't want to start a new fire somewhere, and so used +your place here. Wasn't expecting to be gone so long today, and didn't +bring anything with me. Just helped myself. Will make it all right next +time I come this way. What you boys doing up here? 'Spose you're from +the city, but you don't look as though you were exact strangers to the +woods. Sensible looking clothes you've got on, too."</p> + +<p>"We're figuring on camping here for a time, and looking the country +over. What's your business?" asked Garry, with the true Yankee +inquisitiveness.</p> + +<p>"Oh, I do several things. Just now I'm a gum hunter."</p> + +<p>"A what?" chimed in Phil.</p> + +<p>"Gum hunter," responded the old man briefly, as though that settled the +question.</p> + +<p>"I am afraid we don't know just what a gum<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[Pg 72]</a></span> hunter is," confessed Garry, +speaking for his chums as well as himself.</p> + +<p>"No, I 'spose you don't. Can't expect city boys to know a great deal +anyway. Well, a gum hunter is just what it sounds like. I go through the +woods getting spruce gum for the drug stores. Make a good living that +way part of a year. Get a lot of druggists all way from Portland to +Boston who won't buy spruce gum from anyone but me. They know I send 'em +only the best. Understand what a gum hunter is now?"</p> + +<p>"Thank you, yes," said Garry. "But you said you did other things. Mind +telling us what they are? We are not inquisitive, only this is something +new to us."</p> + +<p>"Sure I don't mind. Sometimes I pick yarbs. There's a powerful lot of +them in the woods, like sassafras root and checkerberry and things like +that. I sell these to the same druggists that buy my gum. Then sometimes +I guide parties. In the wintertime I trap. And sometimes in the spring, +I work on the log drive on the river. There's lots of things a man can +do to make a living in these woods, if he only knows enough. And it +beats working in a store or something all hollow. You're never sick, and +mainly you are your own boss, without anyone to tell you when to work +and what to work at," concluded the old gum hunter.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[Pg 73]</a></span></p> + +<p>For the benefit of our readers who may not be acquainted with Yankee +dialect, yarbs is the native's way of saying herbs.</p> + +<p>The boys were much interested in the old man's various occupations. They +had no idea that a man could do so many different and profitable things +in the wilds of the great forests.</p> + +<p>"What you boys aim to do while you are camping?" inquired the newcomer, +as he ate his late lunch. "You won't find a powerful lot of shooting as +there ain't much now that the law is off. Course you can get some good +fishing if you follow that brook that is fed by the spring you get your +water from for about three miles. There's a place there where a couple +of old trees lay across the brook, blown down in some big storm, I +expect, and there are some noble trout there. If I had had time today, +I'd have gone down there and caught a couple for my meal, instead of +taking your bacon."</p> + +<p>"You were perfectly welcome to it, and anytime you are around here drop +right in and help yourself. You'll always find a plenty," said Garry +cordially.</p> + +<p>"That's the right spirit to show in the woods, young feller," and the +gum hunter slouched off to the spring to draw some water to wash the +dishes after his meal. He came back with the water, and pouring a small +quantity of it in the greasy frying<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[Pg 74]</a></span> pan, put it on the coals. The dish +and his knife and fork, he scrubbed first with a handful of earth, and +in a short time they were clean of the grease of the bacon. All that +needed to be done was to rinse them out. By this time the water in the +frying pan had come to a boil, and pouring it out, the pan was found to +be nearly free of the grease. An application of earth, and a rinse, and +that job was done.</p> + +<p>Then filling an old pipe, he stretched out near the fire, and began to +ply the boys with questions,—where they had come from, why they came so +far from home to go camping, and countless other shrewd interrogations. +For some reason he seemed to think it peculiar that they had come so far +when there were plenty of forests nearer home where they could have +established a camp.</p> + +<p>Garry took it on himself to answer most of these questions, and in turn +asked many of the old man.</p> + +<p>Finally Garry looked straight at the old fellow, and asked quietly:</p> + +<p>"Ever hear of any smuggling going on in these parts?"</p> + +<p>"That's a funny question for a young fellow like you to be asking. You +fellows haven't come up here to join some smugglers' band, that is, +supposing there were any up here? Sure you boys haven't been reading +woolly tales of smugglers on the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[Pg 75]</a></span> border, or something, have ye?" he +asked suspiciously.</p> + +<p>Garry and the others laughed at the implication. Garry, although not so +old in years, had several times proved himself to be a shrewd judge of +character, and he had already made up his mind that the old gum hunter +was a staunch and sturdy and patriotic citizen of the State. However, he +decided to let a little time elapse before further questioning of the +woodsman, or imparting any confidences to him.</p> + +<p>"Where did your guide go after he fixed you up here?" asked the gum +hunter, after a short silence.</p> + +<p>"We didn't have any guide," answered Dick.</p> + +<p>"You fellows mean to tell me that you picked this site and pitched camp +yourselves?" demanded Dudley.</p> + +<p>"Just exactly that," responded Garry.</p> + +<p>"Well, it's mighty good job. Who taught you to make a double lean-to in +that fashion?"</p> + +<p>"Why, we've made rather a study of woodcraft, and this is not our first +experience in the woods," answered Garry. Then thinking of a way in +which he could let the old timer know that they were not merely +adventurous, inquisitive boys, he decided to reveal to George Washington +Dudley the fact that they were members of the Forest Ranger Service,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[Pg 76]</a></span> +but to keep a secret the fact that they were also on Customs duty.</p> + +<p>On hearing this, the old man looked at them with considerably different +aspect.</p> + +<p>Garry explained to him, as it had been decided at Augusta to give them a +good excuse for being in the woods, that they were covering that part of +the country with a view to establishing a 'phone service for the Ranger +System, that section being unprotected in that manner. As a matter of +fact, the border line was but poorly guarded, as the meagre +appropriation by the Legislature did not allow every foot of the country +to be taken care of in the manner that it should.</p> + +<p>This announcement by Garry increased the respect of the old man for +them.</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir, boys," he said, "that's one of the biggest things that's been +done in this State for many a long year. I tell you, I've lived in these +woods all my life, and that's more than sixty years, and I love these +great trees. They all seem like so many friends to me. Of course I know +that they must be sacrificed for the good of mankind, but it makes me +sad when I think of the way the paper mill people have gone through mile +after mile of timber land, cutting it clean of every tree. Course they +should take only the big trees, that have grown old like<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[Pg 77]</a></span> men, and have +almost outlived their good on earth. But to cut down young trees, it's +just like killing young boys. To the paper mill people it only means +just so much more pulp. Then the fires that are so often caused by +careless campers and hunters. Yes, sir, it's sure a crime, and it's a +fine thing for boys as young as you to know about these things and help +fight the evils. But there's one thing that's been a puzzling me. What +did you ask about smugglers for?"</p> + +<p>"Why, it was partly curiosity, and partly because we heard that there +was considerable smuggling in this part of the country, it being so near +to the Canadian border line," said Garry cautiously. Then, carefully +choosing his words, he went on:</p> + +<p>"And if we did find evidence of any, we being in a branch of the State +service, it would be our duty as good American citizens to run it down +as far as possible and bring the smugglers to justice. Don't you think +it would?" he concluded, looking sharply at old Dud.</p> + +<p>"Yes sir," shot out the old gum hunter emphatically, and somewhat to the +surprise of Garry, who had put the question merely to see what side the +old timer would take. "I believe in upholding the laws of the land. I +came from a family that has done that always. My Daddy fought in the +Mexican<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[Pg 78]</a></span> War, and he was killed in Shiloh during the Civil War. I didn't +tell 'em just the truth about my age in the Spanish War, and so I was in +that myself; but they knew I was stretching the truth a little when I +tried to get in the big scrap in 1917. Ain't never one of our family +done anything but uphold the law the way she was written on the books.</p> + +<p>"Now as for this smuggling that you speak of, it does happen and it +happens right in this region. There's a regular nest of 'em right in +Hobart. Now mind I ain't saying anything, but if a person was to keep +watch of certain fellows that always of an evening went through the back +door at the end of the restaurant, he might some time know just who +those fellows were. One thing, though, there ain't much help to be got +from any of the townspeople when it comes to that practice. Lots of +border people can't see the justice in paying duty on stuff that comes +from a country that's as near them as Canada is. They don't seem to look +on it as a foreign country at all. Guess it's because they are too +familiar with it. And that's that. So now, boys, I'll bid ye a goodbye +and trot along. I don't just know what you boys are up to, but I'll lay +that it's all right, and I've just got this to say: Anytime you get into +a bad hole, or need some help in the worst kind of way, remember and get +to George W. Dudley, or old Dud the gum hunter. Everyone<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[Pg 79]</a></span> hereabouts +knows who I am and where I can be found in a short time."</p> + +<p>So saying, the old man shouldered his long rifle and went his way.</p> + +<p>"Boys," said Garry elatedly, "the trail begins here!"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[Pg 80]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX.</h2> + +<h3>THE NIGHT VISITOR.</h3> + + +<p>Night drawing on, the boys prepared their supper. The night's meal +consisted of a real stew, for since they were so near to a place to +purchase provisions they were able to indulge themselves a little more +than when they were at their first station, so far away from a base of +supplies.</p> + +<p>Canned beef was used, and then a few potatoes and carrots were peeled +and cut into small cubes. A good meat stew is one of the easiest things +to make in the woods, provided one has a variety or two of vegetables.</p> + +<p>All that is necessary to do is to cut the meat into small squares about +an inch thick, then peel and cut the vegetables to the same size. Put +just enough cold water in the kettle to cover the meat and vegetables, +and then let the whole simmer slowly over the coals. From time to time +the cook should take a look at the stew and see that it does not dry. It +will be necessary to add a small quantity of water<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[Pg 81]</a></span> from time to time, +and in about an hour and a quarter the stew will be ready, and after a +long hike in the woods it is a dish that is fit for a king.</p> + +<p>While Dick superintended the cooking of the stew, Phil and Garry +replenished the wood supply. The stew put on the fire, Dick searched +until he found a piece of sapling about an inch and a half in diameter. +This is peeled off the bark and so made a rolling pin. A glass jam jar +was then emptied of its contents and laid to one side.</p> + +<p>"Ah, I perceive that we are going to have hot biscuits for supper +tonight," remarked Phil, smacking his lips.</p> + +<p>"Regular little Sherlock, aren't you?" said Garry with a laugh. "When +you see a chap make a rolling pin and a biscuit cutter, you immediately +reach the conclusion that he's going to make biscuits."</p> + +<p>That was what Dick was intending to do. With a hot stew, there is +nothing more palatable than a stack of piping hot biscuits cooked in a +spider over a bed of red embers. They require but little work, only one +thing being necessary, and that is to rub the shortening through into +the flour. Many amateur campers wonder why the biscuits are flat or +doughy. It is because they either do not know that the shortening should +be ground in, or else, which is too often true, are too lazy to do the +work.</p> + +<p>For the benefit of some of our readers who may<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[Pg 82]</a></span> want to go camping over +a summer week-end, the proper making of a pan of biscuits will be +described. To make a dozen biscuits, or enough for three hungry boys, +take a pint and a half of flour, a teaspoon and a half of baking powder, +half a heaping teaspoonful of salt, the equivalent of a heaping +tablespoonful of shortening, which may be bought by the can, (lard or +drippings will do equally as well) and about half a pint of cold water. +Stir the baking powder into the flour, then the salt. Then rub the +shortening thoroughly into the flour, till not a bit of it remains in +lumps or on the bottom of the mixing pan. Then stir in the water until +you have a thick dough. In the meantime have a hot bed of coals, then +dust a little flour on the bottom of one of your frying pans.</p> + +<p>Finally roll out your dough with the home-made sapling rolling pin, and +use an old glass jar or a small round tin to cut your biscuits out with. +Knead over the bits that are left from cutting the biscuits out until +all the dough has been used. Put them in the frying pan, and if you have +no cover, use a second inverted pan for one.</p> + +<p>Put this on the hot coals about twenty minutes before your supper is to +be ready, and a few moments later put on the coffee pot.</p> + +<p>The result will be a supper that cannot be found in the finest of +hotels, especially if your appetite is<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[Pg 83]</a></span> sauced by a good hike and the +fragrant balsamy air of the great forest.</p> + +<p>Squatting about the glowing coals of the campfire, which cast a red +reflection on the tall, sombre pines in back of them, they voted Dick a +capital cook, and the supper one of the best they had eaten since they +left the station where they had done fire patrol duty.</p> + +<p>The meal over and the dishes washed, they discussed the advisability of +establishing a guard as they had done when danger threatened them in +past times.</p> + +<p>Garry was of the opinion that it would be unnecessary for a time, as no +one knew of their mission and they had seen nothing that would tend to +alarm them.</p> + +<p>The others were glad of this decision, for all were tired with the work +of establishing the camp and the hike they had taken to the boundary +line.</p> + +<p>Shortly after midnight Garry was roused from his slumber by a nightmare +in which he dreamed that LeBlanc and he were desperately battling on the +top of a great cliff.</p> + +<p>The dream was so realistic that when he woke, he shuddered for a moment. +Then feeling somewhat chilly, he found that the fire had died down, and +rose to throw a few sticks of wood on the still<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[Pg 84]</a></span> red coals. He cast a +glance about him and in the distance saw a gleaming pair of eyes!</p> + +<p>Hastily drawing his flashlight from his pocket, and diving back into the +lean-to for his rifle, he made sure it was loaded and then investigated +the gleaming eyes. His flashlight was a good one, throwing a long white +beam of light into the darkness.</p> + +<p>What he saw was some sort of an animal that, unperturbed by the light, +was advancing slowly. Snapping off the flashlight, and dropping it to +his side, he threw his rifle to his shoulder. He took a careful aim at a +point between the shining eyes, and fired. There was a snarl and a +violent squirming for a moment, and then all was still.</p> + +<p>Garry's shot had sent the wild echoes chashing through the still forest, +and in a trice, Phil and Dick were awakened, and came rushing to his +side, bringing their rifles with them.</p> + +<p>"What is it, Garry?" shouted Phil. "Have we been attacked?"</p> + +<p>"No, but there is no telling what he might have done. As far as I could +make out, it's a big bobcat. I haven't gone near it yet, for I am not +sure that it is dead, although it hasn't made a move since I fired," +answered Garry.</p> + +<p>"Well, let's go and take a look. Load your rifle again, and we can keep +ours trained on the beast<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[Pg 85]</a></span> and make short work of him if he is still +alive," said Phil.</p> + +<p>Garry rescued his flashlight from the spot where he had dropped it when +he made ready to shoot, and the three started cautiously for the still +carcass. Arriving at the point, Dick seized a dead stick from the ground +and, throwing accurately, hit the animal in the ribs. It made never a +move, and so the chums judged it was safe to approach.</p> + +<p>The animal was stone dead. Garry's shot had pierced the brain right in +the forehead, and the animal had evidently died almost instantly.</p> + +<p>They examined the animal. It was a sort of a pepper-and-salt color with +a pencil or streak of black hair extending from the back of the ears. As +far as they could judge, it would stand about two feet tall, when erect, +and must have been almost a yard from the top of its nose to the end of +its abbreviated tail. The legs and feet were heavily covered with fur, +and bore wicked, razorlike claws.</p> + +<p>A snarl was on the face of the night prowler even in death. Garry seized +it by the scruff of the neck, and hefted it.</p> + +<p>"By George, I bet that animal weighs every ounce of thirty pounds," he +exclaimed.</p> + +<p>"Then it's the heftiest bobcat I've ever heard about," said Phil.</p> + +<p>"Well, let's get back to bed again," yawned Dick.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[Pg 86]</a></span> "I was sleeping like +a log when I thought the whole shack had been pulled in about my ears. +Good thing I woke up though. I forgot to put beans to soak last night, +and I am determined to have baked beans for tomorrow night's supper. +Guess I'll put them to soak and turn in again. Bring your old bobcat +along and hang it to a branch, and we'll skin it tomorrow and try and +tan it."</p> + +<p>"Skin nothing," declared Garry. "I'm going to have that critter stuffed +and mounted. It's one of the finest specimens I've ever seen."</p> + +<p>"You fellows can argue all night if you want to," stated Phil +emphatically. "I'm going to crawl into my blanket again. Good night!"</p> + +<p>The boys returned to the camp, and still rubbing the sleep from his +eyes, Dick put his beans to soak, and in a few minutes quiet had again +descended on the camp, only the occasional snap of a burning knot +breaking the majestic silence of the great forest that surrounded the +sleeping boys.</p> + +<p>When morning came, Garry was the first to awake. Glancing mischievously +at his sleeping companions, he softly stole to where he had hung the +body of the bobcat the night before, and hid it in the lean-to in back +of the pile of cut firewood. Phil awoke a moment after, and coming out, +looked for the animal to get a closer look at it in the day<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[Pg 87]</a></span>time. He +inquired in surprise where the carcass had gone.</p> + +<p>"If you can keep a straight face and deny everything, we will have a few +minutes of fun with Dick," said Garry with a wink.</p> + +<p>"Go to it, I'm on," laughed Phil. Garry proceeded to start the coffee +and slice the bacon for breakfast.</p> + +<p>Then walking over to where Dick lay still soundly sleeping, he stirred +him with his foot, shouting:</p> + +<p>"Get up, lazybones, and make a mess of flapjacks for breakfast," for it +was admitted by the boys that Dick was the best cook of the three.</p> + +<p>Dick rolled out of his blanket with a protesting murmur, and then ran to +the brook below the spring, where he dashed the cold water into his face +until the sleep fog had rolled away. On his way back he glanced at the +spot where the animal's body had been hung the night before. Not seeing +it, he turned to Garry and asked what he had done with the wildcat.</p> + +<p>"What wildcat?" asked Garry in amazement, while Phil looked at Dick with +a blank face.</p> + +<p>"Why, the bobcat or wildcat or civetcat, or whatever it was, that you +shot last night."</p> + +<p>Garry turned and shook his head sadly at Phil.</p> + +<p>"Poor chap, the strain of the last few days has<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[Pg 88]</a></span> been too much for him, +or else he is eating too much again before he goes to bed. He eats too +much anyway, that's why he has such awful dreams."</p> + +<p>"Dream nothing," shouted Dick, half angry, half puzzled. "Do you mean to +stand there and tell me that you didn't turn the camp upside down last +night by shooting some sort of an animal?"</p> + +<p>"Absolutely," declared Garry firmly.</p> + +<p>"That must have been some dream that you had last night," chimed in +Phil, carrying out the joke.</p> + +<p>Dick stared at his two companions, but seeing their sober faces, +muttered something to himself and set about fixing the flapjacks. By +this time he was firmly convinced that he had dreamed the whole +occurrence, and on being pressed by the boys, told his "dream," relating +exactly the circumstances of the adventure of the night before.</p> + +<p>Although it nearly killed them to do it, the others maintained a +straight face and listened with interest. Breakfast over, Dick was +wandering around the camp when he discovered the beans he had set to +soak when he was roused by the shot that killed the nocturnal visitor. +Immediately he remembered that he had forgotten to do this before +retiring, hence he must have done it when he got up.</p> + +<p>Without saying anything to his companions, he quietly prowled about the +camp, until he came on<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[Pg 89]</a></span> the body of the bobcat where Garry had hidden +it. Instantly the light broke, and he made a dash for Garry, knocking +him over and getting astride of him. Then Dick proceeded to tickle his +ribs vigorously.</p> + +<p>"Try to string me, will you? Holler nuff and say you're sorry you made +fun of an innocent, trusting person like myself. Holler nuff."</p> + +<p>"Hey, Phil, pull this wildman off me," gasped Garry between gasps of +laughter, both at the tickling and at the recollection of the joke that +had been played on the fat boy.</p> + +<p>But Phil was rolling on the ground laughing until the tears ran down his +cheeks. Both he and Garry had held in as long as it was possible, and +now they were making up for lost time.</p> + +<p>Dick at last tired of pummeling Garry, and soon he joined in the +laughter, for the joke was undeniably on him.</p> + +<p>While they were laughing, along came Dud the gum hunter, bearing a +chicken with him.</p> + +<p>"Here, boys, thought you might like a bit of chicken, and that'll help +make up for the bacon and flour of yours that I used yesterday."</p> + +<p>The boys thanked him heartily, and then Garry asked if he knew anyone in +that region that could stuff a bobcat, explaining how he had shot one +the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[Pg 90]</a></span> night before. Dud asked to see the animal, and then exclaimed, his +eyes popping:</p> + +<p>"Bobcat? Why, boy alive. That's the biggest, finest specimen of Canada +Lynx I have even seen. It's one of the most savage animals to be found +in the whole North Woods!"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[Pg 91]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X.</h2> + +<h3>A SIGNAL OF DISTRESS.</h3> + + +<p>"A Canada lynx!" ejaculated Garry. "Why, I thought they were to be found +only in the wilds of Northern Canada."</p> + +<p>"That's what a good many people think, but they can be found almost +anywhere in the northern tier of this country. A friend of mine a couple +of years ago shot one on the banks of Lake Champlain barely a mile +outside the city of Plattsburg. I don't ever recollect seeing one as +fine or as big as that one of yours. If you'd like, I'll stuff it and +mount it for you."</p> + +<p>"That is more than I dared hope," said Garry. "I didn't know whether I +could find a taxidermist up here or not."</p> + +<p>"You'll find that a good many old woodsmen are pretty skillful at it, +especially those who hire out as guides in the deer season," replied +Dud. "I mounted a fine deer head for a hunter from New York last year, +and he said it was a better job than was done<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[Pg 92]</a></span> by one of the high-priced +animal men in that city. But there's something else I want to tell you. +I can't say much, but there is a pernicious lot of activity lately among +a certain class of fellows who find a lot of business over the border +every now and then. Now mind ye, I ain't saying anything, but I've seen +and heard a couple of things since last night. Also, the 'lane' that is +used by these fellows isn't a million miles from here, and a nod is as +good as a wink to a blind mare. Remember I ain't said nothing at all."</p> + +<p>Leaving the boys to ponder over his remarks, the gum hunter threw his +bag across his shoulder and departed on his quest of spruce gum.</p> + +<p>"Now I wonder why he is so secretive about this business. Evidently he +knows all about it, so why shouldn't he come right out and tell what he +knows. It's a puzzle," said Garry reflectively.</p> + +<p>"Don't you suppose he is that way because he lives here and knows all +these people and does not want to become involved in any way, fearing +that they might seek revenge on him for giving away their secrets? +Perhaps he even has some misguided relative or friend who is mixed up in +the mess some way," suggested Phil.</p> + +<p>"I believe that is the only solution, Phil. At any rate, it behooves us +to be on the move and see what we can find out. He said something about +the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[Pg 93]</a></span> smugglers' 'lane' being around here. I suppose that he means the +trail over which the stuff is brought. I suggest that the business of +the morning be to locate it if possible. Let's head toward the boundary +stone, and strike up along what is approximately the border from there +and see if we can discover anything in the way of a trail. First, +however, I suggest that we take all our food supplies and cache them +safely in a tree somewhere in this vicinity. Not so much for fear that +they will be stolen, but because I don't want the fact advertised of our +being here in case someone should come along in our absence. If we are +here, then all right, if we are not, these lean-tos look to be only +temporary, and no one would give them a second thought. I've also +thought it would be a good plan to search out one or two other likely +camp-sites and establish camps there. Then we can go from one to another +and not advertise our presence so blatantly. So on our march today, keep +an eye for a good spring. Now let's go and cache the stuff."</p> + +<p>First Garry measured out a two-day ration of food, dividing it among the +three. The rest was then packed in a cloth flour bag that Garry had +procured at the general store, showing that he had had this idea in the +back of his head since they had arrived at the border. Some little +distance away, a thick pine tree was located and careful observa<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[Pg 94]</a></span>tion +was made so that the boys could find it easily.</p> + +<p>Phil climbed the tree and then let down his lariat and Garry tied the +bag to the end. Phil then drew it up into the tree and placed it +securely in a crotch in one of the branches. This done, Phil clambered +back down, remarking when he reached the ground:</p> + +<p>"If we get a good storm it's goodbye to the sugar and flour in that bag. +The stuff will just naturally melt away. If we are going to make a +practice of caching the stuff, I suggest that we provide a number of tin +cans with tight covers. Then it can rain on the articles for days and +never hurt them a bit."</p> + +<p>"That's a prime idea, Phil, and next time we go to town, you are +delegated to provide said tins," said Garry.</p> + +<p>"Ha, that's the time I talked myself into extra work," rejoined Phil +with a laugh.</p> + +<p>"Believe me, young man, I'll take a lesson from that and make only +suggestions that won't entail extra work," chipped in Dick.</p> + +<p>"On our way now, but first Dick, you run back to the camp and empty your +canteen on the fire, and obliterate all traces of it. Then fill your +canteen and rejoin us here, and we'll be off for the boundary monument," +ordered Garry, thus proving himself to be a real woodsman and Ranger, +never forgetting that a stray spark or ember may smoulder for some +little time and perhaps start a fire that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[Pg 95]</a></span> would sweep through the +forests as though they were so much tinder.</p> + +<p>Dick sped away to do Garry's bidding, and in a few moments was back, and +the three chums started for the boundary line. This time they were able +to proceed directly to it, without wasting precious time hunting for it.</p> + +<p>Arriving at the marker, they branched out fanshaped as was their wont +when they were in search of a trail or water. For some three or four +miles they found nothing in the way of a well-defined trail, or even the +remains of a camp, and were beginning to think the whole affair was +nothing more nor less than a wild goose chase, when they were called +together by a hail from Dick.</p> + +<p>They ran speedily to him, and found him gazing at the ground.</p> + +<p>"I don't know that what I've found amounts to a continental, but this is +an old abandoned tote road, and I've found the marks of three or four +different style boots, or rather, different sized boots. To my mind, it +is worth following up, as there hasn't been anything yet worth while +investigating except this. I wonder if our friend Dud isn't just giving +us a wrong steer, or is this what he meant we should find? What say, +Garry, what shall we do?"</p> + +<p>Garry decided immediately.</p> + +<p>"We'll follow this for a bit and see where it<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[Pg 96]</a></span> leads us. It may amount +to nothing at all, and then again it may lead us to a real clue."</p> + +<p>They set off down the old tote road, and after a walk of nearly an hour +came upon several shacks, all boarded up, and bearing an air of +desolation and abandonment.</p> + +<p>"By golly, this is a deserted lumber camp. You remember the storekeeper +told us there used to be logging operations in this vicinity? This must +have been the scene of the camp, although they had quite a haul to reach +the river for the drive. Let's take a look-see and find out what's +here," cried Phil.</p> + +<p>They went to the main building, that is, the largest, evidently what had +been the bunkhouse for the lumberjacks, but every window was tightly +boarded up. A little to one side was a smaller building, which had +probably been the office and home of the camp boss and timber cruisers, +who generally lived by themselves.</p> + +<p>This, too, had a deserted and forlorn appearance. Phil's keen eyes were +roving over the ground, but he found nothing to excite him till he came +to the rear of the building. Here was a small door.</p> + +<p>"Say, fellows, look at that door. It's been repaired, and only lately. +You can see that someone has tried to obliterate the fact that new +boards were put in. It looks as though some tramp or woods wanderer had +broken in at some time, and the per<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[Pg 97]</a></span>son or persons who have been here +lately have repaired it," said Phil, dropping to his knees and examining +the ground in front of the door.</p> + +<p>"Why might not whoever has charge of this camp have fixed the door? It +is very likely that when the logging operations were given up that some +person in Hobart was put in charge to see that it was not destroyed, +because logging can again be carried on in this section," inquired Dick.</p> + +<p>"Why, I dope it out this way. If, as you say, there is a caretaker or an +agent, it would be only natural for him to repair the broken door; but +why take all the trouble to smear it with dirt and dent it a little to +make it appear that it hadn't been touched? You can see that there are +different woods used in the door, and the repaired part is of much newer +timber. I tell you, there is some reason for this secrecy. By Jove, +let's try and get in."</p> + +<p>As he spoke, Phil ran to one of the windows. This had been boarded up +from the outside, but one of the boards appeared to be loose.</p> + +<p>"What say, Garry, shall I try and make an entrance?"</p> + +<p>"I think under the circumstances it would be all right, since we are in +search of possible evidence," replied Garry, after a moment's +consideration.</p> + +<p>Carefully inserting the edge of his axe under the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[Pg 98]</a></span> loose board, Phil +worked the axe handle slowly, until at last he was rewarded by the board +giving way, gently withdrawing the nails with it. In a few moments more, +he had a second board removed, disclosing a window. It had an ordinary +lock, and opening his knife, Phil inserted the blade and soon snapped +the lock back. In a few seconds the three had clambered in, and were +taking stock of the interior.</p> + +<p>Undeniably the place had been recently occupied. On the table were two +bottles with the remains of candles stuck in them, while in the +fireplace were the remains of a fire. A good woodsman can tell whether a +fire has been made recently or not, and the boys saw at once that this +was the case.</p> + +<p>On the table was a pack of cards, thrown there evidently at the ending +of a game. There were four bunks at one side of the room, and these had +been cleaned out and fresh boughs were laid there, although there were +no blankets.</p> + +<p>Garry discovered a closet, and on opening it, found that there was a +fair stock of provisions.</p> + +<p>"Guess you are right, Phil. Someone is making a headquarters of the +shack. It seems logical to think that they are doing so secretly, for if +anyone with a right to use the place were living here, they would have +removed the boards from the windows, and would have made the place a +little bit more<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[Pg 99]</a></span> habitable. However, we had better dust out of here, for +we don't want to be surprised by anyone that happens to come along, +especially whoever is using this place. Perhaps it would be a good idea +to establish a watch and see who comes here. The chances are whoever +uses the place comes at night, or at least in the early evening, and one +might be able to get a look at them. At any rate, let's hike out," +concluded Garry.</p> + +<p>Looking around carefully to see that they left no evidence of their +surrepticious visit, they went out through the window.</p> + +<p>"Sorry there's no way to lock that window hasp again, but since the +windows are evidently not used by the occupants, I don't believe it will +ever be noticed," remarked Phil, as he carefully nailed the boards back +in place with the back of the hatchet, being careful that his axe did +not slip and leave a mark to show that the boards had been pried off.</p> + +<p>"When it comes time to watch for the occupants, I have an idea of the +proper place to keep an eye on them," said Dick, "and that is the +spring. Whoever is living here must have water, and if I'm not mistaken, +that's the spring over there."</p> + +<p>Following Dick's lead, they went in the indicated direction, and sure +enough, there was the spring.</p> + +<p>"You can see fairly fresh footprints there. I wish now that we had Sandy +with us," said Garry.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[Pg 100]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Sandy" was Garry's big Airedale dog, which they had left with Nate +Webster when they went off to Augusta. They had not taken him on the +trip, for all those with whom they had had trouble, knew the dog, and he +would call too obviously attention to the presence of the trio of +Rangers.</p> + +<p>"Let's take a look at the big bunkhouse and see if that is being used +also," suggested Phil.</p> + +<p>They returned to the long low shack, and were in search of a window from +which the boards might be removed, when suddenly Garry said:</p> + +<p>"Listen, do you hear the sound of rifle shots?"</p> + +<p>Faintly borne on the breeze, came the sound of a distant shot.</p> + +<p>"Probably only some youngster from town out after rabbits," said Dick. +They waited for a few minutes, and then again was heard a shot, closely +followed by two more.</p> + +<p>"The forest distress signal. Some one's in trouble boys!" cried Garry +excitedly.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[Pg 101]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI.</h2> + +<h3>THE RESCUE.</h3> + + +<p>To explain to our readers why the three shots are known as a distress +signal is simple. One shot would ordinarily be that of a hunter. Two +could be the same thing, provided the man was using a double barrelled +shotgun, such as is used in hunting birds. The chances that a hunter +would fire three shots in regular succession is very small, hence this +is the signal that is the S. O. S. of the woods. It is reported at +intervals, and after being heard two or three times, the woods voyager +may be sure that someone is in some great difficulty, fallen and broken +a leg, or lost in the dense timber.</p> + +<p>"It's to the south of us," said Garry, as he wet a finger and held it up +to test the direction of the wind. "You see the breeze comes from that +direction, and the sound comes with it. Let's take it on the trot, +boys."</p> + +<p>So saying, he led the way at an easy lope to the southward. They had +proceeded a little distance,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[Pg 102]</a></span> when again they heard the three shots, +this time much nearer.</p> + +<p>Breaking into a swift run, they were soon at the source of the call for +help.</p> + +<p>Laying on the ground, his foot caught in a wicked looking steel trap, +was an elderly man. In a feeble tone, he hailed the boys.</p> + +<p>"Thank God you've come, boys. I fear in a little while more I should +have been too weak to try and summon help. Release me from this trap."</p> + +<p>Garry and Dick sprang to the trap, which had closed on the man's ankle, +while Phil attempted to lift him up.</p> + +<p>"Easy, my boy, easy, my arm's broken. That's why I was unable to release +myself sometime ago. I could only reach one spring with my good arm, and +even that effort so twisted my leg that I fainted and had to give up +attempting it."</p> + +<p>While he had been speaking, the two boys had released the springs, and +bending back the teeth, released the man's leg. He gave a groan of +relief, while trying to raise himself up.</p> + +<p>"Better take it easy, sir, while I look you over and see what the extent +of your injuries are," said Garry.</p> + +<p>Taking his knife, the boy slit the leg of the corduroy trousers, and +then carefully rolled the woolen sock down. This disclosed an ugly +looking swollen<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[Pg 103]</a></span> leg. Very gently he felt of the leg, and then asked the +man if he could move his foot. After trying, the old man found he could.</p> + +<p>"Guess it's not broken, just very badly bruised and swollen," remarked +Garry cheerfully.</p> + +<p>"That's something to be thankful for anyway, for I know my arm is +broken. It was all I could do to load and fire my rifle with one hand," +said the sufferer.</p> + +<p>"We'll have that in splints in no time, and then see about getting you +to your home," said Garry. "Now Phil, you start a little fire and make +some coffee to brace the gentleman up with, while I put his arm in +splints."</p> + +<p>Very gently he ran his fingers up and down the arm, finding that it was +a clean break of one of the bones of the forearm, and not the wrist. +Searching through his knapsack, he drew out what is known to first aid +as a wire gauze bandage. This is nothing more than closely meshed wire, +and is recommended for use for a temporary splint until the doctor can +be gotten.</p> + +<p>Wrapping the arm with some bandage, he put on the splint, and tied it on +firmly with a strip of bandage. Then whipping his bandanna handkerchief +from around his neck, he made a sling.</p> + +<p>The hot coffee was soon forthcoming, and stimulated by it, the man felt +considerably better.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[Pg 104]</a></span></p> + +<p>Asked how he had been caught by the trap, he explained that while he was +walking through the woods in search of a partridge or squirrel, mainly +more for the pleasure of hiking than in hope of shooting anything, he +had stepped into the trap, which was carefully covered.</p> + +<p>"It had evidently been there for some time, for the ground over it +looked quite natural as though many successive rains had beaten down +upon it, or else I would have noticed that the covering was only +artificial. By the way, let me introduce myself. My name is John +Everett, and I used to be the Customs officer here, until Uncle Sam +decided there was no need for one, and moved the station some +twenty-five miles up the border, where another man, a politically +influential fellow, was appointed to the new office. Since then I have +been living in retirement with my granddaughter. I wonder if it is going +to impose on you to ask one of you to go to Hobart, it's only about four +miles from here, and get help to take me home, for although my leg does +not seem to be broken, I cannot stand on it, much less walk," he +concluded.</p> + +<p>"Don't worry about getting home. We'll have a snack of food and then +make a stretcher and have you there in no time," said Garry.</p> + +<p>"I am afraid that will be too much of a task for you," remonstrated +Everett.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[Pg 105]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Oh, it's nothing at all, sir," Garry hastened to say.</p> + +<p>When the man had mentioned that he had been a Customs officer, Dick had +given Phil a significant glance. There was every chance that good +fortune in being able to do a great favor for the old man might redound +to their aid.</p> + +<p>A hasty lunch of bacon and spiderbread was made, the man watching +admiringly the efficient and speedy manner in which the boys went about +preparing the meal.</p> + +<p>"You boys act as though you had been born and brought up in the woods. +Were you?" he inquired.</p> + +<p>"No, although we have always liked woodcraft and forest lore, and have +read about it and practiced it in a small way. We are in the Forest +Ranger service, doing some special work, and so we have to know +something about it," answered Garry.</p> + +<p>Lunch over, the effect of the food on the old man being to cheer him up +and strengthen him, the fire was stamped out, and then Phil and Dick +proceeded to make a litter while Garry cut two strong, tough saplings to +make the handles.</p> + +<p>They made the litter by taking off their coats and buttoning them +securely. Then the coats were turned inside out, so that the arms were +inside the jackets. Through the arms were thrust the two<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[Pg 106]</a></span> saplings, +which had been cut sufficiently long to allow them to project a foot and +a half or so beyond the two coats. A blanket was then laid atop the +coats, and the litter was ready.</p> + +<p>Dick and Garry took the first turn at carrying, while Phil went ahead +carrying the rifles. Every few moments, the third boy would relieve one +of the others. Frequent rests were necessary, and they were not able to +make much more than a mile an hour, so that it was late afternoon when +they finally reached the outskirts of the town.</p> + +<p>"There's my home there, the white house set back in from the street," +said Everett. "I am afraid you boys are rather tuckered out."</p> + +<p>As a matter of fact they were, for the four-mile hike with the burden on +the litter was no mean task.</p> + +<p>They had hardly turned in the gate, when a pretty girl of about +seventeen or eighteen rushed out to meet them. When she saw her +grandfather on the stretcher, she turned pale, and in anxious voice +asked what the matter was.</p> + +<p>"Don't be alarmed, Ruth, I just had a little accident in the woods and +broke my arm. Otherwise I'm fit as a fiddle. Now don't worry, and hold +the door open for these young men to carry me in and then run over and +get Dr. Mills."</p> + +<p>Once in the house, Mr. Everett was laid on a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[Pg 107]</a></span> couch and made as +comfortable as possible for the time being.</p> + +<p>"This is my granddaughter, Ruth," he told the boys. "In the excitement +of the day, I quite forgot to ask your names, so you will have to +introduce yourselves to her."</p> + +<p>This Garry, acting as master of ceremonies, did, and then the girl +hastened after the doctor. She returned with him in a few minutes, and +the physician promptly began his examination.</p> + +<p>He confirmed Garry's finding that the leg was not broken, and +complimented him on his neat job of putting on the temporary splint. +Since the break was simple, and the old man protested that a little +twinge of pain was nothing, the arm was immediately set and the +permanent splints set in place.</p> + +<p>The chums assisted the doctor to get Mr. Everett to bed, and then bade +him goodbye, promising to look in very soon to see how he was getting +along.</p> + +<p>"Don't fail to call on me, boys, if I can be of any service to you," +were his parting words.</p> + +<p>"Well, sir, we may do that very soon," said Garry.</p> + +<p>"You'll find that I won't fail you," promised Everett.</p> + +<p>As they were on their way out, the girl stopped the chums and expressed +her gratitude for their rescue of her grandfather.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[Pg 108]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I don't know how to thank you boys. Just think, if you hadn't come +along, he might have died out there in the woods before someone found +him, and he is the only relative I have. I am sure there is nothing I +wouldn't do for you that was within my power," she declared.</p> + +<p>"Do you really mean that, Miss?" said Garry.</p> + +<p>"Indeed I do. Just let me know what I can do," she answered eagerly.</p> + +<p>"I don't want you to think I am asking this as a matter of reward," said +Garry, "but it's something that is very vital to the success of our +mission here. I feel that we can be frank with you, since your +grandfather was once in the Customs service. I can't explain just now +how we are connected with the matter, but you could do us and the State +a great service if you could tell us if you know anything about +smuggling operations here. You are practically the only one that we have +given so much confidence, and I am sure that you will respect it."</p> + +<p>"Oh, of course I will. I don't know who or what you are, but I am sure +you are all right. As for what you ask, I don't know much about it, +although Granddaddy has confided his suspicions to me many times. +Unfortunately, though, they are only suspicions, and he has never been +able to get any tangible evidence, for they cover their tracks very +cleverly, and especially with him, since they know that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[Pg 109]</a></span> he was once in +the service. I can tell you this, though, keep sharp watch of a man +called Lafe Green. He is a great big red-haired man, and he hangs around +that restaurant that is run by a man called Joe Canuck. It's practically +the only one in town, perhaps you know of it."</p> + +<p>"We do know of it, and we sure thank you for what you have told us, and +you will never regret it. Sometime we can tell you more about all this. +I hope we shall see you again, for we will come at the first opportunity +to see how your grandfather is getting along," said Garry, as the three +took their leave, bidding goodbye to the pretty girl.</p> + +<p>Out on the street again, Dick could scarcely restrain himself from doing +a war dance on the sidewalk.</p> + +<p>"Gosh," he ejaculated exuberantly. "Talk about casting your bread upon +the waters and having it come back a whole shipload of angel cake. This +is luck. Boys, at last we're on the track of the smugglers, and if the +firm of Boone, Durant and Wallace doesn't run them down, I'll go back +home and spend the rest of the summer working in a grocery store or on a +farm pulling weeds!"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[Pg 110]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII.</h2> + +<h3>THE COMING OF THE BEAR.</h3> + + +<p>"Listen fellows, let's duck back towards the woods for a bit and have a +council of war," ordered Garry. "There will be less chance of our being +observed there, and no chance of our being overheard." So saying, Garry +led the way back for about half a mile.</p> + +<p>"We must strike while the iron's hot, and it seems to be hot tonight. +What with the young lady's information about watching this Lafe Green +person, and Dud's hint that there was something brewing, it strikes me +that we ought to get going. There's only one logical place to start, and +that is this restaurant," said Garry emphatically.</p> + +<p>"We must understand one thing, though. There's an element of danger +connected with this, and I don't want to lead anyone into anything that +I wouldn't do myself, so I offer to make the first reconnoitre," he +concluded.</p> + +<p>"That's mighty white, Garry, but I want to make<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[Pg 111]</a></span> a suggestion. I'm not +looking for any personal glory out of this, but I declare I think I am +the logical person to go. You know I am the only one of us who can talk +French and understand it, and as we have already had one clue in that +manner, there's every chance that others may follow in the same way, so +I move that I go."</p> + +<p>Garry saw the force of the argument, and as Phil was backed up by Dick, +decided that after all this was the best move.</p> + +<p>A plan of campaign was hastily drawn up. It was decided that the other +two should return to the lean-to, and there wait Phil's return. Phil's +rifle and knapsack were to be carried back by his chums, while Phil was +to take the little automatic that Garry had purchased at Bangor.</p> + +<p>"This is only as a measure of safety, Phil," said Garry. "And under no +condition show it or use it except as a last resort. Now there's one +other thing. We want to keep a check for safety's sake on your +movements, yet you want to have time enough to follow up any clue that +may arise. So let's make it a point that you be back at the lean-to by +sundown tomorrow night. If you are not there by then, we will know that +you are in some sort of a pickle and plan to come to your aid. Don't try +to do anything single handed; your mission tonight is to find out what +is going on if you can. If you<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[Pg 112]</a></span> can return tonight, so much the better. +From now on too, we'll establish a watch, taking two hour sentry duty. +There may be no need of it yet, but we will get back in the habit of it, +and an ounce of precaution is worth a pound of cure. Now go to it, old +topper, and the best of luck."</p> + +<p>The chums shook hands, and then went their different ways, Garry and +Dick back to the lean-to in the woods, and Phil back to town.</p> + +<p>Just before he left the fringe of woods that bordered the edge of the +town, Phil did a peculiar stunt that was later to stand him in good +stead. Taking his knife from his pocket, he made a small slit in the +under side of his coat lapel. In this he slipped the knife, and then +held the coat at arm's length to see if there was any lump observable. +The coat, made as it was of thick khaki, showed no noticeable +difference. Satisfied with the appearance, he slipped his coat on again, +and went his way. Phil was thinking of the time he had been left chained +to the tree in the woods by Anderson and LeBlanc, with no weapon with +which he could free himself, and he was determined that this would never +happen again if he could prevent it. He was satisfied that the ruse of +hiding the knife would not be discovered were he captured, unless his +coat was taken away from him.</p> + +<p>In a short time Phil had approached the restau<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[Pg 113]</a></span>rant, and entered. Taking +his seat on one of the high stools at the lunch counter, he ordered some +supper. The bearded Frenchman, evidently the proprietor, who approached, +shot at him a question in French.</p> + +<p>Phil know perfectly well that he was asking him in French what he +wanted, but he just stared blankly at the man, who, believing that he +did not understand, spoke to him in broken English.</p> + +<p>"M'sieu does not spik the French, hein?"</p> + +<p>Phil shook his head and repeated his order in English. Satisfied, the +man turned to the stove back of the counter and dished up a mess of +piping hot baked peas, cooked with bacon instead of pork. This is a +favorite dish with the French of Canada. A great slab of johnny-cake and +a cup of hot coffee seemed to be the only thing on the bill of fare. For +dessert there was apple pie and cheese.</p> + +<p>The whole was put before him at once, and Phil, with the appetite of a +healthy boy, fell to and soon dispatched the food. He ate a second +portion of the peas, which evidently pleased the proprietor who was at +once cook and waiter.</p> + +<p>Following the order for the second helping, the big Frenchman entered +into conversation with Phil. He seemed satisfied with Phil's answer to +his query as to what he was doing in those parts, when Phil<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[Pg 114]</a></span> told them +he was camping there for a short time, preparatory to a fishing +expedition.</p> + +<p>Supper over, Phil walked over to one of the tables, where he found a +week-old Bangor paper, and a Canadian French paper. Carefully avoiding +taking up the French paper and thus betray his knowledge of the +language, he took the <i>Commercial</i> and read steadily for an hour or +more. During this time the place was steadily filling. Men came in, got +their supper, and took seats at the many tables scattered about. Later +others came in, evidently villagers who made a sort of a clubhouse of +the place. A half a dozen card games were in progress, and at three of +the tables couples were playing checkers. By this time Phil had read all +the news and was beginning on the advertisements in order to have some +ostensible purpose in remaining where he knew nobody. Another half hour +passed, and then he decided to get up and watch one of the checker games +that was in progress near him.</p> + +<p>Both of the players were fairly expert, and he watched for some time +with great interest. During the second game, one of the players made a +bad move and let his opponent sweep off three pieces and land in the +king row to boot. As he made the move, Phil could not repress a little +gasp. The lucky opponent looked up at Phil and grinned, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[Pg 115]</a></span> Phil smiled +back. The game was lost for the first man, and his friend proceeded to +rub it in a little.</p> + +<p>"I declare, Hoke, you're gettin' worse every day. You ought to see that +I would clean the board if you made that move. I declare, I bet this +young fellow here can beat you."</p> + +<p>"Bet a doughnut he can't," said the man called Hoke.</p> + +<p>"Take ye up on that, an' if you lose I'll make you walk home and get +one. They never have 'em here at night. What say, young feller, will ye +give this feller a trimming for me?"</p> + +<p>"Why, yes, I would like to play a game," said Phil. He wanted to play +for two reasons. First, it would give him a legitimate excuse for +loitering there a little longer without attracting attention, and +secondly, he really enjoyed a good game of checkers.</p> + +<p>Phil disposed of his man very easily, for he was a remarkably good +player. At the conclusion of the game, the defeated man demanded that +his friend try a game with Phil, and accordingly changed places with +him. Here was a harder opponent, and Phil was devoting his entire +attention to giving him a run for the honors of the game, when the door +opened and a couple of men slouched in.</p> + +<p>Phil's heart stood still, for they were two of the trio of tramps they +had caught in their shack out<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[Pg 116]</a></span>side their home town. Phil was in a +quandary. He couldn't leave the game and rush out of the restaurant +without doing the very thing he least wanted to, that was draw +particular attention to himself.</p> + +<p>There was only one thing to do, and that was stay and face the music. He +doubted if the tramps would start anything in the room, but would +probably wait outside and seek to wreak revenge on him for being one of +those instrumental in their capture that time in the shack.</p> + +<p>Then to his great surprise, they passed by him, giving him only a casual +glance, but no sign of recognition.</p> + +<p>Phil breathed a sigh of relief, and then reflected that it was not +strange that they failed to recognize him. In the first place, they +would hardly expect to find him in that northern town, and then his +khaki clothes were of the sort that is common to the woods, but not to +the town where their arrest had taken place. So it was a simple matter, +their not knowing him.</p> + +<p>He turned his attention to the game again, and had made two moves, when +a phrase, spoken in French by a man at the table in back of him, +startled him into alert attention.</p> + +<p>The man had said:</p> + +<p>"Well, Pierre, 'The Bear' will be here in a few moments now."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[Pg 117]</a></span></p> + +<p>What was he to do? "The Bear" could be no one but LeBlanc.</p> + +<p>He must get out of the room at all costs, but how was he to avoid +running into LeBlanc?</p> + +<p>There was precious little chance that the guide would fail to recognize +him, and he knew that he would be in real danger here among the +half-breed's friends and cronies.</p> + +<p>Then, too, he must make his exit naturally, so as to arouse no suspicion +in the minds of the checker players, who might be foes just as well as +friends.</p> + +<p>Already the watcher at the table was demanding they finish the game +quickly so that he could have another chance at Phil.</p> + +<p>His mind working rapidly, Phil figured out what the best course to +pursue would be. The main point was to get out of the restaurant, but +there was the danger that at the precise moment of his exit, Jean +LeBlanc might be coming in the door.</p> + +<p>It was not wholly fear of LeBlanc that made him want to escape +unobserved, he didn't want the treacherous guide to know that he or his +chums were in the vicinity, for it would immediately destroy their +usefulness; at least it would hamper their work to a great degree.</p> + +<p>While his opponent studied the board, Phil was looking about the room. +At one side of the room there was a window looking out on a side street +or<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[Pg 118]</a></span> alley, Phil did not know which. Right beside it was a door. He +decided that this was the best means of exit, for in the dark alleyway +he could pass anyone coming in without their seeing who it was, and once +in the shadows, he could look up and down the street, and make his +escape as soon as it looked clear.</p> + +<p>The immediate thing to be done was to bring the game to a close. His +opponent had made his move, and concentrating on the game, Phil saw an +obscure move, which, once made, would give his opponent the game. +Without further hesitation, he made it, and the other player seized the +advantage and won the game.</p> + +<p>While he was chuckling over his victory, the other man was demanding a +return chance at Phil, but the Boy Ranger forestalled this by pleading a +headache from the heat and the smoke-filled room.</p> + +<p>"Tell you what," he said. "You two play a game, while I go outside for a +few minutes and clear my head, then I'll come back and take you on +again."</p> + +<p>This proved to be agreeable to the others, and in another moment they +were absorbed in the start of the game. Carefully edging his way over to +the side door, he waited till no one was looking at him, then opened the +door and slipped through—not into an alleyway, but into another room!<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[Pg 119]</a></span></p> + +<p>He had been fooled by the close proximity of the window, never dreaming +that there was an ell-like extension beginning flush at the side of the +window. Hastily glancing about, he saw another door, and running to it, +threw it open, only to have Jean LeBlanc enter just as he opened it.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[Pg 120]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII.</h2> + +<h3>TRAPPED.</h3> + + +<p>Phil's hand darted to his pocket for the automatic that Garry had given +him before he started on his mission, but he was not quick enough, for +in less than an instant LeBlanc had leaped upon him, pinioning his arms +to his side. Phil was helpless in the grasp of the half-breed. LeBlanc +called in French for help, and in another moment the black moustached +proprietor came rushing in.</p> + +<p>While LeBlanc held Phil, Canuck searched his pockets, taking from him +what little money he had, and the automatic revolver. Evidently +suspicious that Phil might have some other weapon concealed about him, +they made him unlace and take off his shoepacks; here, of course, they +found nothing, but fortunately they did not notice the secret pocket +that he had made in the lapel of his coat, in which reposed safely his +heavy scout knife.</p> + +<p>In the meantime, the French restaurant proprietor and LeBlanc carried on +a swift conversation in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[Pg 121]</a></span> French, all of which, of course, Phil +understood perfectly.</p> + +<p>"We shall take him up to the room on the third floor that we know about, +and keep him there until we shall have decided what to do with him."</p> + +<p>Phil was unceremoniously hustled out through the rear door, and with a +couple of brutal shoves, was taken up the dark stairway. Still, a second +flight he went up, and was then drawn into a dark room. Just before they +closed the door upon him, his heart sank, as he heard LeBlanc tell the +proprietor:</p> + +<p>"This is the fourth time that I have met this boy. He seems fated to +work me harm. Once I left him for dead in the Great Woods, but he seemed +to have a charmed life and escaped. This time, I promise you he will +not."</p> + +<p>So saying, they slammed the door, and Phil heard the rasp of the heavy +lock being turned in the door. Groping his way about, he found that the +room was bare of all furnishing, except for a decrepit old cot, and a +rough table. Feeling for the top of the table, he discovered there was +an old bottle, with a good-size piece of candle in it. He went through +his pockets carefully to see if by chance his searchers had left behind +them a stray match, but his hunt was not rewarded.</p> + +<p>There was nothing to do but make the best of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[Pg 122]</a></span> darkness. He groped +his way to the cot and sat down, taking stock of the situation. There +seemed to be nothing he could do except to wait for the morning, +provided that he would be allowed to see the morning come, then to look +about the room in search of some method of escaping. Thanks to his +foresightedness, he still had his knife, and this might prove to him to +be salvation as far as escape was concerned. He laid down on the cot, +thinking, and after nearly a half of an hour jumped to his feet, +inwardly calling himself names for his forgetfulness.</p> + +<p>Not until that moment had he remembered that he generally carried +several matches, wrapped in a bit of oil silk and tucked under his hat +band. It was a trick that Garry had taught him when they first went in +the woods.</p> + +<p>Fumbling inside of the hat band, he came upon a little package of half a +dozen matches, still securely wrapped in the oiled silk in which he had +placed them, almost a month before.</p> + +<p>"What a fool I was," he muttered to himself. "All that time that I was +tied and chained to a tree by LeBlanc and Anderson, I had those matches +and never once thought of them."</p> + +<p>So saying, he carefully struck one of the matches and lighted the +candle. He now had a chance to examine the prison room that he was in. +Save for<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[Pg 123]</a></span> the door, the only other means of egress from the room was a +solitary window, but a quick examination showed that escape in this way +was impossible, for the shutter of the window, instead of being composed +of wood was made of a solid piece of iron.</p> + +<p>Phil then examined the door, finding that this was evidently made of +several thicknesses of hard wood, so thick was it, that when he rapped +strongly with his knuckles, it gave forth a dead heavy sound, showing +that it was unusually thick. It was so thick and hard, in fact, as to +defy any effort to cut it through with his knife. Phil hardly knew what +to do; all way of escaping seemed barred to him.</p> + +<p>There was one chance, however, and that was a possibility of attacking +whatever guard came to bring him food in the morning, for he did not +believe that they intended to starve him to death.</p> + +<p>Grasping the bottle that held the candle, he went over and made an +examination of the cot. It was an old folding cot, made of fairly heavy +cross braces, bound with substantial pieces of metal.</p> + +<p>Phil unshipped his knife from the coat lapel cache, and immediately set +to work to whittle away one of the cross pieces that supported the cot. +He whittled in such a fashion that on one end remained one of the iron +braces, screwed securely to the stick<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[Pg 124]</a></span> of wood. Hefting it in his hand, +and then swinging it about his head, Phil discovered that he had a +weapon that would almost fell an ox. His plan was to wait beside the +door in the morning until whoever brought him his food should have +unlocked the door, then to strike him down, and while he was stunned, +take a chance on escaping from the house.</p> + +<p>The broken cot did not offer a very comfortable sleeping place, but Phil +propped it up the best he could and lay down upon it. It was too +rickety, so stripping the tattered blanket from it, he lay upon the +floor.</p> + +<p>This was no hardship to him, as he had spent many a night of his life +sleeping upon the hard, solid earth, which is not a whit softer than a +flooring made of pine boards.</p> + +<p>As he lay dozing, he almost fancied that he could hear a very low murmur +of voices. Telling himself that it was only his imagination, he rolled +over again and tried to sleep, but the excitement and the uncertainty +made him sleepless. Again he heard a low mutter of subdued voices, then +he sat straight up in his blanket.</p> + +<p>Since he could not sleep, he felt that he might as well be busying +himself about something, so drawing a blanket over to a corner of the +room, he laid down flat upon it, and with the drill punch on his scout +knife, began to bore a hole in the floor. He<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[Pg 125]</a></span> remembered that the +ceiling of the restaurant was made of boards and not of plaster, and he +decided that this was probably the case all through the rest of the +house. There was probably a double thickness of boards, and the longer +he drilled the more certain he became of this.</p> + +<p>Finishing, he could feel that he was within the merest fraction of an +inch of piercing the double thickness of boards, through which he had +carefully bored his way. Instead of piercing his knife blade straight +through the thin bit of board that was left, he began to enlarge the +hole that he had already made. When he had done this to his +satisfaction, he blew out the candle, for he wanted no stray gleam of +light to betray to whoever was in the room below him his course of +action.</p> + +<p>Having extinguished the light, very carefully and slowly, he dug away +tiny splinters of the thin bit of board that separated him from hearing, +and perhaps seeing, what was taking place in the room below. As he made +the hole, the murmur of voices became more and more distinct. At last, +the sharp point of the knife pierced the board, and then working as +carefully as though he were handling the most deadly explosive, he began +to enlarge the little chink that he had made.</p> + +<p>Having completed his peep hole, he glued his eye to it, but was unable +to make out anyone in the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[Pg 126]</a></span> room below him. Evidently, the occupants of +the room were outside of his field of vision. Giving up trying to see +what was going on, he lay on his side with his ear pressed closely to +the aperture that he had made. He could distinguish LeBlanc's voice, +also that of the French restaurant proprietor. There seemed to be two +other men in the room, for he could make out the difference in voices, +but they were strangers to him. Evidently, the two strangers could not +speak French, for LeBlanc and the proprietor were talking in English.</p> + +<p>Phil could hear the conversation as plainly as though he were sitting in +the room with them. As soon as he discovered what they were talking +about, he became very much excited, for they were discussing the details +of a fur smuggling trip that was to take place that very week. Phil +thought to himself, that if he could only get out of the prison room, he +had the most valuable clue that he or his chums had yet discovered. He +thought it strange that they made no remark about the deserted logging +camp, for Phil was certain that this was the headquarters, or at least a +rendezvous, of the smuggling band.</p> + +<p>Phil had wondered that he had seen or heard nothing of Anderson, for he +expected wherever LeBlanc would be, the other would be found also. +However, from the conversation he learned that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[Pg 127]</a></span> Anderson had already +crossed the border line, and was even then busily engaged in buying +quantities of furs from Canadian trappers. When they had consulted the +minor details of the trip, without, however, mentioning at what point +they crossed the border, much to Phil's disappointment, LeBlanc then +told his companions that as soon as they had completed the deal in furs, +that he had something very much bigger that would net them all a +fortune. In fact, he told them, he would not have bothered with the fur +trip at all, except that he and Anderson had used practically all their +available money in buying furs.</p> + +<p>From the bustling sounds of the room below, the others evidently crowded +nearer to hear what this new scheme was, when suddenly there was a +commotion at the door of the room below, and a voice was heard, +demanding admittance.</p> + +<p>"Ha," exclaimed Jean LeBlanc, "that is P'tit Vareau. I don't like him, +and he shall not come in with us on this big scheme. Tomorrow night I +shall discuss it with you at our friend M'sieu Henderson's place. Now, +you may let him in, but not a word of anything other than about the +furs."</p> + +<p>Vareau made his entrance, and there was some desultory conversation, and +then all of them left the room.</p> + +<p>Phil's heart was bounding in excitement. Here<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[Pg 128]</a></span> he had all the details of +the plot at his finger ends, and all that needed to be done was to keep +close tabs on LeBlanc, and he would lead them direct to the headquarters +of the smuggling crew.</p> + +<p>Truly his attempt at escape next morning must not fail.</p> + +<hr style='width: 45%;' /> + +<p>Garry and Dick, back at the lean-to, were discussing the possibility of +Phil's stumbling upon important information, not knowing at that moment +he was a prisoner, trapped in the old French restaurant, and in the +hands of the most vengeful enemy that the three possessed.</p> + +<p>Throughout the night they kept up a constant sentry duty, not that they +really expected anything to happen, but just because it seemed to be +better on the safe side—a case of rather be safe then be sorry. Morning +came, and they prepared their breakfast. They did not dare to stir from +the camp, for there was no telling at what moment they might get a +message from Phil, telling them that their help was needed.</p> + +<hr style='width: 45%;' /> + +<p>Despite the fact that he was worried, Phil slept the normal sleep of a +healthy boy, awaking in the morning both hungry and thirsty. He +immediately secured the iron tipped stick that he had fashioned the +night before, and took his place at the door,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[Pg 129]</a></span> ready to strike down +whoever entered, and make a dash for liberty. Nearly two hours elapsed, +and the strain was beginning to tell upon him, when he heard a sound of +shuffling footsteps outside the door. Grasping his club firmly in his +hand, he prepared to act, but to his keen disappointment, however, the +door was opened only an inch or two, and he heard LeBlanc's voice, +bidding him out. Through the crack of the door, he could see LeBlanc's +form, and immediately in back of him, that of the big restaurant keeper.</p> + +<p>He made no response for a moment, and suddenly the door was thrown open, +and LeBlanc and the proprietor came rushing in. LeBlanc seemed to be +possessed of second sight, for he seemed to know that Phil had +contemplated an attack on whoever came in the room, and he foiled this +by rushing at Phil, jamming him close to the wall, and making it +impossible for him to raise his club, much less than to use it.</p> + +<p>"Aha, mon brave would fight would he? I thought so, and came prepared to +care for you. We will see that he has nothing left to fight with."</p> + +<p>Bidding his companion in French remove the cot, LeBlanc cast a hasty +glance around the room to see if anything was left that by any artifice +whatsoever could be converted into a weapon. Phil had carelessly thrown +the blanket over the hole that he had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[Pg 130]</a></span> made on the floor, and in a fold +had tucked away the piece of candle.</p> + +<p>LeBlanc paid no attention to the blanket, seeming to think that with the +cot broken the boy had slept on the floor. The table and the empty +bottle that had served as a candlestick were removed, and then food and +water was brought to him and left there.</p> + +<p>"Tonight I am ver' busy, but tomorrow you shall be taken from here in a +trunk, and you shall be dropped in the river. How you will like that, +hein?" and with an evil grin he left the room, leaving Phil again in the +darkness to eat his food as best he could.</p> + +<p>Phil rescued his candle, and lighted it to eat by, and then carefully +extinguished it, for he knew it would not last a great while were it to +burn steadily.</p> + +<p>He had one wild idea left. It was dangerous in the extreme, it might +mean death, but it was death if he stayed in the clutches of the +renegade half-breed. This idea was to try to set fire to the door, in +the hopes that it would burn enough without setting the whole room on +fire until he could battle his way out.</p> + +<p>This idea he meant to carry out only as a last resort. There were two +chances left to him. One was that he could find some other method of +escape, the other was that his chums would come to his res<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[Pg 131]</a></span>cue when he +failed to return at the appointed hour of sundown.</p> + +<p>At any rate, he would wait until the last minute before trying his +desperate scheme. LeBlanc, he knew, would be gone the greater part of +the night, for they did not plan to start until almost midnight for Lafe +Green's house.</p> + +<p>The long day dragged on and he got hungry and thirsty. No one came +again, evidently one meal was all that he was to have. Presently he +decided that it must be past sundown, and he lay down on the blanket, +and before he knew it dropped off to sleep.</p> + +<p>Then out of a sound and dreamless sleep he heard a number of mysterious +tappings on the iron shutter that guarded the window.</p> + +<p>He ran to the window and listened again.</p> + +<p>Yes, there they were, being repeated in a sort of a staccato yet +rhythmic measure.</p> + +<p>Suddenly it dawned on him what it was. The tappings were dots and dashes +of the International Code, and they were spelling out:</p> + +<p> +<span style="margin-left: 1.5em;">P-H-I-L- P-H-I-L- P-H-I-L-</span><br /> +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[Pg 132]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV.</h2> + +<h3>CHUMS TO THE RESCUE.</h3> + + +<p>To return now for a while to the lean-to we shall see what happened when +sundown came and no Phil appeared.</p> + +<p>"Oh, Dick, I'm sorry I let Phil go alone. We should have gone together, +then there would have been less chance of anything having happened," +said Garry brokenly.</p> + +<p>"Cheer up, Garry, it's only a little past sundown, perhaps he didn't +allow himself enough time to get back here, may have thought the +distance was less than it was. You know he has been over this distance +only two or three times. We'll give him a little while longer and then +set our heads together and see what we can do. I have a lot of +confidence in Phil, he manages to pull himself out of his scrapes pretty +well most of the time," comforted Dick, although he too feared that Phil +had gotten into some scrape that proved too much for him. Dick's fear +was that Phil had run afoul of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[Pg 133]</a></span> tramps, for neither he nor Garry +knew that LeBlanc was in that vicinity.</p> + +<p>Nearly an hour passed, and then Garry sprang to his feet.</p> + +<p>"There's no use waiting any longer. Phil would move heaven and earth to +keep up to the agreement that was made as to the hour of return. Now we +must do something. Get your rifle and lariat and hatchet. Stick the +handle of the hatchet inside your trousers so that it will not be so +evident, or better yet, we can do it just before we get to town. Then, +too, we can coil our riatas over one shoulder, and slip our coats on +over them. In that way we won't attract so much attention. The rifles +won't appear to be out of place, for it would be only natural that we +should take them, seeing we are supposed to be campers who will have to +go back through the dark woods to camp. First, before we start, take our +knapsacks, there's nothing in them that we will need, and cache them in +the branches of a nearby tree. Then we'll leg it to town just as fast as +we can."</p> + +<p>Before Dick cached the knapsacks, Garry poured all the water in the +canteens on the fire, thoroughly extinguishing it. Then in a trice the +knapsacks were hidden in a tree, and the pair were ready to start for +town.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[Pg 134]</a></span></p> + +<p>Garry set a terrific pace at first, until Dick toned him down with:</p> + +<p>"Look here, Garry, we don't want to get to town all tuckered out. If we +do we will be useless if it comes to a pinch. I'm just as anxious about +Phil as you are, but we must conserve our strength. We may need it +before the night is over."</p> + +<p>"Guess you're right old chap, but I just keep thinking that minutes may +mean more right now than hours would some other time." Nevertheless he +moderated his pace, and in a trifle under an hour they were in the town +of Hobart.</p> + +<p>Dick was for making at once to the restaurant to institute inquiries as +to whether or not Phil had been there and when he was last seen. Garry +by this time had grown calmer and cooler and again assumed the +leadership.</p> + +<p>"That would be a mighty foolish thing to do. If Phil has gotten into a +scrape, there is just as good a chance that it was in that place as out +in the street. You know we were warned that it wasn't a regular drawing +room by any means. I have an idea, and I think you'll agree with me that +it is a good one. We'll hike to the home of the chap we towed home with +the broken arm the other day, and see if his granddaughter can give us a +tip of any sort as to what sort of a place the restaurant is and what +sort of a chap runs it and who hangs<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[Pg 135]</a></span> out there. Of course there is one +great chance that Phil stumbled onto a real clue and followed it, but +that is very remote, for I don't believe Phil would disobey an order +that had been agreed upon by all as a safety measure."</p> + +<p>"Jolly good idea, Garry," said Dick. "Let's go."</p> + +<p>In a few moments they were at Mr. Everett's house, and were glad to find +a light still burning there. They knocked on the door, and Ruth herself +answered the knock.</p> + +<p>"Goodness gracious," she exclaimed, in a surprised tone. "I never +expected to see you boys at this time of night. Where's your other +companion?"</p> + +<p>"That's just what we would give anything in the world to know right +now," remarked Garry. "We've come to you to see if you can give us a bit +of help or information."</p> + +<p>Then rapidly he told of the plans they had made to try and get evidence, +and the agreement that Phil was to have returned at sundown that night.</p> + +<p>"You say he went to the restaurant? Oh, that's a wicked place, and if +he's gotten into trouble, that place is just where it would have been +likely to happen. The owner of that place is dreadful. He helps those +smugglers and sells contraband rum, and he and that half-breed LeBlanc +have been suspected of several crimes along the border."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[Pg 136]</a></span></p> + +<p>"What's that you say?" burst out Garry. "LeBlanc, you don't mean Jean +LeBlanc?"</p> + +<p>"Why, yes, do you know him or know of him?" returned the girl, amazed at +Garry's sudden outburst.</p> + +<p>"Yes, to our sorrow we do. I haven't time to tell you all we know of him +now, except that he hates us like poison, since we were instrumental in +having him jailed for kidnapping once, and then he broke out. Is that +diabolic villain in town?"</p> + +<p>"He is, I saw him only this afternoon. He used to be around here a great +deal, for his original home is in a town not far on the other side of +the border. I am so sorry to say it, but if your chum was in the +restaurant and LeBlanc saw him there, he could have made him prisoner +with the greatest of ease, for he has many friends there, and there are +many who would do anything that rascally proprietor told them to."</p> + +<p>"Does your grandfather know the ins and outs of that house?" inquired +Garry.</p> + +<p>"Yes, he does, but he is asleep, and as he had a bad day, the doctor +says that he is not to be waked up under any circumstances, so I'm +afraid you'll have to put up with my help, such as it is. All you have +to do is wait till I run across the street and get Mr. Allen to come in +and watch granddaddy and then I'll be ready to help you."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[Pg 137]</a></span></p> + +<p>"You're a brick, Miss," said Garry enthusiastically, "but we couldn't +think of letting you in for any danger."</p> + +<p>"I guess you don't know the border girls, sir. We aren't afraid of +anything in the woods or the towns. We've been brought up to take care +of ourselves. Besides, I've heard Granddad tell about the Rookery, as he +calls it, many times. An' I've an idea that if your chum is held a +prisoner in that house, I know just where it is. So just you let me be +your guide for a little while."</p> + +<p>So saying, she ran across the street and soon returned with an elderly +man, the Mr. Allen of whom she spoke, and then bidding the boys wait a +minute, she dashed upstairs. In an incredibly short time she was back +again, clad in a khaki skirt, high boots, and a heavy sweater. A knit +tam was perched on her head, making her quite one of the most attractive +girls the boys had ever seen.</p> + +<p>"I'll lead you around to the back of the restaurant, where there won't +be much chance of you're being observed. There's one window that has +always puzzled me. It has a great heavy shutter on it, and I don't ever +remember seeing it opened. I've always imagined it was the dungeon keep +of the place, like the ones they used to have in old castles, long years +ago."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[Pg 138]</a></span></p> + +<p>Evidently, thought Garry, the young lady was of an extremely romantic +turn of mind.</p> + +<p>In a very few minutes she had led them through a dark back street to +where they could command a view of the rear of the restaurant.</p> + +<p>"There, wait till the moon comes out from behind that cloud. Now. See +that window there all barricaded? That's what I think is the prison room +for the Canuck's house," said Ruth.</p> + +<p>The boys looked and saw the sinister window, which although they did not +know it then, was the one to the room in which Phil was at that moment +soundly sleeping, worn out by the mental and physical strain that he had +been under for the past twenty-four hours.</p> + +<p>Under the shuttered window ran a dark alleyway, and the other windows in +that side of the house were dark and deserted looking. On the other side +of the alley was a low blacksmith shop.</p> + +<p>"Well, Garry, if you don't mind my calling you that, have you decided on +what you are going to do?" asked Ruth. "I am afraid that you haven't +much chance of getting upstairs if you go into the restaurant, for even +if the proprietor is not there he has a couple of strong, ugly +assistants, and if you tried to force your way upstairs at the point of +a rifle, you would only bring the whole place down<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[Pg 139]</a></span> on you like a swarm +of hornets. It's up to us to think out some scheme."</p> + +<p>"I think I have that worked out now. See that chimney on the roof? It is +just over that dark shuttered window. Now what I propose is this: Dick +and I will get up on the roof of the blacksmith shop here, and from +there we can throw a lariat up over the chimney, then one of us will go +up hand over hand and call to Phil to see if he is in that room. If he +is, we'll have him out as soon as you could say Jack Robinson. Miss +Ruth, I'm going to ask you to stand guard for us, and if danger +approaches, give us some sort of a signal. I suppose you can imitate a +whippoorwill?" asked Garry.</p> + +<p>"Indeed I can," and in a soft tone she proved it to the satisfaction of +both Dick and Garry.</p> + +<p>"There, then that much is accomplished. Believe me, I'll be overjoyed if +I hear Phil's voice in answer to my hail," said Garry.</p> + +<p>"Say, listen Garry. A fine business you'd make of calling through a +thick shutter. First place maybe he couldn't hear it, but it's a cinch +that everyone on the street will. Use your imagination. What did you +ever learn wigwagging and signalling and things for? When you get to the +window, take your knife and rap out a message in International<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[Pg 140]</a></span> Code. +That will make no noise down here, but will penetrate into the room, for +the shutter will form a natural sounding board."</p> + +<p>"Fine, Dick. I must be wool gathering not to have thought of that +myself. Now up on the roof with you."</p> + +<p>Bracing himself against the wall, Garry formed a step for Dick to crawl +up on the roof. Once arrived there, he lay flat, and extending his arms +over the edge, gave a pull, and helped Garry up.</p> + +<p>It took only four throws to settle the noose of the lariat over the +chimney, and they let it swing down on the side of the building. +Clambering down from the roof, Garry made ready to go up the rope. He +went up in agile fashion, and soon was tapping on the shutter. It was +his call that had awakened Phil.</p> + +<p>When Phil heard it, he fished out his knife, and soon they were carrying +on a brief conversation. Phil told Garry the inside of the shutter was +sheathed with iron. Also he told him if anything happened to prevent +them getting him out, to keep watch that night on Lafe Green's house, as +there was a great plot on the way.</p> + +<p>"I'll have you out in a jiffy now." Garry tapped the message to him, and +then he slid down the rope. Dick and Ruth came running to him.</p> + +<p>"Must have something to pry off that shutter with. My axe isn't strong +enough," he told them.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[Pg 141]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Oh, I know what," whispered Ruth. "I stumbled over something a minute +ago, and it was a crowbar. Darius, the blacksmith, must have forgotten +to take it in."</p> + +<p>"Fine, let's have your riata, Dick. There, I'll loop it around my wrist +and go back up the rope. In the meantime, you tie an end of it to the +crowbar and I can haul it up to me."</p> + +<p>So saying, Garry swarmed up the rope again. Arriving at the height of +the window, he manoeuvered until he had twisted the free end of the rope +around his foot several times, thus preventing himself from slipping.</p> + +<p>Then he set to work to pry the shutter loose. Fortunately it did not +long resist.</p> + +<p>"Look out below," he warned softly, and with a loud thud the shutter +fell into the alley below. Phil was waiting in the window.</p> + +<p>"Quick, slide down after me. Lose no time, Phil," ordered Garry.</p> + +<p>Down he went, the friction smarting his hands. In less time than it +takes to tell, Phil was down after him. "Never mind the riata on the +chimney. Away we go," said Garry.</p> + +<p>"Follow me," ordered Ruth, and she sped away followed by the three +chums. They were out of sight not a moment too soon, for as they turned +a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[Pg 142]</a></span> corner, running across a lawn to deaden their footsteps, they heard a +howl of rage.</p> + +<p>"That's the proprietor's assistant. We just got away in time," said +Ruth.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[Pg 143]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV.</h2> + +<h3>THE PLOT.</h3> + + +<p>Ruth led the boys to her home, explaining that it would be better for +them to get out of sight as quickly as possible, lest they come upon one +of their enemies.</p> + +<p>"There's no danger of that just now," interrupted Phil, "for I know +where most of them are at just this minute. However, it would be nice if +you would take us to your home for a minute, for I think I have the +keynote to the whole business right now, and I would like to tell my +discoveries to Garry and Dick, and also get some directions from you, if +you will sit in our council of war and act as chief advisor."</p> + +<p>"Come right along. I must be getting back and let Mr. Allen go home. +Also Granddad might have waked up, and we can get his advice," said +Ruth.</p> + +<p>Silently they followed her home. They heard no suspicious sounds, so +evidently were not being followed. The chances were that the assistants +of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[Pg 144]</a></span> restaurant keeper did not know what to do, and as Phil knew, +none of the principals were about, and all that could be done was to +await their return.</p> + +<p>Garry hated to sacrifice his lariat, as it was an especially fine one, +but there was no help for it, since getting it down would have led them +all into certain capture again.</p> + +<p>Arriving at the house, Ruth found that her grandfather was still asleep, +while Mr. Allen was reading a magazine. He told Ruth that he would +finish his story before going home, so that gave her an opportunity to +hear Phil's story.</p> + +<p>Hastily Phil went over the details of what had happened to him since +leaving the boys the day before.</p> + +<p>"Now the key to the entire matter seems to be the conference that is +going to be held tonight at the home of this Lafe Green. He seems to be +the leader of the entire business, but LeBlanc holds some sort of +position of authority and will probably take the lead tonight, as he has +some sort of a scheme to tell the others. They are planning a fur +smuggling trip in the very near future, because Anderson is now in +Canada buying skins for the trappers. Just what this new plan is I don't +know, for just as he was going to tell it, a man called Vareau came to +the room, and LeBlanc shut up like a clam, seeming not to like him."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[Pg 145]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I wonder," said Garry reflectively, "if we couldn't get hold of this +Vareau of whom you speak, and tell him his partners are leaving him out +in the cold, and so get him to help us by leading us to the smuggling +lane?"</p> + +<p>"Don't have a thing to do with him," warned Ruth. "I don't blame LeBlanc +for not wanting him to come in on any big plan, for he is like a snake +and cannot be trusted even by those he is working for. Very likely if +you tried to get his help, he would turn around and betray you to +LeBlanc, hoping thereby to be taken in on the new plot."</p> + +<p>"That's sound advice," said Garry. "On the whole, it is better for us to +play a lone hand in this game, without taking anyone into our +confidence, except you, Miss Ruth, for without you we might have failed +tonight, and Phil lost forever."</p> + +<p>"The first thing to do is to find Lafe Green's house and see if there is +not some way in which we can get in to hear what they are planning. I +know of no other way in which we can get the proper information, unless +we appeal for help to the Customs authorities up the line, and have the +entire outfit seized, but that would do us very little good, for we have +no evidence on which to have them convicted, and besides that, we would +lose all chance of stopping whatever big scheme is now in the wind.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[Pg 146]</a></span> I +suppose you can tell us where to find Green's house, can't you," asked +Phil, turning to the girl.</p> + +<p>"Yes, it is about a mile outside of the village in a lonely and secluded +place. It is ostensibly a farm that he lives on, but I guess farming +occupies but a small place in his mind. I only wish that I could go, and +I believe I will see if I can't get Mr. Allen to stay here so I can +guide you to the place," she answered, her eyes sparkling with the +thought of the possible adventure.</p> + +<p>But Garry firmly put his foot down on her running any chance of danger.</p> + +<p>"In the first place, it would be bad enough if we were strangers to this +crowd, for they would brook no interference with their plans, but there +is the added danger in the fact that LeBlanc already has it in store for +us, and anyone that takes side with us will meet with his vengeance and +that of his friends. Besides, it is almost midnight," he said.</p> + +<p>Reluctantly the girl gave up the idea of being in on the adventure.</p> + +<p>"But what are your plans now?" she asked. "It seems that you are going +on a wildgoose chase, just to go to Green's house, and besides, with all +his friends there, you would have no chance of escape if your presence +was discovered at the farm."</p> + +<p>"Well, to tell the truth, all we can do is go there and be guided by +circumstances. We cannot afford<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[Pg 147]</a></span> to let the slightest chance slip by us, +and that seems just now to be the scene of plot, in fact it is the crux +of the entire affair," responded Garry.</p> + +<p>At that minute, however, fortune favored them. Mr. Allen came down +stairs and told them that Mr. Everett was awake, and wanted the boys to +come upstairs a minute and say hello to him.</p> + +<p>After giving this message, he went home, and led by Ruth, the boys went +upstairs to see Mr. Everett.</p> + +<p>"Talk about luck!" whispered Garry to Dick. "Now we can get some real +dope on all this."</p> + +<p>Arriving at Mr. Everett's bedroom, they found him sitting up in bed with +a heavy blanket thrown around his shoulders. He expressed his pleasure +at seeing the boys again, and then inquired how it was that they +happened to be around at such a late hour.</p> + +<p>"Time is precious, so we'll have to give you an abbreviated account, +sir," said Garry. "Phil, here, was captured by LeBlanc, one of our most +vengeful enemies, and through the help of Miss Ruth here, we were able +to rescue him," and Garry briefly told how they had broken open the +window of the prison room, and released their chum.</p> + +<p>"Now we have found out that something is going to take place at Lafe +Green's house sometime after midnight, and it is imperative to our +success that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[Pg 148]</a></span> we go there immediately and see what can be done to find +out what is being plotted. I am sure that we can put every trust in you, +so I am going to confide in you. We are at present doing some work for +the Customs authorities of the State, and as you are a former Customs +agent, we are asking you for whatever aid you can give us," concluded +Garry.</p> + +<p>"H'm," said Everett. "Seems to me you are pretty young to be engaged in +that kind of work. I suppose you have your credentials?"</p> + +<p>"Indeed we have," and Garry drew from the cunningly made pocket in the +waistband of his trousers the little gold shield that stamped them as +members of the service.</p> + +<p>"That is enough," said old Mr. Everett. "If it wasn't for my misfortune +in being laid up, I would be with you tonight and between us we would +have the goods on this outfit. As it is, you will have to take the +chance yourselves, for I believe I can tell you just what to do. Some +little time ago, I discovered a secret passage to Lafe Green's house. It +is unlikely that anyone else in the village outside of myself and Green +and his accomplices know about it. It wasn't built by Green, but by a +former owner of the farm, who was in the same nefarious business. It may +even be that Green does not know about it, although that is unlikely. +This passage leads from the barn to the house, and was used to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[Pg 149]</a></span> store +contraband goods in. You see the stuff could be brought to the barn in a +load of hay, or wood, and no one be the wiser. Then it could be hidden +away in the secret passage, and a search party could look through the +house and barn till doomsday and never discover it. Then, too, if the +men were in danger of arrest, they could make their way to this passage, +and after nightfall escape by way of the barn, as the authorities would +of course have only the house under guard.</p> + +<p>"This passage is entered by moving a feed box that stands at the end of +the barn. When the box is moved away, you will see what appears to be +nothing more nor less than ordinary flooring, but if you look carefully +you will see a knot in one of the boards near the wall. Pry this out +with your knife, and you will then be able to lift the cunningly +contrived trap door. This leads to the passage, which is more than forty +feet long. The passage leads to the cellar of the house, entrance to the +house being made by moving the trapdoor upwards. This requires a little +effort, as it is covered by the dirt floor for three or four inches. In +this trap is a ring to lift it when you want to get back to the passage. +Once you have gotten through the trap, smooth the dirt back over it, +leaving a chip or something directly over the spot where the ring is so +you will<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[Pg 150]</a></span> waste no time in finding it when you want to go back.</p> + +<p>"I must tell you this, however; once you get in the house, you will be +in great peril, as these men are unscrupulous in the highest degree. +Green would be behind the bars long before this except for good luck and +the extreme precautions that he takes. Add to this the fact that many of +the people in this section see no harm in smuggling, and would never +give information even if they had it, and you can see how Green has so +long managed to escape paying the penalty for his misdeeds. Now that is +all I can tell you, and you had better be getting along on your work, as +it is now midnight, and it will take you at least fifteen minutes to get +to Green's barn."</p> + +<p>Mr. Everett concluded by giving them minute instructions as to how to +reach the farm of the suspected smuggler leader.</p> + +<p>"I know all this is dangerous," said Mr. Everett, "but you boys are now +working for your country, and as you have taken the responsibility you +must be prepared to carry it out to the end. For safety's sake, however, +I am going to propose the following measure. Come back to the house as +soon as you have either succeeded or failed in your mission. If you are +not here by six o'clock, I will take it on myself to summon help from +the Customs authorities<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[Pg 151]</a></span> up the line, or arm a posse here and search +Green's house. I hope that won't be necessary, for it would put an end +to discovering what is in the wind, but that is better than that you +boys should fall into trouble. Now God speed you on your way."</p> + +<p>They said goodbye to Mr. Everett, after shaking hands with him, and once +again hearing his wishes for good luck.</p> + +<p>Ruth led the way to the door, shyly adding her own wishes for their +success.</p> + +<p>"Now you are sure you know the way?" she asked, as she opened the door. +"I know I won't sleep a wink till you come back in the morning. Just +ring the bell whenever you get back, and I will let you in. Good luck to +you."</p> + +<p>Walking at a brisk pace, they started for Green's farm. There was no +moon, and it gave promise of rain, which suited the boys exactly, as +there was now little chance of a stray shaft of light disclosing their +presence when they arrived at their destination. At the end of fifteen +minutes they reached the farm, and carefully making their way across the +field, came to the barn, standing like a great black hulk. The boys +thrilled with excitement, for they felt they were on the last lap in the +search for the smuggler band, that it was their mission to put an end +to.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[Pg 152]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI.</h2> + +<h3>DANGEROUS BUSINESS.</h3> + + +<p>"Now fellows," whispered Garry, "duck around the side of the barn here, +while I tell you what I doped out as we walked along. Keep an eye out +for dogs."</p> + +<p>They followed Garry's lead around the barn.</p> + +<p>"Here's what I doped out. Only one of us can enter the house. To have +more do it might spell disaster to our plans, for in case of danger one +could find a hiding place where two could not. Two of us will go into +the barn, while one stays out here as guard. Once in the barn, the feed +box will be moved, and the one to enter the passage will do so, while +the other replaces the feed box, and rejoins the man on guard. It is now +twelve-thirty, and the man who enters the house ought to hear all that's +going on and be able to make a getaway in at least three hours and a +half, probably a lot sooner. That is allowing the men an hour or more +for talking, as they probably will take no longer, and two hours or<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[Pg 153]</a></span> two +hours and a half for everything to get quiet and allow the man in the +house to get away. Now to settle who goes into the house, we will follow +our custom of drawing lots. Phil is out, for he has already been in +danger once, and furthermore, he has had his share of adventure. That +leaves it up to either Dick or I to go in. Phil, get your knife out and +hold it in one of your hands. Then Dick and I will each choose a hand +and the one who guesses rightly will enter the passage."</p> + +<p>Phil did as he was bade, and then Garry told Dick to take first choice +of hands.</p> + +<p>"Right hand," said Dick, after a pause.</p> + +<p>"Garry goes," whispered Phil. "I had my knife in my left hand."</p> + +<p>Dick muttered a muffled exclamation of disappointment, for he had +counted on being the one to undertake the dangerous mission, but he +abided by the lot.</p> + +<p>Leaving Phil on guard outside the door, Garry and Dick noiselessly +rolled back one of the folding doors just enough to allow them to slip +through.</p> + +<p>The inside of the barn was as black as a pocket. Standing there for a +minute or two, the boys waited in silence. They could hear the uneasy +stamping of a horse, awakened probably by their entrance.</p> + +<p>After what they judged to be a safe interval, Garry snapped on his +flashlight, and threw the beam<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[Pg 154]</a></span> of light playing about the floor, +keeping it on only long enough to get a general impression of the +interior, and being careful not to allow its rays to strike upward lest +it be seen through a window.</p> + +<p>What they saw made it apparent that Mr. Everett's words about farming +playing a small part in Green's life proved true. There was a single +horse in the barn, and one good wagon. The farming implements appeared +to be suffering from long disuse.</p> + +<p>Garry located at the end of the barn the feed box that marked the +passage entrance.</p> + +<p>Hastening to it, they moved it forward, and there, as told them by +Ruth's grandfather, was the knot. Getting his knife out, Garry dug at +the knot which yielded to his efforts and came out.</p> + +<p>The trap was lifted, and Garry, shaking hands with Dick, made ready to +enter. A musty odor emanated from the passage, making it evident that it +had not been used for a long time.</p> + +<p>"Push the box back over the passage when I get in," he whispered to +Dick. "When I come to get out, I can tip it over when I push upward on +the trap. Now you hustle back out and rejoin Phil. Wait for me down the +road under that big elm tree that we passed on our way here. I noticed +that there was a field back of it, and in case you hear anyone coming +along, you can slip back into it and hide until he or they have passed +on. Now see you<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[Pg 155]</a></span> later," and snapping on his flashlight, went down the +crude ladder that gave entrance to the passageway.</p> + +<p>He waited at the bottom of this ladder until he heard the crunching +sound of the feed box being pushed back over the trap door. Then the +light of the flashlamp ahead of him in a dancing beam, his heart beating +rapidly with excitement, he pushed on.</p> + +<p>He was almost startled into an exclamation of dismay, as there came the +sound of a squeal, and a small form scurried across his feet. Then he +laughed with relief, for it was nothing more than a small rat.</p> + +<p>After walking what he judged to be about twenty feet through the +passage, which was shored up and roofed with timbers much after the +manner of a mine tunnel, he approached a spot where the passage widened, +and he found he was in a sort of room.</p> + +<p>At one side were a number of casks, but these were empty, as Garry found +when he stirred one of them with his feet. At the other side of the room +was a crude table, built of pine boards. On this table reposed a stack +of fine fur, roped into a bundle. Garry examined it and found the skins +to be those of fine seals, caught in Canadian waters, and destined to be +sent to New York and sold to some woman who would have no idea that the +law of the land had been broken by the making of the coat or neckpiece +that she would be wearing.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[Pg 156]</a></span></p> + +<p>They had been there for some time, Garry judged, for the dust was thick +enough to denote that no one had been there for some days.</p> + +<p>He pushed his way on through the passage, and came at last to the end. +There was a box to stand on so that one might get up high enough to get +a good purchase on the trap.</p> + +<p>Now came a crucial moment. There was no telling whether or not the +cellar was occupied. All that Garry could do was to push upward and +trust to chance. Very carefully and slowly he pushed upward.</p> + +<p>It required some exertion, but finally gave way. Pushing it three or +four inches, Garry paused, and both looked and listened. There was not a +sound, and no beam of light came to disclose the presence of anyone in +the cellar.</p> + +<p>Giving the trap a last upward fling, Garry was soon in the cellar. +Pressing the snap of his light so that it would continue to shine, he +covered the trap with the dirt, smoothing it with his hands so that it +would show no signs of having been recently displaced.</p> + +<p>The first step had been successfully negotiated. Now remained the +difficult task of getting upstairs and in a place where he could hear +what was being plotted by Green, LeBlanc and their friends.</p> + +<p>Walking as near the edge of the steps as he could,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[Pg 157]</a></span> for it is at this +point that they are less apt to creak, he made his way up the cellar +stairs.</p> + +<p>Every step was now one of potential danger, for the throwing open of the +kitchen door would disclose his presence, and he would be trapped, for +there was no exit from the cellar except through the passageway, and he +knew that if he were discovered, some of the men would run to the barn +and guard that exit. His rifle had been left with the boys, for it would +only be a hindrance in his movements in getting into the house.</p> + +<p>After a few moments he reached the top of the stairs, and with his ear +pressed to the door, listened for sounds that would tell him whether or +not the kitchen was occupied. He heard nothing, and then bent to where +the latch pierced the door. He could see no bit of light shining through +the small crevice, and then carefully raised the latch, taking nearly a +minute to do so, that it might give no sharp, warning click.</p> + +<p>The latch once raised, he pushed the door open carefully, shoving it +barely a fraction of an inch at a time.</p> + +<p>After what seemed almost ages, Garry stepped into the kitchen. He knew +it was dangerous to press the button on his flashlamp, but there was +nothing else to be done, for he could not go moving through the dark, +taking the chance of crashing into<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[Pg 158]</a></span> a chair or table, and thus +advertising his presence in the house.</p> + +<p>Throwing the beam of light sweeping along the floor for an instant, and +concentrating with all his might, he impressed on his mind a mental +picture of the interior of the room, noting two doors and locating the +various pieces of furniture in the kitchen.</p> + +<p>His next act was to untie hastily the strings of his shoepacks, and +slipping out the footgear, knotted the laces and strung the shoepacks +about his neck. He was now able to move noiselessly.</p> + +<p>Standing silently, he listened. He could hear the murmur of voices +beyond one of the doors. His heart leaped, for there were probably the +plotters. He crept to the door, and listened, but could make out nothing +of what was being said. Only an indistinct murmur reached his ears.</p> + +<p>It would be foolhardy to try and open the door, for he could not hope to +do it without letting those in the room know it, even with all the luck +in the world.</p> + +<p>Garry was stumped. He began to wish that he had taken a chance and +approached the house from the outside, trusting to fortune to get to a +window through which he might both see and hear.</p> + +<p>The boy stood for a moment and debated as to what was the best course to +pursue, whether to go<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[Pg 159]</a></span> back through the passage and try and approach +from the outside, or what.</p> + +<p>Then he recollected the other door. Knowing that the construction of old +New England houses generally called for a front and back stairs, he +guessed that this other door would lead to the upper part of the house.</p> + +<p>Noiselessly crossing the floor, he cautiously opened the door, and found +that his guess was right, for a single flash of his lamp showed a flight +of stairs.</p> + +<p>His stockinged feet making no sound, he crept up the stairs. At the top +of the flight was another door, and opening this a bit at a time, he +entered the room. All was darkness and silence.</p> + +<p>He swept his flashlamp around the room, and made a discovery that +promised the means of hearing what was going on in the room the plotters +were in.</p> + +<p>In most small towns, and especially in farm houses, a furnace is an +unknown quantity. So to provide heat for the upper rooms without going +to the expense of getting extra stoves, holes about a foot in diameter +are cut through the ceiling, and an iron grating called a "register" is +installed. This allows the heat to mount to the upper rooms.</p> + +<p>Garry mentally estimated the location of the room he was in, and decided +that it was over the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[Pg 160]</a></span> kitchen. Hence the next room on that floor must be +the one over that in which the conference of the smugglers was taking +place.</p> + +<p>Walking as though the floor were covered with eggs, he proceeded to the +other door of the room, and pursuing the same tactics of taking several +moments, cautiously opened the door. He found that he was in a bedroom.</p> + +<p>He stood stock still, and listened.</p> + +<p>The room was unoccupied, for there was no sound of breathing coming from +the direction of the bed. Deciding to get his bearings before going +further, he looked about. By this time his eyes had become accustomed to +the dark, and he did not make use of his lamp. A faint bit of light +proved to be coming through the window. Creeping across the floor, he +examined. It was open, for the night was warm.</p> + +<p>Outside the window was a great maple tree. One branch was almost on a +level with the sill and not more than two feet distant.</p> + +<p>This done, he searched for the light that would disclose the location of +the register, and his heart fell when he found nothing. It seemed as if +his carefully planned move had fallen like a house of cards.</p> + +<p>Since there was evidently no register in the room, it seemed safe to +flash his lamp.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[Pg 161]</a></span></p> + +<p>It must be explained that Garry's examination of the room occupied only +a matter of seconds.</p> + +<p>Just as he was about to press the button of the flashlight, he heard the +purring voice of LeBlanc, muffled and indistinct.</p> + +<p>With a thrill of excitement, he knew that there was a register in the +room after all. Getting down on his hands and knees, he felt about the +floor. Only the bare boards were his reward, until as he approached the +bed he felt a heavy rag rug.</p> + +<p>Feeling over this, he discovered it to be slightly raised in the middle. +Carefully rolling it back, he was rewarded by seeing light and hearing +the hum of voices.</p> + +<p>At last Garry was an unseen listener to the plot being hatched below!<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[Pg 162]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII.</h2> + +<h3>THE RUSSIAN'S TALE.</h3> + + +<p>Garry crawled under the bed, laying so that he could both look down into +the room and hear what was being said. Then he arranged the rug that it +could be flipped back into place in an instant.</p> + +<p>Then he peered down into the room below. One was Jean LeBlanc, who, of +course, he knew. The second man he placed as Lafe Green, a great hulk of +a man with flaming red hair. He recognized him from the description +given by Ruth. The other three were strangers. Two wore the ordinary +garb of the woods, but the third was dressed in well-made clothes. He +was a striking looking man with a lustrous black beard and moustache.</p> + +<p>As Garry listened, LeBlanc again took up the conversation. It seemed +that the details of the trip to bring the consignment of furs across the +border had been settled. Garry was sorry he was too late to hear this, +but of course there was no help.</p> + +<p>"Now we shall come to the main business of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[Pg 163]</a></span> evening, ma fren's. I +have already told you, this man, his name is Boris Borefski, who comes +from Russia with a great scheme, a fine scheme, oui, it is magnifique. +Beside it, the bringing of a few furs is nothing. Were it not for the +fact the furs have been bought, pouf! we should throw away the plan like +so many dead leaves. M'sieu Boris shall himself tell you his story. He +speaks not the English, so me, I shall act as the interpreter and tell +you what he says as he goes along. Eh bien, M'sieu, begin."</p> + +<p>Speaking rapidly in French, as many well educated Russians are able to +do, and being stopped occasionally by LeBlanc while a translation was +being made, Boris began:</p> + +<p>"My new acquaintance and already my good friend LeBlanc has told you +that I have a plan. True I have, one that will make for us all much +money.</p> + +<p>"I was for many years the private secretary to the Grand Duke Sidis in +Russia, a man immensely wealthy. Among his prized possessions were a +number of magnificent jewels. They were only second in value to those of +the Grand Duke Boris, cousin to the Czar.</p> + +<p>"Of course you know what happened during the war, how the masses arose +against the Czar and took the government away from the ruling classes. +At first all went well, and then the Bolshevists began<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[Pg 164]</a></span> their reign. +When the homes of the wealthy were raided and despoiled of their +valuables, my master confided in me, and together we contrived a secure +hiding place for the jewels.</p> + +<p>"To save my own life, I pretended to be one of the Bolshevists. But, +bah, they were nothing to me. All the time I thought and thought of the +magnificent jewels hidden away from the light of day where the Grand +Duke and I had placed them.</p> + +<p>"The more I thought, the more I pondered over why I should stay in that +land, or why I should continue to live a life of poverty. Confiding in +my brother, who had joined the Bolshevists as I had, merely to protect +his life, we decided that we should make a break for liberty, taking +with us the jewels of the Duke.</p> + +<p>"Scraping together all the money we could by any means whatsoever, we +took the gems one night and fled. Of the long trip across Siberia I +shall not bother to tell you; it is sufficient to say that we suffered +much. Finally we reached the end, and in a big Japanese fishing vessel +were brought to the western part of Canada.</p> + +<p>"In British Columbia we made an attempt to cross the border, but in some +way suspicion rested upon us, and again we fled. A Canadian Customs man +followed us all the way across Canada, but we managed to give him the +slip and we landed in the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[Pg 165]</a></span> home town of my good friend LeBlanc. Fortune +favored us, for we made his acquaintance.</p> + +<p>"He has agreed that he will help us bring the jewels across the border, +and more than that, he will help us sell them in places he and his +companion Green know about. For all of you there is much pay if you +help. And that is all there is to tell you," concluded the Russian.</p> + +<p>Without waiting for any reply, the Russian fished in an inside pocket, +and brought out a small leather bag.</p> + +<p>"See, here is only one small part of the fortune," and as he spoke he +unloosed the string and shook out on the table a magnificent bracelet, +set with diamonds.</p> + +<p>In the light of the oil lamp that stood on the table, it flashed and +sparkled. The men gazed admiringly at it, and Garry himself could +scarcely restrain a gasp of astonishment.</p> + +<p>LeBlanc silenced the talk of the men and said:</p> + +<p>"We shall help this man in his work, for the pay will be great, very +great. The plans to be made are simple. Tomorrow night we shall bring +the furs over the regular route and store them in Green's place here +till our friends with whom we deal come after them. Saturday night when +all is quiet we shall bring the jewels here, where our friend will give +us as pay a share of the jewels."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[Pg 166]</a></span></p> + +<p>Turning to the Russian he explained something that Garry had wanted to +hear since he and his chums had started on their mission; this was the +location of the lane over which the stuff was brought.</p> + +<p>"We cross the border at a point almost on a line with Green's house +here, for then we can come down through the woods and across the fields +with little danger of being seen by anyone. Once we are here we are +safe, for Lafe here has a place to hide things that is beyond +discovery."</p> + +<p>Although pressed to stay for a while and join a card game that was about +to start, he refused, declaring that he was tired and needed sleep, and +would return to the place he was staying for the night, meaning, Garry +decided for himself, the restaurant and rooming house conducted by +LeBlanc's French friend.</p> + +<p>Lafe let the Russian out and then returned to the room, rubbing his +hands together with the thought of the big reward they would get for +their help in the smuggling of the jewels across the border.</p> + +<p>As he returned, one of the men asked:</p> + +<p>"I say, Jean, what pay will we get for all this business?"</p> + +<p>"Ah, ma fren's, we will get big pay, trust Jean to see to that. Did I +not tell you tonight I had the big plan in my head? You have not heard +the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[Pg 167]</a></span> whole of that plan. Once we get those jewels across the border, we +shall simply help ourselves to the whole of them. That will be our pay, +share and share alike."</p> + +<p>The others looked at Jean in amazement, for this thought had never +entered their heads.</p> + +<p>"What about old Whiskers, the Russian, and his brother?" asked one.</p> + +<p>"Pouf, what can they do? They can appeal to no one, for they are trying +to break the law and would only get prison for their pains. We have only +to laugh at them. Now let us have a little game of cards, while Lafe +goes to the cellar for some of that very excellent stuff he has in +there."</p> + +<p>Garry thanked fortune that he had not obeyed an impulse to hasten to the +cellar and make his getaway while the Russian was being let out.</p> + +<p>Then he was startled almost out of a year's growth at the turn that +events took at that moment.</p> + +<p>"You fellows can play cards all you want, but go out in the kitchen. +There's a big table there," said Lafe.</p> + +<p>That meant to Garry that his retreat was to be cut off as long as the +card game was in progress. This might be so long as to exceed the time +limit set for his return to Dick and Phil, and consequently give them +cause to worry.</p> + +<p>Then followed disaster number two.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[Pg 168]</a></span></p> + +<p>"If you chaps want to play cards and drink, you can do it without me. +I'm dog tired, too tired even to go home, and I'm going upstairs and +turn in for a while," said one of the quartet.</p> + +<p>"All right, if you want to, take the room over this one," said Green.</p> + +<p>Escape seemed to be cut off at all angles from Garry, not to mention the +chances of detection.</p> + +<p>Quickly flipping the rug back in place over the register, he rolled back +under the bed, hugging up against the wall as close as he could. He +didn't know what he was going to do. For the present the only thing +possible was to remain where he was, trusting to chance not to be +detected.</p> + +<p>For a moment he thought of making a dash for the hall or the other room, +but decided the danger was too great. It was well that he remained where +he was, for the door opened, and the man came in, yawning audibly.</p> + +<p>He threw his clothes off and tumbled into bed, while Garry hardly dared +breathe for fear that his presence would be detected.</p> + +<p>Fortunately the man was so tired that he did not lay awake long, and his +stentorous breathing soon told Garry he was asleep. Garry took counsel +with himself as to what was the best course to follow. He could stay +where he was till the card game broke up, and then steal down the stairs +and back<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[Pg 169]</a></span> through the cellar passageway, or he could make his way down +the front stairs and try and let himself out of the front door. There +was one drawback to this. Green might have locked the front door and +pocketed the key, and then, too, there was the danger that one of those +remaining up might go wandering through the house just as Garry made the +attempt.</p> + +<p>There was one other alternative. He could remain in the house till +morning, and then when they had all gone, make his way out easily. Then +Garry remembered that this was impossible, as Everett would have a posse +come to the house if he were not back at six. That would be disastrous +now, for it would halt the bringing of the jewels across the border, and +Garry was determined that their seizure should be part of the grand +finale in cleaning up the smuggler gang.</p> + +<p>He must get out of the house as soon as possible. But how?</p> + +<p>Then he bethought himself of the tree outside of the window. He +remembered that the branch swung very close to the house. Could he make +his way out of the window, then he could swing onto the branch, and so +descend to the ground with no danger of being discovered.</p> + +<p>The only element of danger was that the man should wake as he was making +his escape. Still<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[Pg 170]</a></span> Garry reflected, he had been in a tight place ever +since the moment he had entered the passageway, and this would be no +worse.</p> + +<p>Assuring himself that the man was still sleeping soundly, he began to +edge his way from under the bed. His way across the floor was one of +infinite precaution, taking many minutes. After he had squirmed for a +foot or so, he would stop and listen to see if the regular breathing of +the man on the bed continued. Once as he was half way across the floor, +he heard a creak, as the sleeper rolled over in his slumbers.</p> + +<p>Garry didn't dare to move for nearly five minutes after this. Then he +started again, and after what seemed an age, reached the window.</p> + +<p>Cautiously he raised himself up, and thrust a leg out of the window. +Then followed the other, and he was sitting on the sill. Leaning out, he +let his body fall towards the limb, caught it, and swung clear of the +window.</p> + +<p>In a trice he had thrown his leg up over the tree, his practice in the +gymnasium making this an easy feat. Crawling carefully along the limb, +he worked his way to the trunk, and then the descent to the ground was +accomplished without trouble. Without bothering to put on his shoepacks, +he sped away from the house.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[Pg 171]</a></span></p> + +<p>Finally he reached the road, and here he slipped the heavy shoepacks on, +and in a few moments had rejoined his companions where they were +nervously waiting under the big elm.</p> + +<p>They hailed his coming with delight, pounding him on the back and +shaking hands gleefully.</p> + +<p>"What luck, old topper?" was Dick's first question.</p> + +<p>"All the luck in the world, boys. Tonight our quest was crowned with +success!"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[Pg 172]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII.</h2> + +<h3>FERNALD COMES.</h3> + + +<p>"Tell us all about it," demanded Phil.</p> + +<p>"All in good time," responded Garry. "First thing to do now is to put a +bit of distance between us and that house. Don't want any of that gang +to come and find us snooping around. Everything has gone as slick as a +whistle so far, and we don't want any foolish oversight to queer it. I +move we make a break for town and hive in somewhere and wait for +daylight. Of course we can go to Everett's house, but we shouldn't bust +in on him in the middle of the night. He's a sick man, you know."</p> + +<p>"Wonder where we can go and talk things over," asked Dick. "I suppose we +could go and duck in the woods a ways and build a bit of a fire, for it +seems a bit chilly."</p> + +<p>"There's one place we can go and never be bothered. That's down to the +station. It never opens till six o'clock. I inquired of the agent when +we arrived; didn't know but what the information<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[Pg 173]</a></span> might come in useful +some time. Besides, there's a bench in front where we can sit and gas +away without anyone hearing us. Then just before six we can hike to +Everett's house, so that he won't be raising a rescue party."</p> + +<p>All this conversation took place as the boys were walking. In a short +time they had arrived at the station. The fitful gleam of an oil lamp on +a bracket over the bench was the only light, although in a short time, +now, the first light of early dawn would begin to break.</p> + +<p>The weary boys threw themselves on the bench, while Garry proceeded to +give an account of his night's venture. The chums listened with +breathless interest as he told of the developments, and held their +breath as Garry told of the dangerous business of getting out of the +room with the man there on the bed.</p> + +<p>"Gosh," said Dick, "I'd have given a good bit to be in on that. Strikes +me that you and Phil have had all the fun out of this proposition."</p> + +<p>"Sure we've had some fun out of it, but it's only evening things up a +bit. Remember that it was you who had the honor of finding the hermit +that time we were in search of him, and Phil had to stay behind without +getting a chance, although he got into a pickle afterward," said Garry +consolingly.</p> + +<p>"Guess we can't have everything in this world,"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[Pg 174]</a></span> answered Dick. "Next +thing to do now is to plan our new campaign. Of course we won't bother +with them tomorrow night, for that is small potatoes compared to the +jewel plot. Isn't that LeBlanc a cold blooded specimen of a human being? +He'd double cross his own father. I doubt if he would have the slightest +hesitation about putting the Russians out of the way if he couldn't +achieve his ends in any other way."</p> + +<p>"Dare say you're right, Dick. At any rate, we must now put our heads +together and dope out just what to do in this smuggling case. What must +be done is to capture them just as they get over the border. Then the +gems will be found in their possession, and they will be caught dead to +rights. If they are allowed to reach Green's house, there are any number +of ways they can squirm out of the mess provided they have a clever +lawyer. I don't know but what the best plan is to tell this whole +business to Mr. Everett and see what he suggests. I imagine that his +advice will be to get help from the Customs house up the line, and then +lay in wait for them. There'll probably be a hot time taking them, so +you'll come in for a share of the excitement after all, Dick."</p> + +<p>This having been settled, there was nothing more to do except to chat +away the time till morning. As they talked, the first faint flush of +dawn ap<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[Pg 175]</a></span>peared in the east, giving promise of a fine day despite the +fact that the moonless night had hinted of rain.</p> + +<p>Finally Garry looked at his watch.</p> + +<p>"Just five o'clock," he announced. "In another few minutes we start for +the Everett home. By the way, that Miss Ruth is a brick."</p> + +<p>He said it so enthusiastically that Dick and Phil looked at each other +and then burst into a shout of laughter. Both saw a chance to have a +little fun at the expense of their leader.</p> + +<p>"What do you know about that, Phil," said Dick, giving Phil a nudge as +he spoke. "I believe upon my soul that Garry has been smitten with the +charms of the fair lady."</p> + +<p>"Looks very much that way," responded Phil, falling into the spirit of +the joke.</p> + +<p>Garry turned a dark red.</p> + +<p>"Of all the confounded foolishness, that is the worst," he sputtered. +"Why, I've only seen the girl a couple of times."</p> + +<p>"Methinks thou dost protest too much," quoted Dick.</p> + +<p>"And as for me, I'll have something to tell a certain young lady back +home," announced Phil.</p> + +<p>Garry again broke into indignant denials.</p> + +<p>"By George, Phil, I only said that in joke, but now I think that I hit +the nail on the head," declared<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[Pg 176]</a></span> Dick. As a matter of fact, both he and +Phil were now sure that their joke was more flavored with truth than +jest.</p> + +<p>Just as they were preparing to leave, they heard a distant rumble.</p> + +<p>"There's a train headed this way. Wonder if it's a freight or a +passenger," remarked Phil.</p> + +<p>"Must be a freight, there are no passengers scheduled to pass here at +this time of day," said Garry. "Shall we wait and watch it go by? That +seems to be the only thing in the way of excitement that is promised for +this morning."</p> + +<p>The others being agreeable, they waited a moment. Soon the puffing +engine appeared at the curve, and the rumbling grinding cars passed +them. The boys amused themselves by checking off the various railroad +lines that were represented by the markings on the different freight +cars. They noted the Grand Trunk and Canadian Pacific predominated, +giving rise to the thought that this was bound for the far west via the +Canadian Rockies.</p> + +<p>As the caboose appeared in sight, the train seemed to slacken speed for +a bit, and a man jumped off the back end, waving a goodbye to the train +crew as he did.</p> + +<p>"Well, talk about luck," shouted Garry, as he saw the features of the +man. "There's Fernald, the Customs agent!"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[Pg 177]</a></span></p> + +<p>He was right, and as soon as Fernald saw them, he hailed them, asking in +surprise how they knew he was going to arrive at that time, and on a +freight instead of a passenger train.</p> + +<p>"To tell you the truth, Mr. Fernald," explained Garry, "you were the +last man on earth that we expected to see right this minute. The reason +for our being here involves the telling of a long story, and we must +keep a six o'clock engagement in order to prevent an armed posse from +going in search of us. Perhaps you'd better come along, and then we can +tell you the story at the same time we tell Mr. Everett."</p> + +<p>"Who's Everett?" asked Fernald quickly.</p> + +<p>"Oh, he's a fine old chap, used to be collector at the Customs House +when it was located here some years ago. We did him a slight favor a +little while ago, and he repaid us very handsomely by giving us +information that was the means of our getting a clue that means the +capture of the gang Sunday night," answered Garry, as they walked along.</p> + +<p>They reached the Everett house just on the stroke of six, and were +admitted by Ruth even before they rang the bell. Evidently she had been +watching for them from the window.</p> + +<p>"Oh, I'm glad you are back all safe and sound. I worried so that I +hardly slept, and Granddad woke me three or four times to know if you +had come<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[Pg 178]</a></span> back. His orders were to have you go right up the minute you +came. But who is this gentleman?"</p> + +<p>"Pardon me, Miss Ruth, this is Mr. Fernald, one of the men of the +service, and he will take charge from now on. We're thankful he came, +for we were almost up a stump as to how to proceed now," said Garry. +Indeed all three were thankful that Fernald had arrived, for they felt +the need for the counsel of an older head than theirs, and one more +experienced in the work of capturing a smuggler outfit than were they.</p> + +<p>They found Mr. Everett in the act of struggling to tie a tie with one +hand, and muttering fiery exclamations at his failure to accomplish the +feat speedily. Garry did the job for him, and after Fernald had been +introduced, they went over the story again.</p> + +<p>Just before he started, old Mr. Everett, looking searchingly at Fernald, +said:</p> + +<p>"I remember you now. You were connected with that Harworth smuggling +case nearly eighteen years ago. I was one of the witnesses then."</p> + +<p>"Why, I remember you too, now," said Fernald, his face lighting up. At +first he had been a little dubious about the boys having confided so +much of their business to a stranger, but this new development cleared +away all doubt.</p> + +<p>Garry told the whole story of the night's happen<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[Pg 179]</a></span>ings, amazing his +hearers with the tale of his pluck and good fortune.</p> + +<p>After the telling of the story, Ruth hastened away to prepare breakfast +for all, insisting that they stay, although they protested against +causing so much trouble.</p> + +<p>"Oh, it won't be a bit of trouble. It will be fun, because it isn't +often that I cook for anyone but Granddad and myself. Besides, I'll +probably make Garry help me wipe the dishes." With that she darted from +the room.</p> + +<p>Phil and Dick burst into a shout of laughter.</p> + +<p>"Aha, it seems that the same arrow has hit two people," Dick whispered +to Phil, but loud enough so that Garry could hear. He blushed furiously, +but could be drawn to make no comment or denial.</p> + +<p>"Now the next thing on the docket is to discover the exact trail taken +by these men on their smuggling trip. We know it will be the same on +both nights, but of course we won't molest them on the first trip. This +big gem plot overshadows all others. The question is, just how to find +that trail."</p> + +<p>"If you will allow me to make a suggestion, I think I can solve that +problem after I ask a question or two of Mr. Everett," interposed Garry.</p> + +<p>"Go to it, you boys have done the trick so far, now go on and finish +it," said Fernald heartily.</p> + +<p>"First, then," said Garry, "how far is the bound<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[Pg 180]</a></span>ary line at a point +just back of Green's farm, and how dense is the woodland there, Mr. +Everett?"</p> + +<p>"Why, as the crow flies, it is about three miles, maybe a little less. +And as for the woodage, it is quite sparse. You see the logging +operations extended that way, and they very nearly clean cut that land. +There are, however, a few big trees scattered here and there. On the +other side of the border, the forest gets considerable thicker."</p> + +<p>"Fine, I see a way very clearly now," said Garry. "Sometime today, +LeBlanc and Green, with the other two men, whose names I do not know, +will cross the border, for they are due to return tonight with furs. +Dick, Phil and I will estimate as near as we can the point on the line +at the back of Green's farm. Then we will take positions about a +sixteenth of a mile apart, perhaps a little more. We can mount one of +the taller trees, and with our glasses can keep a sharp lookout for the +point where they cross the line. It is likely that from force of habit +they will take the same route going as returning. That will allow us to +cover a quarter of a mile, counting in what we can see without glasses +on either side. Then on Saturday we can repeat the operation, if +necessary, thus getting a double check on the route. We know how to get +our bearings and mark the trail so that we can find it again, even in +the dark."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[Pg 181]</a></span></p> + +<p>"That's the ticket. That will be your work for today then, while I go up +the line and arrange for a posse of Customs men and deputies to effect +the capture of Sunday night," said Fernald.</p> + +<p>They could detect the welcome smell of boiling coffee and bacon and +eggs, and at that moment Ruth called them to breakfast.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[Pg 182]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIX" id="CHAPTER_XIX"></a>CHAPTER XIX.</h2> + +<h3>SMUGGLERS' LANE.</h3> + + +<p>"Shall we give you a lift downstairs, Mr. Everett?" asked Garry.</p> + +<p>"Say, do you fellows take me for a confounded child?" snorted Mr. +Everett. "Just because I get bruised up a little is no sign that I'm a +helpless invalid. I'll go downstairs by the help of myself and no one +else."</p> + +<p>"What's that I hear, Granddad?" demanded Ruth, from the bottom of the +stairs. "You are not to stir a single step unless you let two of the +boys help you."</p> + +<p>"There, dang it, Ruthie, can't you let me save my pride in front of +these youngsters? All right, all right, have it your own way. But I warn +you, one of these days you'll boss me too much, and then well see, we'll +see."</p> + +<p>As the boys, a little embarrassed by the turn of events, were helping +him down the stairs, he whispered delightedly:<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[Pg 183]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Bosses me round just like a youngster, that girl does. Only way I can +save my pride is to let on that I'm awful put out about it. But Lord +bless you, if she didn't boss me, I wouldn't know what to do," he +concluded with another chuckle of pleasure.</p> + +<p>The boys then perceived that Ruth's "bossing" was evidently a daily +occurrence, a sort of family joke, and joined in laughing with old Mr. +Everett, who seemed to take such keen delight in "saving his pride."</p> + +<p>Breakfast was a jolly affair. The eggs were done to a turn, the bacon +crisp, the coffee like drops of amber, and the hot biscuits would fairly +melt in one's mouth. They chatted merrily while they ate. Suddenly it +occurred to Garry to ask how it was Fernald had arrived that morning.</p> + +<p>"Why I got the whole dope on the receiving end of the fur smuggling by +your tip on the two buyers, and have that ready to clean up any time I +want to. Then I got worrying about you boys here in a strange country, +and decided to hop on and lend what assistance I could. I got as far as +I could by passenger train, and then because of bad connections, got +waylaid and found I would have had to lay over. Fortunately that fast +freight came along, and by dint of a little persuasion managed to +convince the trainmen that I was not a tramp, but on<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[Pg 184]</a></span> government +business, with the result that I arrived here fourteen hours quicker +than I would have otherwise. It was a piece of good fortune, for I guess +I am here in just enough time to see the finish of a thrilling case, +minus the thrills for me."</p> + +<p>Breakfast over, Fernald said he was off for the Customs House, while the +boys prepared for a long vigil at the border to spot the "lane" used by +the smugglers in their trips.</p> + +<p>Ruth insisted on preparing a lunch for them, and packed it so it could +be comfortably slipped in the pockets, so that no excess baggage would +bother them.</p> + +<p>Before starting out, Garry climbed to the attic of the Everett house, +and getting the range with his glasses, computed the distance by means +of the Mill scale on the glasses. This gave him a working plan to use +when they hit the border, and could direct their steps so as to come out +almost exactly back of the Green farm. All that they needed to know was +the distance from the Everett House to the border. Ruth informed them it +was a matter of almost exactly three miles and a half, so they were now +sure of their distances and course. By making straight north for the +border, they would have the advantage of avoiding going through the main +part of the town.</p> + +<p>Starting out, the three made their way directly<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[Pg 185]</a></span> to the approximate +location of the border line. They kept track of the distance by using a +careful thirty inch step, such as is used in the regular army, and +counting their paces as they went. A pace consists of two steps, and is +measured by starting off with the right foot and counting every time the +left foot strikes the ground. This makes each pace just five feet, and +as there are five thousand, two hundred eighty feet in a mile, one can +estimate when he has paced a mile within a very few feet.</p> + +<p>Arriving at the general point where the imaginary line ran, they +branched off at right angles and walked the necessary distance to bring +them to a location in line with the Green farm. To make sure, Garry +climbed to the top of a tree, and with his glasses soon spotted the +farm.</p> + +<p>Garry elected to stay at this point, and instructed his companions to +pace a sixteenth of a mile to either side, and there find a likely tree +and mount it to keep their long vigil.</p> + +<p>"We ought not to have to wait a great length of time, for they will have +to get to their destination to get the furs and come back again, since +they intend to bring them tonight," said Garry. "There doesn't seem to +be any way that we can signal to each other in the event that they see +the men pass, so I suggest that a full half hour wait be made after the +man or men, for they will probably all go together,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[Pg 186]</a></span> or at very near +intervals, have passed and then duck back to this tree where I am +holding out, and report. We all know what LeBlanc and Green look like, +but Dick here never saw the other two accomplices, so I'll describe them +carefully. Wait until they have all crossed before leaving your post, +and when you do, be on your guard every step of the way, to prevent +surprise."</p> + +<p>Garry then described the men for Dick's benefit, and assuring himself +that all instructions were understood, dispatched the chums to their +posts, and then selected the tree that he intended to use for a post. +Climbing up into the branches so that he would be out of sight, and yet +be able to command a view, he made himself as comfortable as possible, +although there was no rocking chair ease. Taking off his coat he made a +sort of a cushion of it, in the crotch formed by the juncture of two +heavy branches and made ready for his wait.</p> + +<p>Nearly two hours passed without his seeing a sign of any approach, and +the uncomfortable seat began to be irksome. Occasionally he stretched +himself by climbing up into the tree a ways, and then back again.</p> + +<p>He was beginning to think that he had bargained for too much, to +guarantee to stay there and watch for the approach of the smugglers.</p> + +<p>Another hour passed, and he began to be stiff<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[Pg 187]</a></span> and strained. At that +moment he heard a whistle, a succession of different notes which he at +once recognized as a signal often used by the three when they were +approaching each other.</p> + +<p>In a few moments Dick loomed into view.</p> + +<p>Garry, rescuing his coat and rifle, slid down the tree and hailed him +with the all important question as to whether he had found what they +came in search of.</p> + +<p>"Bet you I did," promptly responded Dick, when the question had been +put. "They came in a clump almost. First the two chaps you described, +and about five minutes after, LeBlanc and Green breezed by, not letting +any grass grow under their feet. I've marked the spot well, and have +located a good trail all the way, using private signs of our own that +would be meaningless even to a woodsman familiar with all trail markings +and signs. Fact I discovered one or two unfamiliar trail signs, that I +could not recognize, and I believe they are the ones put there by a +smuggler band. I'm pretty certain that is the regular trail used. Are +you stiff? Believe me, that is the last tree sentry duty I want for a +long time to come. I'd as soon sit two hours on a telegraph wire as the +limb of a tree. Let's hike after Phil and return to town. Guess we've +done all that we can."</p> + +<p>"Yes, nothing remains now to be done except<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[Pg 188]</a></span> wait for the big doings +Saturday night. Let's go, and keep a sharp lookout all the time. By the +way, how near did they pass to you?"</p> + +<p>"Not more than twenty feet above where I was located. Evidently they do +not cut a straight line from the farm, but slant a little, unless our +reckoning was a bit off. It is likely that they swerve a bit, because +there may be a pathway across the farm that they use to get here. +Believe me, I held my breath as they went by, although there was little +danger of their seeing me. I strained my ears to see what they might be +talking about, but could get nothing, as they talked in a low tone," +answered Dick.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes they had come to where Phil was perched, and he +clambered down and met them. They told him the latest developments, and +then struck out for town.</p> + +<p>"I'm all in for a little sleep. I move we go back to Everetts', and ask +them to loan us a couch or a bed or something for a couple of hours or +so. I believe I could sleep for a year."</p> + +<p>"That's a good idea. Mr. Everett said that we were to consider the house +as headquarters until the game was bagged, so there would be no danger +of our running into a scrape and spoiling the plans," remarked Garry.</p> + +<p>The thought of a nap made them hasten their<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[Pg 189]</a></span> steps, and soon they were +back at the house. Ruth admitted them, and after telling her and her +grandfather of their success, proposed a nap.</p> + +<p>"You deserve it, certainly. You can use the big double room, there are +two beds in it, and turn in till suppertime. Fernald won't be back +before then, and there's nothing to keep you up," said Mr. Everett.</p> + +<p>The tired boys soon tumbled into bed, and without any preamble, dropped +off to sleep. They had slept what seemed to them to be only a few +minutes, when they were awakened by Fernald.</p> + +<p>"Tumble up now, it's six o'clock, and the young lady downstairs says +that supper will get cold if you wait any longer."</p> + +<p>A liberal application of cold water soon aroused them, and in a little +while they were doing justice to the ample meal served up for them.</p> + +<p>As they were eating, Fernald told them he had made arrangements for four +men to come from the Customs House and help in the capture of the band.</p> + +<p>"That will give us five men, and with the element of surprise in our +favor, we will have little trouble in capturing them," he said.</p> + +<p>"How do you figure five?" broke in Dick.</p> + +<p>"Why, myself, and the four men who are coming," he answered.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[Pg 190]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Well, where do we come in?" demanded Phil, seconded by Garry.</p> + +<p>"Oh, I had forgotten about the possibility of you're wanting to be +there. I'm afraid that it is too dangerous," said Fernald gravely.</p> + +<p>The protests of the three came almost in one voice, until Fernald, +unable to keep a straight face any longer, broke out into a shout of +laughter. The boys then saw that he had been indulging in a quiet bit of +fun at their expense, and they were not to be cheated out of their share +in the capture of the outfit.</p> + +<p>After supper the boys pitched in and helped wash and wipe dishes, +although Miss Ruth protested. Used as they were to camping, washing +dishes was no new experience to them.</p> + +<p>A pleasant evening was passed, and then the chums trooped off to bed, +Fernald sharing the big room with them.</p> + +<p>"Just think, while we are sleeping, LeBlanc and his outlaws will be +coming across the border with their cargo of furs," said Dick, as they +prepared for bed. "And we don't get any excitement now till the night +after tomorrow. It will seem an age, the waiting."</p> + +<p>They were up with the sun, and after breakfast Fernald left to loiter +around the town, and see what could be seen, or hear any gossip. Of +course by<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[Pg 191]</a></span> this time LeBlanc knew that Phil had been rescued, so Fernald +judged that the safest thing for the boys to do was to keep either in +the house or close to it, thus giving LeBlanc the idea that the trio had +decided that discretion was the better part of valor, and had gotten out +of such a dangerous locality.</p> + +<p>"I'd like to have seen LeBlanc's face when he found out that Phil had +given him the slip. I'll bet he was mad enough to chew nails," chuckled +Garry.</p> + +<p>The day did not prove half so long in passing as the boys expected that +it would. Mr. Everett told them many a tale of the early days on the +border, and other stories of smugglers along the coast line, where he +first entered the Customs service.</p> + +<p>There was a piano in the parlor, and the boys found that Ruth played in +excellent manner, and found hearty enjoyment in singing while she +played. Garry was greatly pleased to find that Mr. Everett played chess, +and they enjoyed several games.</p> + +<p>Fernald returned in the evening with the report that LeBlanc had not put +in an appearance, but that Green had been much in evidence all through +the afternoon, and wore an aspect of being greatly pleased.</p> + +<p>"Tomorrow night he won't be quite so tickled about things as he appeared +to be this afternoon," the agent remarked.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[Pg 192]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Tomorrow night is a long way off, wish it was tomorrow night right +now," half grumbled Phil.</p> + +<p>"Patience, my boy, patience. You know all things come to those who +wait," said Mr. Everett.</p> + +<p>Mr. Everett had gained considerably in strength, and with the exception +of his broken arm, was as well as ever, showing what a fine healthy +constitution he possessed.</p> + +<p>The second day seemed to be even longer in passing, for staying so much +in the house began to pall on the boys, who craved excitement.</p> + +<p>In the later afternoon, the four men from the Customs House came, +arriving singly. They gathered in the big dining room, and there +received instructions from Fernald, who had assumed the lead.</p> + +<p>The instructions were simple. The boys were to lead them to the "lane," +as they called it, and there they would deploy slightly and lay in wait +for the quarry.</p> + +<p>"I procured at the Customs House a star shell, such as was used during +the war. When the men are over the line, and almost upon us, I will +light it, and each one will pick a man and cover him. There will +probably be seven of them, LeBlanc and Green, their two aids, the two +Russians, and the man Anderson that you boys speak of. There are eight +of us here, and we will be joined when we<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[Pg 193]</a></span> start out by the sheriff of +this county and two deputies, who will arrive here after dark. That +makes a force of eleven, enough to do the work."</p> + +<p>"You mean there are twelve of us," broke in Everett. "I am going to be +the twelfth man. Just because one arm is laid up doesn't mean that the +other one cannot do double duty."</p> + +<p>All protests were unavailing, and rather than deny him the pleasure of +being one of the party, Fernald allowed that he could go, first +demanding and getting a promise that if there should be a mix-up he +would lose no time in getting to safety.</p> + +<p>"We'll lay back a bit from the spot where they cross, because the arrest +must be made on this side of the border, otherwise we would get in a jam +with our neighbors to the north of us, and the arrest would not be +valid, for they are not smugglers till they have crossed the line. One +of your duties, boys, will be to keep your flashlamps going after the +star shell has dimmed. That will last long enough to show them our +force, and I anticipate no resistance."</p> + +<p>Shortly after dark fell, the party was joined by the sheriff and his two +deputies, and the little force, led by the three chums, made their way +over the course taken the morning they set out in search of the point of +crossing made by the smugglers.</p> + +<p>Walking in Indian file, with no conversation<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[Pg 194]</a></span> other than an occasional +direction or order given in a low tone of voice, they reached the border +line. The boys felt a thrill of excitement at the thought of the part +they were playing on this adventurous night. Soon they reached the point +where Garry had watched, and from then on, Dick was the sole guide. +Flashing his lamp only often enough to find the trail marks he had left, +he led the way unerringly to the point where he had seen them cross.</p> + +<p>There was no light save the feeble bit given by the stars, for it was in +the dark of the moon.</p> + +<p>"Now," whispered Dick to Fernald, "it was at this point that they +crossed the border."</p> + +<p>"All right, now men, follow me."</p> + +<p>Fernald led the way back about twenty feet, having received the +assurance of Everett, who was thoroughly familiar with that part of the +country, that they were on the American side, and ordered the men to lay +down, keeping their rifles and revolvers constantly at hand.</p> + +<p>"No man is to make a move till I explode the star shell, then each one +here pick a man. If orders are implicitly obeyed, there will be no +trouble and no bloodshed."</p> + +<p>"Beg pardon, sir," said Garry. "If we are laying down and you explode +the shell, we'll be at a disadvantage, losing precious seconds in +springing to our feet. I suggest you and I stay close together,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[Pg 195]</a></span> and a +few seconds before you are going to explode the shell, give me two taps +on the shoulder. Then I can give the cry of a hoot owl, and each man can +jump to his feet to be ready when the shell lights up the surroundings."</p> + +<p>"Fine. Every man here know the cry of an owl?"</p> + +<p>All did, so Fernald gave the order to lie down. The long, long minutes +dragged into an hour, and the hour into a second. The boys were so +restless that it was hard to lie quiet and still, but they forced +themselves to.</p> + +<p>It was almost midnight, but it seemed like a week to the boys, when the +cracking of twigs and the crunch of feet warned of the approach of men. +It proved to be the party, for they heard a low growling imprecation +from Green as he stumbled over some object. Garry nudged Fernald, and +immediately felt two sharp taps on his shoulder. At once he imitated the +plaintive hoo-o-o- hoo-o-o- of an owl.</p> + +<p>The men sprang to their feet. Fernald pressed the detonator of the star +shell, tossing it into the air as he did so. It fell to the ground and +shed its light, making it seem as bright and glaring as it would be in +the noonday sun.</p> + +<p>The attacked party halted as though turned to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[Pg 196]</a></span> stone for a moment, so +great was their surprise. Then Green let out a mighty cry.</p> + +<p>They had no chance, for the businesslike rifles and revolvers of a dozen +men were pointed straight at them. The two Russians were unarmed, and +consequently unable to do anything had they wished. Every man gave up +except one.</p> + +<p>That was the half-breed, LeBlanc. With a cry of rage he fired his rifle +into the midst of the men, fortunately hitting no one, and then turning, +ran fleet as a deer back across the border. One of the deputies raised +his rifle to shoot, but was speedily checked by Fernald.</p> + +<p>"Shoot above his head to try and stop him, but don't hit him. He's on +the other side of the border now!"</p> + +<p>Then ordering the men to extend their hands, the Customs agents soon had +them securely handcuffed.</p> + +<p>Just at that moment an appalling thought came to Garry.</p> + +<p>"Oh, Mr. Fernald. Suppose LeBlanc had the jewels!"</p> + +<p>Truly the thought was a chilling one, but Fernald, always a man of +action, made no reply, but sprang to the side of one of the Russians and +searched him hastily but carefully. His search re<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[Pg 197]</a></span>vealed nothing. Then +he turned to the second, and in a minute uttered a jubilant shout.</p> + +<p>"This fellow has a chamois money belt on, and unless I'm greatly +mistaken, that's where the jewels are."</p> + +<p>Making the Russian strip off his shirt, he unhooked the money belt, and +while Garry held his light, examined the pockets.</p> + +<p>Each one was crowded with magnificent gems that flashed under the rays +of the flashlamp!<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[Pg 198]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XX" id="CHAPTER_XX"></a>CHAPTER XX.</h2> + +<h3>THE MAP AGAIN.</h3> + + +<p>The men were marched away to the village, where they were incarcerated +in the village lockup. In order that there would not be the slightest +chance of their escaping, or being rescued by friends, who might in some +way learn of their capture, Fernald ordered the Customs agents and the +sheriff and his deputies to stand guard the rest of the night, keeping +the prisoners constantly under surveillance.</p> + +<p>Himself taking charge of the precious belt, he led the way to the +Everett house. Here they found that Ruth had not retired, but had stayed +up, nervously awaiting their return.</p> + +<p>Carefully drawing the shades of the windows, Fernald emptied the pockets +of the belt out onto the tablecloth.</p> + +<p>For moments all stood spellbound at the beauty and magnificence of the +gems.</p> + +<p>Then Fernald, almost with awe in his voice, said:</p> + +<p>"Why, there's a king's ransom here!"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[Pg 199]</a></span></p> + +<p>After the party had examined the gems, and commented again and again on +their beauty, it occurred to Ruth to ask what would be the disposal of +the jewels.</p> + +<p>"I imagine that in this case, since they are recovered after a theft, +that an effort will be made to get in touch with the rightful owner. In +the case of ordinary smuggled jewels, they would be seized by the United +States. This, however, is a slightly different case. It is up to the +department at Washington, where I shall go immediately to turn this +fortune over to the proper persons. I confess, the quicker they get out +of my care, the better I shall like it. They are too fabulously valuable +to allow me to keep cool while in possession of them. Every minute I +shall feel that someone is trying to get them. I'm off to Washington as +soon as day comes, and I can get a train," concluded Fernald.</p> + +<p>"And now, before we trot off to bed, what are your plans, boys? Will you +return to Augusta to get your old station back again, or what?" asked +the Customs man.</p> + +<p>"Why, to tell you the truth, I should like a chance to stay here for two +or three days and get a little hunting and fishing. We didn't have much +chance for that while we were on this mission. I guess perhaps we could +wire the Chief Ranger and ask for a little furlough. Also, we must wire +the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[Pg 200]</a></span> Customs Chief that we have done our work. I think probably the boys +feel the same way that I do," said Garry.</p> + +<p>"Well, if that is what you would like, it is very simple, and is a +modest request. Leave that all to me. I'll stop off at Augusta and fix +it for you. By the way, now that everything is all over, I may as well +tell you that I am in complete charge of all Customs agents and houses +for the entire northeastern part of the United States, so I guess I have +influence enough to get your furlough fixed up for you," said Fernald, +to the surprise of the boys.</p> + +<p>Mr. Everett, however, proclaimed at once:</p> + +<p>"I knew that all the time."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I fancy you did," he said with a smile. "Now, I'm for a few +minutes' sleep before morning train time."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I guess we can all use a little," said Everett.</p> + +<p>All trooped off to bed, having been told by Everett first that they +could sleep until nine, as there was no train out that Fernald could +take until ten o'clock, and he would have time for breakfast before +starting back for Washington.</p> + +<p>Rising time came all too soon, and the boys walked to the station to see +Fernald off. Then they went back to the Everett house to get their +rifles, and bid them goodbye, for they wanted to be off<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[Pg 201]</a></span> for their +lean-to in the woods, there to plan out how to spend the week furlough +they were depending on Fernald to secure for them.</p> + +<p>They found the lean-to as they had left it, and their knapsacks and +groceries were retrieved from their caches in the trees, as safe and +sound as they were when they were put there some days before.</p> + +<p>"I wonder if we are safe from LeBlanc?" asked Garry.</p> + +<p>"I should say yes to that question, Garry," answered Phil. "He has been +beaten at every turn. His friends are on their way to jail in Bangor, to +be held for hearing before the United States Commissioner there, and he +knows that the Customs service men will be relentless in their watch for +him now that he has broken the law of the country. Besides, we shall +soon be away from here, for I suggest we hike out soon for Lake Umculos, +which is about thirty miles from here, and get some good fishing. The +lake trout ought to be biting fine just about now, and we could get in +some good swimming too, and that would please old heavyweight Dick."</p> + +<p>Dick, as some of our readers know, was like a fish in the water, as most +fat people are.</p> + +<p>As they prepared lunch over the campfire, Phil broke out with:</p> + +<p>"Do you know, fellows, in the stress and excite<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[Pg 202]</a></span>ment of the past few +days, we have never given a thought to the adventure of the lumberjack's +boarding house, and the map that was bequeathed me by the old man just +before he died? I wonder if there isn't some way we can dope out what +the rest of it was. And while I'm asking questions, here are two more. +What became of the tramps, and who was it that so carefully fixed up the +shack at the deserted logging camp?"</p> + +<p>"That's quite a bundle of questions, Phil," said Garry with a laugh. "To +try and answer the first one, I am afraid that it is impossible. All we +have to go on is that you start somewhere from the mouth of some small +ravine. There is no telling how many small ravines there are in the +State of Maine. Guess that is just a mysterious page in our book of +adventures. As for the tramps, the fact that they were in this part of +the country at all, points to just one theory, and that is, that having +jumped bail, they are making tracks for the boundary line, thus getting +themselves out of the country, so there will be less danger, if any, of +their being captured and brought to trial. As for the last question, +that too is a mystery, but there is one thing we can do, if you want to +postpone your trip to the lake for two or three days, that is, solve the +mystery. What's the vote?"</p> + +<p>"I'm for solving a mystery any day in preference<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[Pg 203]</a></span> to fishing. We can +fish almost anytime, and the lakes will keep, but we don't have a nice +mystery served up on a silver platter everyday," announced Dick.</p> + +<p>"That's my vote," agreed Phil.</p> + +<p>"Then the question seems to be carried. The chair will now entertain a +motion for the mode of procedure," announced Garry in a parliamentary +tone.</p> + +<p>The boys reflected for a moment or two, and then a suggestion was +offered by Phil.</p> + +<p>"Seems to me that the only way to do anything is to keep watch there for +a while. We could take turns at it, while the other two took hikes or +did a little hunting. We could take it in half day shifts, for it isn't +very far from here."</p> + +<p>"That seems the only feasible thing to do, but how could we keep watch +without the person or persons who inhabit that place discovering our +presence?" asked the practical Garry.</p> + +<p>"There's one way out of that difficulty," offered Dick, "and that is to +effect an entrance to the big bunkhouse, and rig up some sort of a +peephole, and keep watch of the place in that manner. It is unlikely +that place would ever be entered by those who are using the shack. Then +here's another thing. You could rig your wireless here, and use one of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[Pg 204]</a></span> +the sending sets in the bunkhouse, so that the lookout could summon help +if necessary."</p> + +<p>"The bunkhouse idea is great, really it's the only feasible way. But the +wireless 'phone is not such a good idea. It would entail staying right +here all the time waiting for a possible message, and would be too +irksome, besides losing all chance of hunting or fishing. I for one am +anxious to try that trout brook old Dud told us of. Besides, there +should be no especial danger, if there was I'd advise against having +anything to do with it. Shall we draw lots for the first whack at +watching?"</p> + +<p>This was agreeable to all, and Garry drew watch number one, which they +decided was to begin in the morning. All three would go to the +bunkhouse, effect an entrance, and plan a way of speedy exit in case of +need.</p> + +<p>After lunch they overhauled their fishing tackle, and made for the +brook, determined to catch a good mess of trout for their supper that +night. Starting for the spring, they followed the course of the brook, +until they reached a place where it was considerably wider and deeper.</p> + +<p>Under the natural culvert, formed by the trunk fallen across, they cast +their lines, using flies from their hook. Not having rods with them on +this trip, they were forced to use slender saplings, but they were after +food and not sport, so they did not<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[Pg 205]</a></span> mind pursuing the amateur way of +flipping the fish on shore without playing him in the fashion dear to +the hearts of anglers.</p> + +<p>"If we go to the lake, we'll make up for this, for we can procure rods +there, and have a real battle with some of those fine big lake trout," +promised Garry.</p> + +<p>"There isn't much sport to this, it is true," remarked Phil, as he +flipped a fine specimen weighing at least three-quarters of a pound to +the shore, "but they're going to be mighty fine eating just the same."</p> + +<p>The fish were biting unusually well, and in less than no time they had a +fine mess sufficient for supper. Returning to the lean-to, they cleaned +the fish, and then spent the rest of the afternoon lounging about, for +they had lost much sleep in the past two or three days, and no one was +feeling particularly spry.</p> + +<p>They had the fried fish, garnished with bacon, and hot biscuits and jam +for supper, with of course the coffee that always goes with an +out-of-door meal.</p> + +<p>As soon as it was dark, they rolled in their blankets, and with their +feet to the fire, were soon deep in sleep.</p> + +<p>They were up with the dawn, and after breakfast headed towards the +deserted logging camp. They<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[Pg 206]</a></span> approached carefully, and when within sight +of it, waited and reconnoitered.</p> + +<p>"Guess no one is at home or there would be a sign of smoke from the +chimney, unless whoever is living there is eating raw food. Let's take a +look at the spring," said Garry.</p> + +<p>At the spring they found no sign of anyone having been there lately. +This was easily seen, for the ground was soft about the bubbling spring, +and would have retained a fresh print.</p> + +<p>"All right then, now for the bunkhouse," ordered Garry.</p> + +<p>They entered by prying loose one of the shutters and hopped inside. The +interior gave no sign of having been used for years, as the dust was +thick everywhere, and nothing could be found that looked as though it +had been touched in some time.</p> + +<p>In an old cupboard they found a box of nails of all sizes, and this gave +Garry an idea. Cutting his bandanna handkerchiefs in strips, he doubled +them up, until he had oblong pieces about two inches in width and four +in length. Then he removed the shutter entirely, and fastened the cloth +hinges he had made to it. While the others held the shutter in place +again, he fastened the other ends of the crude hinges to the top of the +window casing. A piece of string from his pocket was utilized to hold it +tight against the bottom of the sill.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[Pg 207]</a></span></p> + +<p>"You see, this string holds the shutter in place, and from the outside +no one would ever suspect that it had been touched. You see I've used a +window that is not in view of the shack. Now should it become necessary +for any reason to leave this place in a hurry, a sharp push will break +the strings that holds the shutter in at the bottom, and pushing out the +shutter, it's only a matter of seconds in getting out. Then you can use +your legs in getting clear of the vicinity," explained Garry.</p> + +<p>At the opposite end of the shack, in a shutter, was pierced a peephole +that commanded a view of the door of the shack that the boys believed +was the one used by the occupant or occupants of the building.</p> + +<p>"There, everything is set. You chaps hike, and then Dick is to return at +noon to relieve me, leaving Phil the first watch tomorrow morning," +ordered Garry.</p> + +<p>Garry's watch was unavailing, for when Dick came at noon he had nothing +to report. It was arranged that no one should come for Dick, but that he +should be back as soon after dusk set in as possible. In order to be +sure of Dick's safety, it was agreed that if he were not back by eight +o'clock the others should come and see what was up, or if anything was +the trouble.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[Pg 208]</a></span></p> + +<p>Dick turned up at the lean-to just as dark set in, and reported that +there was nothing stirring.</p> + +<p>The boys were almost of the opinion that the whole business was a wild +goose chase, but Phil was determined to take a hand at watching, and it +was agreed that he should stand the morning watch, and be joined at noon +by the others, who would finish the day together.</p> + +<p>In case nothing developed they would put an end to the watching and +start for Umculos Lake the following morning.</p> + +<p>Phil started for his post the next morning. As he went, he said:</p> + +<p>"I've a hunch something breaks this morning, hope my hunch comes true."</p> + +<p>He had been gone not much more than an hour when he came tearing back, +just catching the others as they were setting out on a short hike into a +new and unexplored part of the woods.</p> + +<p>"The mysterious occupant has come, and guess who it is!" he shouted.</p> + +<p>"LeBlanc?" questioned Garry.</p> + +<p>"The tramps?" hazarded Dick.</p> + +<p>"Both wrong. It's the chap who was in the room with the old man in that +house in Bangor. The one who got away with the missing portion of the +map!"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[Pg 209]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXI" id="CHAPTER_XXI"></a>CHAPTER XXI.</h2> + +<h3>THE QUEST OF THE MINE.</h3> + + +<p>"Well, talk about luck!" shouted Dick. "Let's dig back there as fast as +we can, and rescue the missing portion of the map. He cannot have found +the mine, for his part of the map was as useless to him as the part you +have, Phil, was to us."</p> + +<p>This seemed to be the best course to pursue, for the missing portion of +the map was Phil's by every right, legally and morally, and they felt +they had a right to pursue any tactics to get it back in their +possession.</p> + +<p>Without waiting to make any special plans, they secured their rifles and +hatchets, but dispensed with their knapsacks, and left post haste for +the old logging camp.</p> + +<p>So fast was their hike that they were almost breathless when they +arrived within sight of it.</p> + +<p>Calling a halt, Garry bade them get their breath back, and then proposed +a council to see what was to be done.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[Pg 210]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I think it would be a good idea to try and pry off that window shutter. +One of us can stand guard at the front door, the other at the rear, and +the third can play with the window. In that way we can cover all +retreat. There is a possibility of his being armed, of course, but that +is a chance that we must take," suggested Phil.</p> + +<p>"I think I know a better scheme than that," interrupted Garry. "What do +you do when a coon takes refuge from the dogs in a tree?"</p> + +<p>Both of his hearers were silent for a moment, and then Dick burst out:</p> + +<p>"Why, you smoke him out of course!"</p> + +<p>"Exactly. That is what I propose to do with this fellow."</p> + +<p>They gathered a quantity of dry brush, and then proceeded to wet a +portion of it in the spring.</p> + +<p>"What are we going to do about letting it down the chimney? If we drop +it all the way to the fireplace the chap can put it out, and if we use a +piece of lariat, it will burn it off," said Phil.</p> + +<p>"I thought of that, and have a solution for you. When Dick and I started +for our hike, or rather were about to start when you came back with the +news, we thought we might climb a tree or two, and so we put some wire +in our pockets to use for a ring in climbing. That will work like a +charm and drive him out in no time," answered Garry.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[Pg 211]</a></span></p> + +<p>The wet and dry brush was rolled into a sort of a bundle, care being +taken so that there was enough dry wood and twigs to catch fire +properly. When these had caught fire, the wet brush would burn less +easily, and cause a thick acrid smoke to be given off.</p> + +<p>The bundle was then secured with a piece of the wire, while the other +was attached to it by an end. At the other end of the free wire, a hook +was bent, so that it could be hung over the edge of the chimney, +allowing the smoking bundle to drop about two feet down the chimney.</p> + +<p>"I'm counting on this chap thinking that the shack may be on fire, and +will not investigate the chimney and try to pull the bundle down," said +Garry, "so we must make no more noise than is absolutely necessary."</p> + +<p>Cautiously they approached the house, and here Dick and Garry, being the +heaviest, formed a sort of a human ladder and allowed Phil to mount to +their shoulders. It was then easy for him to clamber noiselessly to the +roof.</p> + +<p>The bundle of brush was thrown up to him, and then they stripped their +coats off and tossed these to him. The coats were to lay over the top of +the chimney and keep the smoke from following its natural course upward.</p> + +<p>In a few moments the bundle of brush was afire and in the chimney.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[Pg 212]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Now we'll get action in a little while," opined Garry.</p> + +<p>He was not mistaken, for in a minute they heard the sound of some one +hurriedly groping at the fastenings of the back door. They raised their +rifles and trained them on the door.</p> + +<p>Phil had slipped down from the top of the roof and joined them, making a +sizable force to greet the illegal owner of the piece of map they so +much desired.</p> + +<p>The door was thrown open and the man dashed out, to stare in a +bewildered manner at the tree. Upon Garry's sharp order, he elevated his +hands skyward and then asked what they wanted.</p> + +<p>"We want a certain piece of paper that you got away with a few nights +ago in an old boarding house on Canal street in Bangor," said Phil. "Out +with it!"</p> + +<p>A cunning look crept into the man's eyes, which Garry did not fail to +detect.</p> + +<p>"I threw it away right after I left the house, because I didn't know +what it was all about or whether it was any good," he declared.</p> + +<p>"I don't believe you," said Garry promptly. "Dick and Phil, you keep +your guns trained on him. I'm going to slide through his pockets."</p> + +<p>At these words, the man involuntarily looked down at his chest. Garry +noted this glance, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[Pg 213]</a></span> immediately decided that the search would not +have to go further than the two pockets in the woollen shirt the man was +wearing.</p> + +<p>The two boys closed in on him, with their rifles-pointing directly at +his head, while Garry advanced to look through the shirt pockets. The +man looked for a moment as though he were about to resist, but the sight +of the two rifles made him use common sense.</p> + +<p>The first pocket revealed nothing, but in the second was an old +envelope, and in this was a piece of paper which at a glance was +recognized as the missing portion of the map. With this in his hands, +Garry backed away.</p> + +<p>"Now," he said sharply, "this belongs to us. It was given by the dying +man to our chum here. We are not going to give you in custody, for the +coroner found that the man had not died by foul play. However, if we +catch sight of you again, you will be seized and given to the +authorities, and a charge of theft of this paper from us will be lodged +against you. Now dig out of here. You have three minutes before we +shoot. Forward, march!"</p> + +<p>"Can I get my blanket?" asked the man.</p> + +<p>"Certainly, and anything else you have in the shack, only we'll go in +with you while you get it," answered Garry.</p> + +<p>Sullenly the man went in and got his blanket and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[Pg 214]</a></span> what tinned food there +was left, also a hand axe which he stuck in his belt. He had no weapon +other than a wicked hunting knife, and this he was allowed to keep. +Muttering threats under his breath, he left the shack, and started +slowly up the trail to the town, stopping once or twice to look back and +shake his fist meantime to see if the boys meant business. Finally Garry +lifted his rifle and sent a shot whistling several feet over the man's +head. Immediately he put on a burst of speed that didn't decrease until +he was far out of sight.</p> + +<p>"That's that. I think we have seen the last of him," said Garry.</p> + +<p>As a matter of fact, this was the last they saw of him, for he never +stopped until he reached the station, where he hid until he had a chance +to steal a ride on the rods of a freight train.</p> + +<p>Back at the lean-to, they pieced the map together again, and were able +to find the second missing location. According to the remainder of the +note, mark number two consisted of three great stumps, close together in +triangular form. The directions were to dig between them, where the +secret of the mine would be disclosed.</p> + +<p>Garry fished out a map of the State, and found that the Shohela river +ran not more than forty miles away. The town of Jennings was marked, and +proved to be a small village, deserted almost in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[Pg 215]</a></span> the summer, for the +tourists had not penetrated to that section, but quite a center in the +winter for lumberjacks coming and going to their work in the woods.</p> + +<p>The river itself was used for the log drives in the spring. Somewhere +above was the bend in the river, from where they could guide their steps +until they found the secret mine. Just what kind of a mine it would +prove to be, none of the boys had any idea. It would hardly be silver or +gold, for there never had been one found in that State. They thought +there was a chance of there being copper, as in Wisconsin there were +great copper mines.</p> + +<p>Figuring out their course, they decided to start that afternoon, and by +easy marching, arrive at Jennings late the following day.</p> + +<p>They repacked their knapsacks, using part of the food they had stored in +the tree cache, and then left the remainder of it in the lean-to with a +note addressed to old Dud, saying he could have it, and bidding him +goodbye for the time being.</p> + +<p>They intended to come back after they had found or failed to find the +lost mine and say goodbye to the Everetts.</p> + +<p>After a march of about five hours, they camped under the trees for the +night, and were soon eating a supper cooked over the open campfire. For +safety's sake they kept sentry duty up through the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[Pg 216]</a></span> night, not fearing +anyone in particular, but with the idea that an ounce of prevention was +worth a pound of cure.</p> + +<p>After breakfast they took up the march again, stopping an hour for +lunch, and then resuming the journey, reached Jennings just at sunset.</p> + +<p>"Let's dodge the town altogether for the present, and go around it, and +find a spot where we can camp for the night. Then in the morning we can +follow the river up its course till we come to the bend mentioned in the +note on the back of the map," suggested Dick.</p> + +<p>This suggestion met with the approval of the others, and so they circled +Jennings, and found a desirable place to sleep and eat.</p> + +<p>Sun-up found them awake, and after a hasty breakfast, so anxious were +they to find the mine, they made for the river bank, without losing +time.</p> + +<p>Up the river they went, getting more and more excited with each step. A +walk of less than an hour brought them to what was unmistakably the bend +in the river that was the first mark noted in the note. Here, using the +sun as a guide, they proceeded east for the necessary two miles. True +enough, here was a ravine, small enough, but still a ravine. The region +was only sparsely wooded, and the boys knew enough about geology, which +they studied the preceding winter at school, to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[Pg 217]</a></span> know that the formation +of the land in that section was quite rocky, there being evidence of +much granite.</p> + +<p>"You don't suppose the old chap that fixed that note was mixed in his +terms through ignorance, and meant that there was a good granite quarry +there, do you?" asked Dick dubiously.</p> + +<p>"Never can tell," answered Garry. "Only thing to do is follow directions +and see what happens."</p> + +<p>Following directions, they paced about a mile and a half, keeping a +sharp lookout for the triangle of stumps. To make sure they would not +miss it, they deployed and marched about twenty paces distant from each +other. Phil was the one to spy the landmark. His shouts brought the +others running to him.</p> + +<p>"Let's dig, and dig quick," pleaded Phil. "I want to see if we've found +a fortune, or are only the victims of a practical joke, or gigantic +hoax."</p> + +<p>The others were as curious as he, and using their axes, as a sort of +combined pick and shovel, dug away at the ground surrounded by the +stumps. In a few minutes, Phil's axe struck something hard, and +abandoning his axe, he scratched the earth away with his fingers. The +hard something was a tin can, evidently, about which had been wound +several feet of tape such as is used to repair bicycle punctures and +such. Fishing his knife from his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[Pg 218]</a></span> pocket, Phil proceeded to cut away the +taping, while the others, with bated breath, awaited the result of the +find. It took some minutes to scrape and cut away the hardened tape, but +at last it was accomplished.</p> + +<p>Tearing the cover from the can, they found an old envelope, which was +soon opened, disclosing a letter, written in the same cramped hand as +was the note whose directions had guided them there. It said:</p> + +<p>"One hundred paces due east from here is a sharp ridge of granite, that +projects above ground for nearly thirty feet. After the granite enters +the ground, there the treasure begins. I know it is there, for I have +been a miner all my life, and know geology as well as though I had +gotten it out of books. The granite ridge is rich in quartz and in +tourmalines. I got some out and had them cut and polished, and they are +the finest ever found in Maine. This secrecy is necessary, due to the +fact that a partner who went back on me has tried to wrest the secret +from me, also the fact that I must wait until I can buy the land the +ridge is on from its owners."</p> + +<p>The three boys stared at each other.</p> + +<p>"Tourmalines," said Garry. "Why, those are the semi-precious stones +known as the State of Maine gem. They are delicate pink and green, and +when<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[Pg 219]</a></span> cut make beautiful stones for jewelry. Don't you chaps recollect +the ring my mother wears? Well, that is a pink tourmaline. As far as I +know, they are found in only three other places in the State. If there +is any quantity of them, there is a neat sum of money to be made by +mining them. Let's go and look at the ridge and see if we can see +anything, although I doubt it, since they are under ground and we have +nothing to dig properly with, neither have we geologists' hammers or +blasting powder to shelve off parts of the ledge. Also, we don't own +this land, and would be liable under the law as trespassers."</p> + +<p>They paced their way to where the ridge was, and looked at it carefully. +It gave evidence of having been blasted two or three times, but they +could see nothing that looked like the matrices of the tourmaline gems.</p> + +<p>"Well, we know all about it, and can find it again, so I move we destroy +all notes about it, and telegraph Dad to see if he can find out who owns +this. He will know, because you see at no little distance from here +begins timberland, and he knows who owns most of the big tracts. Phil, +you are in luck."</p> + +<p>"Why me?" asked Phil in surprise.</p> + +<p>"Because the old fellow made you his legatee by his spoken last will and +testament. All that re<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[Pg 220]</a></span>mains is for you to buy about an acre of this +ground for your operations, and get busy mining," answered Garry.</p> + +<p>"Not by a long shot. We've shared our dangers together. Twice you boys +have rescued me from death, and this mine will remain a secret for +someone else to find out about unless you fellows go in on a share and +share alike basis. I mean that, absolutely flat, and won't listen to any +discussion or debate about it," declared Phil in resolute tones.</p> + +<p>Both Dick and Garry attempted to argue with him, but he was firm and at +last they agreed. At first it was decided to call it the Ranger Mine, +and then Phil, with a nudge at Dick, proposed that they call it the Ruth +Mine, and give her the first gem taken out, as a testimonial for the +help she had given them in their quest for the smugglers. Garry reddened +like a beet, and thought he was being joshed, but seeing Phil was +serious, they voted it to be so.</p> + +<p>"Now back to Jennings and the telegraph office, and start the ball +rolling for the purchase of some of that land, and then maybe we win a +fortune, and again perhaps we don't, but it's worth a chance," said +Garry.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[Pg 221]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXII" id="CHAPTER_XXII"></a>CHAPTER XXII.</h2> + +<h3>CONCLUSION.</h3> + +<p>They found that they could send a telegram from the railroad depot, and +so Garry addressed the following query to his father:</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>"Can you find out immediately who owns land about five miles west +of Jennings, just at edge of what appears to be big lumber tract. +If not, can you refer us to someone in Jennings who knows? +Important, rush answer.</p> + +<p class="center"><span class="smcap">Garry</span>."</p></div> + +<p>"Now all we can do is wait for the answer. In the meantime, let's look +around the town a bit," said Garry.</p> + +<p>This they did, but found little to see. They did not care to inquire +about the ownership of land from anyone in the town, as it would mean +dodging the questions of the curious natives of the little village.</p> + +<p>Several trips were made to the station, and finally they got an answer. +It said:</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>"I do. Why?</p> + +<p><span class="smcap" style="margin-left: 2em;">Father</span>."</p></div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[Pg 222]</a></span></p> + +<p>The boys did a war dance on the platform, giving the station agent good +cause to think they were a little bit touched in the head.</p> + +<p>Garry immediately sent the following telegram:</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>"Have made important discovery. Do not under any circumstances, +please, sell the land till you get letter from us, which leaves +today.</p> + +<p class="center"><span class="smcap" style="margin-left: 12em;">"Garry</span>."</p></div> + +<p>Borrowing Dick's ever ready notebook, and tearing out several of the +pages, Garry wrote a long note telling of the discovery and asking that +they be allowed to buy an acre of the land, since they had discovered +the mine, or if they couldn't buy an acre for any reason, that they be +allowed to purchase the mineral rights, and lease enough land for +operations. He told his father to address him at Hobart, care of John +Everett.</p> + +<p>The letter was dispatched special delivery, and then Garry said:</p> + +<p>"It will take this letter at least two days to reach Dad, and by that +time we will be back in Hobart. Then it will take two days for the +letter to get back, perhaps three, and we can have a bit of a vacation +in that time, and get a better look at Hobart and see something of the +town."</p> + +<p>"And see something of the pretty little granddaughter too," said Phil in +a low tone to Dick.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[Pg 223]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I wish you fellows would stop ragging me about that. I think she's nice +and pretty and all that, but why try and make a romance? Why, we're +nothing but boys yet, plenty of time to think of love and romance after +school and college," protested Garry, blushing.</p> + +<p>"Course you're only a boy, but that doesn't stop you greatly admiring +the young lady, and of course Phil and I are only boys, but that doesn't +mean that we don't have eyes and brains in our head and don't see +through you like a piece of glass," and the fat boy laughed till his +sides shook, at the blushing face of his good chum.</p> + +<p>"Well, that's enough of that. Let's take a good chunk out of the journey +back to Hobart today, and get there by mid-afternoon tomorrow. Let's +fill our canteens and get going," ordered the leader.</p> + +<p>The return trip was made without any unusual event, and they repaired at +once to the Everett home, where Ruth and her grandfather were told of +the discovery, under the pledge of secrecy.</p> + +<p>The young lady was evidently more than pleased about the mine being +named for her. Mr. Everett was as right as a trivet again, barring the +fact that his arm was of course still in bandages and splints.</p> + +<p>For the next two days they hiked about the country, with Mr. Everett as +guide, of course accom<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[Pg 224]</a></span>panied by Ruth, and heard many tales of that +section in the early days.</p> + +<p>Finally the long-looked-for letter came, and as it bears on the +succeeding adventures of the boys, it will be given:</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>"<span class="smcap">Dear Garry</span>:</p> + +<p>"As I told you in the telegram, I own that land. I have a wide +strip there for a right of way for that timber tract to the river. +Of course you boys may have it, but I suggest that you lease it and +the mineral rights. I will sell you the lease for one dollar, just +to make it legal, and the mineral rights I freely give you three +boys as a present in pay for something that you are going to do for +me very shortly. It will necessitate getting a leave of absence +from the Ranger Service, but I can arrange that. Meet me in Bangor, +as soon as possible, at the Bangor House.</p> + +<p>"I will be waiting your arrival. I cannot tell you much about it +now, except that you may have a chance to play a part in a big +timber war. All this will be explained to you when I see you. +Congratulations from all of us in your success in the smuggler +capture. The Chief has written all about it to me.</p> + +<p class="center">As ever,<br /> + +<span class="smcap" style="margin-left: 2em;">"Dad</span>."</p></div> + +<p>"Hurrah! Here's a chance for new adventures. We'll take the next train +and be on our way. Boys,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[Pg 225]</a></span> this is some summer. Fires and captures and +smugglers and a treasure mine discovered, and now a timber war. All +aboard," shouted Dick.</p> + +<p>Bidding the Everetts goodbye, and promising to keep in constant touch +with them, they went to the station, where, luckily, a train was soon +due.</p> + +<p>Of the stirring adventures of the boys in the great timber country, and +how they circumvented a group of timber thieves who were bent on ruining +Mr. Boone, and more about LeBlanc, will be told in the next book, Volume +Four of the Ranger Boys, entitled, "<span class="smcap">The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber +Thieves</span>."</p> + +<h4>THE END.</h4> + + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>The Ranger Boys Series</h3> + +<h4>BY CLAUDE H. LA BELLE</h4> + +<p class="center">A new series of copyright titles telling of the adventures of three boys +with the Forest Rangers in the state of Maine.</p> + +<p class="center">Handsome Cloth Binding.</p> + +<p class="center">PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH.</p> + +<div class="cpoem1"> +<p>THE RANGER BOYS TO THE RESCUE</p> + +<p>THE RANGER BOYS FIND THE HERMIT</p> + +<p>THE RANGER BOYS AND THE BORDER SMUGGLERS</p> + +<p>THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES</p> + +<p>THE RANGER BOYS AND THEIR REWARD</p> +</div> +</div> + + + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>The Radio Boys Series</h3> + +<h4>BY GERALD BRECKENRIDGE</h4> + +<p class="center">A new series of copyright titles for boys of all ages.</p> + +<p class="center"><i>Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs</i></p> + +<p class="center">PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH</p> + + +<div class="cpoem1"> +<p>THE RADIO BOYS ON THE MEXICAN BORDER</p> + +<p>THE RADIO BOYS ON SECRET SERVICE DUTY</p> + +<p>THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE REVENUE GUARDS</p> + +<p>THE RADIO BOYS' SEARCH FOR THE INCA'S TREASURE</p> + +<p>THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION</p> +</div></div> + + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>The Boy Troopers Series</h3> + +<h4>BY CLAIR W. HAYES</h4> + +<p class="center">Author of the Famous "Boy Allies" Series.</p> + +<p class="center">The adventures of two boys with the Pennsylvania State Police.</p> + +<p class="center">All Copyrighted Titles.</p> + +<p class="center">Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs.</p> + +<p class="center">PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH.</p> + + +<div class="cpoem1"> +<p>THE BOY TROOPERS ON THE TRAIL</p> + +<p>THE BOY TROOPERS IN THE NORTHWEST</p> + +<p>THE BOY TROOPERS ON STRIKE DUTY</p> + +<p>THE BOY TROOPERS AMONG THE WILD MOUNTAINEERS</p> +</div></div> + + + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>The Golden Boys Series</h3> + +<h4>BY L. P. WYMAN, PH.D.</h4> + +<p class="center">Dean of Pennsylvania Military College.</p> + +<p class="center">A new series of instructive copyright stories for boys of High School +Age.</p> + +<p class="center">Handsome Cloth Binding.</p> + +<p class="center">PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH.</p> + + +<div class="cpoem1"> +<p>THE GOLDEN BOYS AND THEIR NEW ELECTRIC CELL</p> + +<p>THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE FORTRESS</p> + +<p>THE GOLDEN BOYS IN THE MAINE WOODS</p> + +<p>THE GOLDEN BOYS WITH THE LUMBER JACKS</p> + +<p>THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE RIVER DRIVE</p> +</div></div> + + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>The Boy Scouts Series</h3> + +<h4>BY HERBERT CARTER</h4> + +<p class="center">For Boys 12 to 16 Years</p> + +<p class="center">All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles</p> + +<p class="center">PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH</p> + +<p class="center">New Stories of Camp Life</p> + + +<div class="cpoem1"> +<p>THE BOY SCOUTS' FIRST CAMPFIRE;<br />or, Scouting with the Silver Fox Patrol</p> + +<p>THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE BLUE RIDGE;<br />or, Marooned Among the Moonshiners.</p> + +<p>THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE TRAIL;<br />or, Scouting through the Big Game Country.</p> + +<p>THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE MAINE WOODS;<br />or The New Test for the Silver Fox +Patrol.</p> + +<p>THE BOY SCOUTS THROUGH THE BIG TIMBER;<br />or, The Search for the Lost +Tenderfoot.</p> + +<p>THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE ROCKIES;<br />or, The Secret of the Hidden Silver Mine.</p> + +<p>THE BOY SCOUTS ON STURGEON ISLAND;<br />or, Marooned Among the Game-Fish +Poachers.</p> + +<p>THE BOY SCOUTS DOWN IN DIXIE;<br />or, The Strange Secret of Alligator Swamp.</p> + +<p>THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE BATTLE OF SARATOGA;<br />A story of Burgoyne's Defeat +in 1777.</p> + +<p>THE BOY SCOUTS ALONG THE SUSQUEHANNA;<br />or, The Silver Fox Patrol Caught +in a Flood.</p> + +<p>THE BOY SCOUTS ON WAR TRAILS IN BELGIUM;<br />or, Caught Between Hostile +Armies.</p> + +<p>THE BOY SCOUTS AFOOT IN FRANCE;<br />or, With The Red Cross Corps at the +Marne.</p> +</div></div> + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>The Boy Allies</h3> + +<p class="center">(Registered in the United States Patent Office)</p> + +<p class="center">With the Navy</p> + +<h4>BY ENSIGN ROBERT L. DRAKE</h4> + +<p class="center">For Boys 12 to 16 Years.</p> + +<p class="center">All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles</p> + +<p class="center">PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH</p> + +<p>Frank Chadwick and Jack Templeton, young American lads, meet each other +in an unusual way soon after the declaration of war. Circumstances place +them on board the British cruiser, "The Sylph," and from there on, they +share adventures with the sailors of the Allies. Ensign Robert L. Drake, +the author, is an experienced naval officer, and he describes admirably +the many exciting adventures of the two boys.</p> + +<div class="cpoem1"> +<p>THE BOY ALLIES ON THE NORTH SEA PATROL;<br />or, Striking the First Blow at +the German Fleet.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES UNDER TWO FLAGS;<br />or, Sweeping the Enemy from the Sea.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE FLYING SQUADRON; or, The Naval Raiders of the +Great War.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE TERROR OF THE SEA;<br />or, The Last Shot of +Submarine D-16.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE SEA;<br />or, The Vanishing Submarine.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALTIC;<br />or, Through Fields of Ice to Aid the Czar.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES AT JUTLAND; or, The Greatest Naval Battle of History.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES WITH UNCLE SAM'S CRUISERS;<br />or, Convoying the American +Army Across the Atlantic.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE SUBMARINE D-32;<br />or, The Fall of the Russian +Empire.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE VICTORIOUS FLEETS;<br />or, The Fall of the German +Navy.</p> +</div></div> + + + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>The Boy Allies</h3> + +<p class="center">(Registered in the United States Patent Office)</p> + +<p class="center">With the Army</p> + +<h4>BY CLAIR W. HAYES</h4> + +<p class="center">For Boys 12 to 16 Years.</p> + +<p class="center">All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles</p> + +<p class="center">PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH</p> + +<p>In this series we follow the fortunes of two American lads unable to +leave Europe after war is declared. They meet the soldiers of the +Allies, and decide to cast their lot with them. Their experiences and +escapes are many, and furnish plenty of good, healthy action that every +boy loves.</p> + +<div class="cpoem1"> +<p>THE BOY ALLIES AT LIEGE;<br />or, Through Lines of Steel.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES ON THE FIRING LINE;<br />or, Twelve Days Battle Along the +Marne.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE COSSACKS;<br />or, A Wild Dash Over the Carpathians.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES IN THE TRENCHES;<br />or, Midst Shot and Shell Along the +Aisne.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES IN GREAT PERIL;<br />or, With the Italian Army in the Alps.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALKAN CAMPAIGN;<br />or, The Struggle to Save a +Nation.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES ON THE SOMME;<br />or, Courage and Bravery Rewarded.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES AT VERDUN;<br />or, Saving France from the Enemy.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE STARS AND STRIPES;<br />or, Leading the American +Troops to the Firing Line.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES WITH HAIG IN FLANDERS;<br />or, The Fighting Canadians of Vimy +Ridge.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES WITH PERSHING IN FRANCE;<br />or, Over the Top at Chateau +Thierry.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE GREAT ADVANCE;<br />or, Driving the Enemy Through +France and Belgium.</p> + +<p>THE BOY ALLIES WITH MARSHAL FOCH;<br />or, The Closing Days of the Great +World War.</p> +</div></div> + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>The Jack Lorimer Series</h3> + +<h4>BY WINN STANDISH</h4> + +<p class="center">For Boys 12 to 16 Years.</p> + +<p class="center">All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles</p> + +<p class="center">PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH</p> + +<div class="cpoem1"> +<p>CAPTAIN JACK LORIMER;<br />or, The Young Athlete of Millvale High.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>Jack Lorimer is a fine example of the all-around American +high-school boys. His fondness for clean, honest sport of all kinds +will strike a chord of sympathy among athletic youths.</p></div> + +<p>JACK LORIMER'S CHAMPIONS;<br />or, Sports on Land and Lake.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>There is a lively story woven in with the athletic achievements, +which are all right, since the book has been O. K'd. by Chadwick, +the Nestor of American Sporting journalism.</p></div> + +<p>JACK LORIMER'S HOLIDAYS;<br />or, Millvale High in Camp.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>It would be well not to put this book into a boy's hands until the +chores are finished, otherwise they might be neglected.</p></div> + +<p>JACK LORIMER'S SUBSTITUTE;<br />or, The Acting Captain of the Team.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>On the sporting side, this book takes up football, wrestling, and +tobogganing. There is a good deal of fun in this book and plenty of +action.</p></div> + +<p>JACK LORIMER, FRESHMAN;<br />or, From Millvale High to Exmouth.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>Jack and some friends he makes crowd innumerable happenings into an +exciting freshman year at one of the leading Eastern colleges. The +book is typical of the American college boy's life, and there is a +lively story, interwoven with feats on the gridiron, hockey, +basketball and other clean honest sports for which Jack Lorimer +stands.</p></div> +</div></div> + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>Our Young Aeroplane Scout Series</h3> + +<p class="center">(Registered in the United States Patent Office)</p> + +<h4>BY HORACE PORTER</h4> + +<p class="center">For Boys 12 to 16 Years.</p> + +<p class="center">All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles</p> + +<p class="center">PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH</p> + + + +<p class="center">A Series of Remarkable Stories of the Adventures of Two Boy Flyers in +The European War Zone.</p> + +<div class="cpoem2"> +<p>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN FRANCE AND BELGIUM;<br />or, Saving The +Fortunes of the Trouvilles.</p> + +<p>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN GERMANY.</p> + +<p>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN RUSSIA;<br />or, Lost on the Frozen Steppes.</p> + +<p>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN TURKEY;<br />or, Bringing the Light to Yusef.</p> + +<p>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN ENGLAND;<br />or, Twin Stars In the London Sky +Patrol.</p> + +<p>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN ITALY;<br />or, Flying with the War Eagles of +the Alps.</p> + +<p>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS AT VERDUN;<br />or, Driving Armored Meteors Over +Flaming Battle Fronts.</p> + +<p>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN THE BALKANS;<br />or, Wearing the Red Badge of +Courage Among Warring Legions.</p> + +<p>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN THE WAR ZONE;<br />or, Serving Uncle Sam in the +Great Cause of the Allies.</p> + +<p>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS FIGHTING TO THE FINISH;<br />or Striking Hard Over +the Sea for the Stars and Stripes.</p> + +<p>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS AT THE MARNE;<br />or, Hurrying the Huns from +Allied Battle Planes.</p> + +<p>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN AT THE VICTORY;<br />or, Speedy High Flyers +Smashing the Hindenburg Line.</p> +</div></div> + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> + +<h3>The Boy Spies Series</h3> + +<p>These stories are based on important historical events, scenes wherein +boys are prominent characters being selected. They are the romance of +history, vigorously told, with careful fidelity to picturing the home +life, and accurate in every particular.</p> + +<p class="center"><span class="smcap">Handsome Cloth Bindings</span></p> + +<div class="cpoem1"> +<p>THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF NEW ORLEANS</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>A story of the part they took in its defence. By William P. +Chipman.</p></div> + +<p>THE BOY SPIES AT THE DEFENCE OF FORT HENRY.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>A boy's story of Wheeling Creek in 1777. By James Otis.</p></div> + +<p>THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF BUNKER HILL.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>A story of two boys at the siege of Boston. By James Otis.</p></div> + +<p>THE BOY SPIES AT THE SIEGE OF DETROIT.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>A story of two Ohio boys in the War of 1812. By James Otis.</p></div> + +<p>THE BOY SPIES WITH LAFAYETTE.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The story of how two boys joined the Continental Army. By James +Otis.</p></div> + +<p>THE BOY SPIES ON CHESAPEAKE BAY.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The story of two young spies under Commodore Barney. By James Otis.</p></div> + +<p>THE BOY SPIES WITH THE REGULATORS.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The story of how the boys assisted the Carolina Patriots to drive +the British from that State. By James Otis.</p></div> + +<p>THE BOY SPIES WITH THE SWAMP FOX.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The story of General Marion and his young spies. By James Otis.</p></div> + +<p>THE BOY SPIES AT YORKTOWN.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The story of how the spies helped General Lafayette in the Siege of +Yorktown. By James Otis.</p></div> + +<p>THE BOY SPIES OF PHILADELPHIA.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The story of how the young spies helped the Continental Army at +Valley Forge. By James Otis.</p></div> + +<p>THE BOY SPIES OF FORT GRISWOLD.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The story of the part they took in its brave defence. By William P. +Chipman.</p></div> + +<p>THE BOY SPIES OF OLD NEW YORK.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The story of how the young spies prevented the capture of General +Washington. By James Otis.</p></div> +</div></div> + + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>The Navy Boys Series</h3> + +<p>A series of excellent stories of adventure on sea and land, selected +from the works of popular writers; each volume designed for boys' +reading.</p> + +<p class="center"><span class="smcap">Handsome Cloth Bindings</span></p> + + +<div class="cpoem1"> +<p>THE NAVY BOYS IN DEFENCE OF LIBERTY.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>A story of the burning of the British schooner Gaspee in 1772. By +William P. Chipman.</p></div> + +<p>THE NAVY BOYS ON LONG ISLAND SOUND.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>A story of the Whale Boat Navy of 1776. By James Otis.</p></div> + +<p>THE NAVY BOYS AT THE SIEGE OF HAVANA.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>Being the experience of three boys serving under Israel Putnam in +1772. By James Otis.</p></div> + +<p>THE NAVY BOYS WITH GRANT AT VICKSBURG.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>A boy's story of the siege of Vicksburg. By James Otis.</p></div> + +<p>THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE WITH PAUL JONES.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>A boy's story of a cruise with the Great Commodore in 1776. By +James Otis.</p></div> + +<p>THE NAVY BOYS ON LAKE ONTARIO.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The story of two boys and their adventures in the War of 1813. By +James Otis.</p></div> + +<p>THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE ON THE PICKERING.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>A boy's story of privateering in 1780. By James Otis.</p></div> + +<p>THE NAVY BOYS IN NEW YORK BAY.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>A story of three boys who took command of the schooner "The +Laughing Mary," the first vessel of the American Navy. By James +Otis.</p></div> + +<p>THE NAVY BOYS IN THE TRACK OF THE ENEMY.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The story of a remarkable cruise with the Sloop of War "Providence" +and the Frigate "Alfred." By William P. Chipman.</p></div> + +<p>THE NAVY BOYS' DARING CAPTURE.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The story of how the navy boys helped to capture the British Cutter +"Margaretta," in 1775. By William P. Chipman.</p></div> + +<p>THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE TO THE BAHAMAS.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The adventures of two Yankee Middies with the first cruise of an +American Squadron in 1775. By William P. Chipman.</p></div> + +<p>THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE WITH COLUMBUS.</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The adventures of two boys who sailed with the great Admiral in his +discovery of America. By Frederick A. Ober.</p></div> +</div></div> + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>The Girl Comrade's Series</h3> + +<p class="center">ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS.</p> + +<p class="center">ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES.</p> + +<p>A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular +authors. These are charming stones for young girls, well told and full +of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting motives +vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl readers.</p> + +<p class="center">HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING.</p> + +<div class="cpoem1"> +<p>A BACHELOR MAID AND HER BROTHER By I. T. Thurston.</p> + +<p>ALL ABOARD. A Story For Girls. By Fanny E. Newberry.</p> + +<p>ALMOST A GENIUS. A Story For Girls. By Adelaide L. Rouse.</p> + +<p>ANNICE WYNKOOP, Artist. Story of a Country Girl. By Adelaide L. Rouse.</p> + +<p>BUBBLES. A Girl's Story. By Fannie E. Newberry.</p> + +<p>COMRADES. By Fannie E. Newberry.</p> + +<p>DEANE GIRLS, THE. A Home Story. By Adelaide L. Rouse.</p> + +<p>HELEN BEATON. COLLEGE WOMAN. By Adelaide L. Rouse.</p> + +<p>JOYCE'S INVESTMENTS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.</p> + +<p>MELLICENT RAYMOND. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.</p> + +<p>MISS ASHTON'S NEW PUPIL. A School Girl's Story. By Mrs. S. S. Robbins.</p> + +<p>NOT FOR PROFIT. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.</p> + +<p>ODD ONE, THE. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.</p> + +<p>SARA, A PRINCESS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.</p> +</div></div> + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>The Girl Chum's Series</h3> + +<p class="center">ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS.</p> + +<p class="center">ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES.</p> + +<p>A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular +authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and full +of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting motives, +vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl readers.</p> + +<p class="center">HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING.</p> + +<div class="cpoem1"> +<p>BENHURST, CLUB, THE. By Howe Benning.</p> + +<p>BERTHA'S SUMMER BOARDERS. By Linnie S. Harris.</p> + +<p>BILLOW PRAIRIE. A Story of Life in the Great West By Joy Allison.</p> + +<p>DUXBERRY DOINGS. A New England Story. By Caroline B. Le Row.</p> + +<p>FUSSBUDGET'S FOLKS. A Story For Young Girls. By Anna F. Burnham.</p> + +<p>HAPPY DISCIPLINE, A. By Elizabeth Cummings.</p> + +<p>JOLLY TEN, THE; and Their Year of Stories. By Agnes Carr Sage.</p> + +<p>KATIE ROBERTSON. A Girl's Story of Factory Life. By M. E. Winslow.</p> + +<p>LONELY HILL. A Story For Girls. By M. L. Thornton-Wilder.</p> + +<p>MAJORIBANKS. A Girl's Story. By Elvirton Wright</p> + +<p>MISS CHARITY'S HOUSE. By Howe Benning.</p> + +<p>MISS ELLIOT'S GIRLS. A Story For Young Girls. By Mary Spring Corning.</p> + +<p>MISS MALCOLM'S TEN. A Story For Girls. By Margaret E. Winslow.</p> + +<p>ONE GIRL'S WAY OUT. By Howe Benning.</p> + +<p>PEN'S VENTURE. By Elvirton Wright.</p> + +<p>RUTH PRENTICE. A Story For Girls. By Marion Thorne.</p> + +<p>THREE YEARS AT GLENWOOD. A Story of School Life. By M. E. Winslow.</p> +</div></div> + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>The Girl Scouts Series</h3> + +<h4>BY EDITH LAVELL</h4> + +<p>A new copyright series of Girl Scouts stories by an author of wide +experience in Scouts' craft, as Director of Girl Scouts of Philadelphia.</p> + +<p class="center">Clothbound, with Attractive Color Designs.</p> + +<p class="center">PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH.</p> + +<div class="cpoem1"> +<p>THE GIRL SCOUTS AT MISS ALLEN'S SCHOOL</p> + +<p>THE GIRL SCOUTS AT CAMP</p> + +<p>THE GIRL SCOUTS' GOOD TURN</p> + +<p>THE GIRL SCOUTS' CANOE TRIP</p> + +<p>THE GIRL SCOUTS' RIVALS</p> +</div></div> + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>Marjorie Dean College Series</h3> + +<h4>BY PAULINE LESTER.</h4> + +<p class="center">Author of the Famous Marjorie Dean High School Series.</p> + +<p>Those who have read the Marjorie Dean High School Series will be eager +to read this new series, as Marjorie Dean continues to be the heroine in +these stories.</p> + +<p class="center">All Clothbound. Copyright Titles.</p> + +<p class="center">PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH.</p> + +<div class="cpoem1"> +<p>MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE FRESHMAN</p> + +<p>MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE SOPHOMORE</p> + +<p>MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE JUNIOR</p> + +<p>MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE SENIOR</p> +</div></div> + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>Marjorie Dean High School Series</h3> + +<h4>BY PAULINE LESTER</h4> + +<p class="center">Author of the Famous Marjorie Dean College Series</p> + +<p>These are clean, wholesome stories that will be of great interest to all +girls of high school age.</p> + +<p class="center">All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles</p> + +<p class="center">PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH</p> + +<div class="cpoem1"> +<p>MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL FRESHMAN</p> + +<p>MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL SOPHOMORE</p> + +<p>MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL JUNIOR</p> + +<p>MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL SENIOR</p> +</div></div> + + + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>The Camp Fire Girls Series</h3> + +<h4>By HILDEGARD G. FREY</h4> + +<p class="center">A Series of Outdoor Stories for Girls 12 to 16 Years.</p> + +<p class="center">All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles</p> + +<p class="center">PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH</p> + + +<div class="cpoem2"> + +<p>THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS IN THE MAINE WOODS;<br />or, The Winnebagos go Camping.</p> + +<p>THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS AT SCHOOL;<br />or, The Wohelo Weavers.</p> + +<p>THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS AT ONOWAY HOUSE;<br />or, The Magic Garden.</p> + +<p>THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS GO MOTORING;<br />or, Along the Road That Leads the Way.</p> + +<p>THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS' LARKS AND PRANKS;<br />or, The House of the Open Door.</p> + +<p>THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS ON ELLEN'S ISLE;<br />or, The Trail of the Seven Cedars.</p> + +<p>THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS ON THE OPEN ROAD;<br />or, Glorify Work.</p> + +<p>THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS DO THEIR BIT;<br />or, Over the Top with the Winnebagos.</p> + +<p>THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS SOLVE A MYSTERY;<br />or, The Christmas Adventure at +Carver House.</p> + +<p>THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS AT CAMP KEEWAYDIN;<br />or, Down Paddles.</p> +</div></div> + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>The Blue Grass Seminary Girls Series</h3> + +<h4>BY CAROLYN JUDSON BURNETT</h4> + +<p class="center">For Girls 12 to 16 Years</p> + +<p class="center">All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles</p> + +<p class="center">PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH</p> + +<p class="center">Splendid stories of the Adventures of a Group of Charming Girls.</p> + +<div class="cpoem2"> +<p>THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS' VACATION ADVENTURES;<br />or, Shirley Willing +to the Rescue.</p> + +<p>THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS' CHRISTMAS HOLIDAYS;<br />or, A Four Weeks' +Tour with the Glee Club.</p> + +<p>THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS IN THE MOUNTAINS;<br />or, Shirley Willing on a +Mission of Peace.</p> + +<p>THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ON THE WATER; or, Exciting Adventures on a +Summerer's Cruise Through the Panama Canal.</p> +</div></div> + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<h3>The Mildred Series</h3> + +<h4>BY MARTHA FINLEY</h4> + +<p class="center">For Girls 12 to 16 Years.</p> + +<p class="center">All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles</p> + +<p class="center">PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH</p> + +<p class="center">A Companion Series to the famous "Elsie" books by the same author.</p> + +<div class="cpoem"> +<p>MILDRED KEITH</p> + +<p>MILDRED AT ROSELAND</p> + +<p>MILDRED AND ELSIE</p> + +<p>MILDRED'S MARRIED LIFE</p> + +<p>MILDRED AT HOME</p> + +<p>MILDRED'S BOYS AND GIRLS</p> + +<p>MILDRED'S NEW DAUGHTER</p> +</div></div> + +<div class="centerbox bbox"> +<p class="center">For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers</p> + +<p class="center">A. L. BURT COMPANY</p> + +<p class="center">114-120 EAST 23rd STREET NEW YORK</p> +</div> + + +<div class="trans-note"> +<p class="center">Transcriber's note:</p> + +<p class="center">There was no Table of Contents in the original, one has been added in this etext. +</p> + </div> + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Ranger Boys and the Border +Smugglers, by Claude A. Labelle + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RANGER BOYS *** + +***** This file should be named 25514-h.htm or 25514-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/5/5/1/25514/ + +Produced by Barbara Tozier, Bill Tozier and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/25514-h/images/003.jpg b/25514-h/images/003.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..131667a --- /dev/null +++ b/25514-h/images/003.jpg diff --git a/25514-h/images/fig002-300dpi.jpg b/25514-h/images/fig002-300dpi.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..691b31b --- /dev/null +++ b/25514-h/images/fig002-300dpi.jpg diff --git a/25514.txt b/25514.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..50e6b6c --- /dev/null +++ b/25514.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6780 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers, by +Claude A. Labelle + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers + +Author: Claude A. Labelle + +Release Date: May 18, 2008 [EBook #25514] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RANGER BOYS *** + + + + +Produced by Barbara Tozier, Bill Tozier and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + + + +[Illustration: "This fellow has a chamois money belt on, and unless I'm +greatly mistaken, that's where the Jewels are." + +(_The Ranger Boys And the Border Smugglers_) _Page 197_] + + + THE RANGER BOYS + AND + THE BORDER SMUGGLERS + + By CLAUDE A. LABELLE + + AUTHOR OF + + "_The Ranger Boys to the Rescue_," "_The Ranger Boys + Find the Hermit_," "_The Ranger Boys Outwit + the Timber Thieves_," "_The Ranger + Boys and Their Reward_." + + [Illustration] + + A. L. BURT COMPANY + Publishers New York + + + THE + RANGER BOYS SERIES + + A Series of Stories for Boys 12 to 16 Years of Age + + By CLAUDE A. LABELLE + + The Ranger Boys to the Rescue + The Ranger Boys Find the Hermit + The Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers + The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber Thieves + The Ranger Boys and Their Reward + + Copyright, 1922 + By A. L. BURT COMPANY + + THE RANGER BOYS AND THE BORDER SMUGGLERS + + Made in "U. S. A." + + + + +THE RANGER BOYS AND THE BORDER SMUGGLERS. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +OFF FOR NEW FIELDS. + + +"Now I believe you boys understand just what is wanted of you, as I +explained it yesterday afternoon, but just to make sure, I'll go over it +briefly again while you are waiting for your train," said the Customs +Chief to the three Ranger Boys. + +Our three friends were sitting in the office of the chief at the capitol +in Maine, preparatory to bidding him goodbye before starting out for the +Canadian border to try and run down a band of fur smugglers. + +As they sit there, let us describe them and introduce them to those of +our readers who have not read "The Ranger Boys to the Rescue," and "The +Ranger Boys Find the Hermit." + +First is Garfield Boone, known to his chums as Garry. He is the +accepted and chosen leader of the trio on all their expeditions. Garry's +father, known to the backwoodsmen as "Moose" Boone, is a wealthy +lumberman. + +Next is Phil Durant, a dark-haired youth of French descent. He is able +to talk French fluently, but keeps this knowledge under cover, as the +boys once found it useful for him to do. He is the son of a father and +mother who are situated in very moderate circumstances. + +Last, but by no means least, is Dick Wallace, the ward of Garry's +father. Dick is the son of a college professor, who was a chum of Mr. +Boone. He fell from a horse and injured his head when Dick was a +youngster, and then disappeared. Dick's mother had died when he was a +baby, so Mr. Boone took him into his own home to bring up. Dick, by the +way, is rather fat; "plump" he calls himself. + +These three boys form an extraordinary unit of the Maine Ranger service, +that body of men whose duty it is to protect the great forest lands of +the state from the danger of fire. + +These boys were made Rangers through the influence of Mr. Boone, and had +been in the woods about a month, where they had some stirring +adventures, meeting an old hermit who has helped them, and making +enemies of a half-breed guide, Jean LeBlanc, and a rascally ex-deputy +Ranger, Anderson by name, who was supplanted by Nate Webster, a +warm-hearted old Maine guide and a firm friend of the boys. + +Among their adventures was the rescue of little Patty Graham, child of a +rich broker who was camping in the woods, from the half-breed LeBlanc. +As a reward for their brave deed, Mr. Graham presented them with a +specially made wireless telephone outfit, complete with home station and +compact carrying 'phones. + +Now that we know who our heroes are, let us hear what the Customs Chief +has to tell them. + +"As I told you boys yesterday, this is our problem. We know that +somewhere along the border, there is a regular smugglers' lane, where +valuable shipments of seal and other furs have been smuggled into the +United States with consequently a great loss of duty to the customs +house. Now it is impossible for our men to find anything out, and if I +get men from Washington, they don't know anything about the woods, so +there you are. + +"Now I think you boys can go up there, and by acting as campers, or even +in your role of Rangers, you may find out just the things my agents have +been unable to unearth. Ordinarily I wouldn't think of sending boys on +this job, but you three have proven yourselves to be unusually alert +and reliable, also being boys, you may not be regarded as dangerous by +the woods people in that section. + +"You had better go back to Bangor and have a conference with this man +Webster, and get what supplies you need, then strike off across the +state till you come to the border town of Hobart. That, I have reason to +believe, is the base of operations of the smugglers. + +"That I think is all. Before you go out, you will each be given a little +gold customs badge. Secrete this somewhere on your persons and never +show it except as an absolute last resort. Also, you will be given one +or two signals by means of which you may find out whether anyone is in +the service or not. Now good luck go with you." + +The Chief shook hands with the three, and they filed into the outer +office where an assistant gave them their badges and some simple +signals. + +"If you should meet a man who gave his collar a tug at the throat as +though it were too tight, you would think nothing of it, but if he gave +it two little tugs, and then waited while you could count five and gave +it three more little tugs, you would be told he was a customs man. Your +reply would be two tugs, and in order to check up, he would give two +more in answer. That is for meeting in a room, on a train, or in the +street. If you should happen to be in a restaurant, the signal would be +two taps of a cup on a saucer followed by three, or if it is a mug, the +same number of taps against the table. Your answering signal would be +the same. Don't ever do this just because you are inquisitive about a +person. Have some sure grounds for believing that the man you are +signalling is part of the service. Now goodbye and good fortune." + +The boys left the capitol and made their way down the long hill to the +main business part of the town. + +As they struck onto the main business street, Garry noticed the familiar +blue bell sign of the telephone company. + +"Say, boys, I have an idea. Let's stop in here and put in long distance +calls and say hello to our folks. How does the idea strike you?" said +Garry, almost in one breath. + +"Ripping," shouted Phil, while Dick didn't wait to make any remark, but +dived in through the door, and in a trice was putting in his call. Phil +followed suit, while Garry waited, as he would talk when Dick had +finished. + +This pleasant duty done, they went to a restaurant for dinner. Here they +attracted no little attention, for their khaki clothes looked almost +like uniforms. Added to this was the fact that they wore forest +shoepacks, those high laced moccasins with an extra leather sole, and +felt campaign hats. + +Most of those who saw them, however, after an interested look, put them +down as boys about to go on a camping trip, never dreaming that this +same trio had been through more adventures in the previous month or so, +than the average boy, or men, for that matter, has in half a dozen +years. + +Even the boys, hopeful as they were of adventures, did not dream of the +stirring times that lay ahead of them in their quest of the border band +of smugglers. + +The boys thoroughly enjoyed the well-cooked, well-served meal, it being +a welcome change to have someone else do their cooking for them. + +"Eat up, fellows," advised Dick, who was ever ready to eat, "just two or +three more restaurant meals, and then we'll be cooking our own again +over a bed of red embers under the merry greenwood tree." + +Luncheon over, the boys consulted a time-table and found they could get +a train immediately or one quite late in the afternoon for Bangor. + +"What say we take the late one, and go to a movie this afternoon?" +queried Dick. + +The matter was put up to Garry for a decision and as he was the leader +his word always went, though he was never arbitrary and generally talked +things over before making a real decision. + +"I think we ought to take the early train. By doing that, we will get +to Bangor at five o'clock, just the time we would be leaving here, +should we take the later train. Then we can have dinner, see an early +movie, and buy what few things we need and get a good sleep, for we have +a two-day train journey. Doesn't that strike you fellows as the most +logical thing to do?" he concluded. + +Put to them in this light it seemed best, so it was unanimously agreed +to start at once. They proceeded to the station where they had checked +their rifles and knapsacks on leaving the hotel that morning. + +"I must get several things when we get to Bangor," remarked Phil. "You +know LeBlanc and Anderson stripped me of rifle, knife and axe that time +they left me tied to the tree." + +"Yes, you'll have to, also I am going to get a compass, as I lost mine +the time I lost my way in the forest," said Garry. + +"Well, all I've to get when we reach that city," announced Dick, "is +something to eat!" + +The others laughed and poked fun at Dick for his appetite, for his +willingness to eat at any time of the day or night was a source of +constant merriment to the other chums. + +"Some day you will have to go a whole day without food, Dick," remarked +Garry, "and I don't know what will happen to you. I imagine that you'll +just wither up and die before help reaches you." + +"Don't worry, I'll find some way to prevent going a day without a meal," +said Dick emphatically. + +The ride to Bangor was uneventful. As they passed through Waterville, +they saw the great shaded campus of Colby College, deserted for the +summer except for a few students who were pursuing extra courses. + +"By golly, there's a pretty college there. I almost think I'd like to go +there," remarked Dick. + +"Well, according to things as they now stand, we have a couple of years +to think that over," said Garry. + +They reached the city of Bangor, on the wide Penobscot River about five +o'clock. This city is famous for its paper mills and as a center for the +gathering of lumberjacks for the woods work. Bangor is also famous for +its great "Salmon Pool." + +Garry remarked about this: + +"Some first of April we must make plans to come up and try our luck at +salmon." + +"Why April first?" queried Phil. + +"You see the law goes off at that time, and they are the best at that +season. A little while later, during the spawning season, they are again +protected. It is a wonderful sight, by the way, to see the twenty or +twenty-five pound salmon jump up over falls and dams eight and ten feet +in height. The Orono Indians, who used to inhabit this region, used to +stand at the top of the falls and dexterously spear the fish as they +jumped." + +Supper was eaten at the Penobscot Exchange, and then the boys journeyed +down Canal Street to an old store where they intended to get a new rifle +and some other things. They found the old gunsmith was out and would not +be back until about eleven o'clock, so decided to go to the movies, and +return at that hour. + +They enjoyed the motion picture show immensely, particularly because one +of the scenes in the News Weekly showed forest fire fighters combatting +the flames in the Michigan woods. + +After the show they made their way back towards the old gunsmith's shop. +The street was deserted save for a party of roisterers, who passed them, +singing at the top of their voices. They were passing a badly lighted +spot, when, from a ramshackle old three-story house, they heard a shriek +followed by an appeal for mercy. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +THE OLD HOUSE. + + +"Did you hear a scream, Garry?" asked Dick, as he stopped in his tracks. + +"I am sure I did, Dick," answered the leader, "but I was wondering +whether it meant anything. You know this isn't the quietest and most +lamb-like part of the city, it is probably only some carousing +lumberjacks." + +"Let's wait a minute or two and see if we can hear anything more," +suggested Phil. + +They waited a short time, and were about to move on, when the scream was +repeated, and the boys distinctly heard a call for help. + +"All set, boys, let's see what this is all about," cried Dick, who +though fat, and sometimes inclined to take things easily, was not a bit +of a coward. + +"Wait a minute, fellows, let's see what our plan is," said Garry, +hurriedly. "Remember we have no weapons, so every move must be made +carefully. There are three floors. Dick, take the top, Phil you search +the second, I'll take the ground floor. Go through the halls, listen +carefully, and at the first sign of anything, whistle three times and +the others will join whoever gives the whistle. Now, let's go!" + +"One more thing," said Garry; "when you climb the stairs, step on the +end either near the wall or the balustrade, then the steps won't be so +apt to creak." + +They found the front door open and made their way inside. The interior +of the house was in inky blackness. + +"Careful, now," warned Garry. "Whistle at the first sign of trouble, no +matter how slight it is." + +Phil and Dick sprang up the stairs, noiselessly, yet speedily. There was +not a sign of noise, all was as quiet as a cemetery at midnight. + +Left alone, Garry went along the hall, stopping at each door and +listening intently. He was unrewarded until he came to the end door. + +Here he thought he heard a sound of scuffling and squealing. Cautiously +he tried the door, holding a flashlight ready in his hand. As he opened +the door and stepped into the darkness, he saw the gleam of two small +eyes, then heard a frightened scampering across the floor. + +Garry snapped on his flashlight and then gave a relieved laugh. The +noise had been caused by nothing more than a pair of rats, who had been +feasting on the remains of a supper on a rickety old table. + +The broken bits of food, the unwashed dishes, and the empty cans showed +that someone evidently lived in the house, and only recently and +probably surrepticiously as the thick dust that lay everywhere seemed to +indicate that the house had not been regularly occupied for some time. + +Garry saw a door at one side of the kitchen, for that was the room into +which he had penetrated, and carefully opened it. The door led into a +long room, with a half a dozen tables, bare of cloth, and with chairs +stacked on them. + +From the appearance of this room, and judging by the big range in the +kitchen from which he had just come, Garry decided that the house was +used in the winter as a boarding house for lumberjacks. + +He went back to the kitchen and opened the only other door. A cool draft +told him this was the cellar, and he listened intently, then flashing +his light, went down the steps. A few moments' investigation showed him +that there was no living person down there. The air was musty, and the +cellar seemed damp. + +While Garry was examining the lower floor, Phil and Dick had gone up the +stairs. Here, too, all was quiet. Wishing Phil a hasty good luck, Dick +began the ascent of the flight that led to the third floor. + +Left alone, Phil stood stockstill for a few minutes, getting his +bearings. There was a long hall from which led off ten doors, five on +either side. + +Phil decided he could do nothing better than go from door to door, +listening intently at each one, then enter the room and flash his light +about, for each of the boys had provided himself with a heavy batteried +flashlamp. + +He wondered where the screams could have come from, as there wasn't a +sound of anyone stirring on the floor. He could hear Dick's stealthy +footfall above him occasionally. + +He listened at each door intently, and peered at them for a sign of +light creeping through a keyhole or chance crack, but his vigilance went +unrewarded. + +Finally at the very last door he saw a mere speck of light through the +keyhole. He dropped to his knee and glued his eye to the keyhole. By the +flaring light of a couple of candles stuck into bottles, he could make +out the still form of a man on a cot. + +The room was considerably torn up, as though a search for something had +been made. + +Then a man crossed his line of vision and shook up the form on the cot. +The sleeping, or unconscious man, made no move, and the other +disappeared for a moment and then returned, bearing a small pail +containing water which he proceeded to splash vigorously on the face of +the recumbent man. + +Presently this had its desired effect for the form stirred, and in a +voice hardly above a whisper the man began to speak. + +Phil could not distinguish the words, but the other spoke loudly, and +Phil heard him say: + +"Now listen here. You come through with that map, or I'll leave you here +to be carried out feet first!" + +The old man feebly protested and Phil was about to whistle for help when +he saw the assailant rip away the old man's shirt and disclose a cloth +bag. It was the work of a second to tear this open and extract from it a +paper. + +Phil could hear the chuckle of satisfaction and then he gasped, for the +old man rose from his cot and tried to grapple with the younger man, who +gave him a brutal push, throwing him back onto the cot. + +Phil hesitated no longer, and so excited was he that he failed to give +the signal. Throwing open the door, he rushed into the room, and +directing the flashlight directly into the eyes of the man, partially +blinded him. At the same moment he made a grab for the paper, but +succeeded only in getting a part of it, one piece remaining in the hands +of the man. + +The old man lay back on the cot gasping for breath, so could be of no +harm, nor yet of any assistance. The younger man was undersized, hardly +more than a match for Phil, who was an exceptionally strong lad, yet so +great was the evident worth of the paper, that he started for Phil, +slowly and warily. + +Phil was unarmed, but a happy stratagem occurred to him. Hastily +reaching into his pocket, he drew forth a shiny pair of wire cutters, +and pointed them at the culprit, at the same time ordering him to throw +up his hands. + +The momentary gleam of the polished wire cutters was enough to convince +the man that a pistol was being pointed at him, but instead of obeying +the order to hoist his hands, he made a spring for an open window, +jumped over the sill, and a bare second later, Phil heard a dull thud. + +He dashed to the window and flashed his light about, to find that a very +few feet below was an ell roof, and he just caught a glimpse of the +fugitive letting himself over the edge, probably to drop into a yard +below and so make his way to freedom. + +Foiled in his attempt to capture the fellow, Phil turned his attention +to the old man. He shoved the paper, the seeming cause of all the +trouble, into his hands and told him he had nothing more to worry about. + +To his surprise, however, the old man weakly pushed it back to him, +saying in laborious gasps: + +"Take it, boy, it's yours. I'm--going--out--a fortune in----" + +His words trailed into nothingness and he dropped back, ceasing to +breathe. Startled, and a little bit frightened, Phil ran and put a hand +to his heart. There was no vibrating response. + +Stuffing the paper into his jacket pocket, he ran to the door and gave +two low but distinct whistles. Hardly had he given the signal when there +was an unearthly crash and a muttered expression of disgust. + +Phil made for the stairs, and was about to descend when he was joined by +Dick, who whispered sibilantly: + +"Dig out of here; this is no place for us," and seizing Phil by the arm, +started down the stairway. At the bottom they found Garry extricating +himself from a heap of splintered wood and debris. + +"All out in a hurry," commanded Dick. + +Garry and Phil both sensed that there was danger in the air, or, at the +very least, a need for extra care, and followed the lead of Dick in +making a quick exit from the house. + +They hustled down the sidewalk, and noticing an open hallway, unlighted, +Dick led the way in there. + +"Not a whisper, now," he cautioned. + +Hardly had they found shelter in the doorway when three men came +tumbling out of the deserted lodging house they had just left, and ran +past the hallway where the boys were crouching, finally to disappear +around a corner farther up the street. + +"Say, for the love of Pete, Dick, what's all this mystery about, and who +found anything and where did the screams come from?" queried Garry, +amazed at the strange turn events had taken. + +Dick was about to make a reply, when Phil interrupted. + +"All our stories can wait. First we must get the police. I've just left +a dead man, and I have good reason to believe there was foul play." + +"Then let's save our breath and hustle after an officer; we can compare +notes later," said Garry. + +They branched off Canal Street, up through a narrow thoroughfare, more +alley than street, and soon found themselves on a well lighted business +street. Here they moderated their pace, and after a brisk walk of three +blocks, saw a policeman. + +"You're the spokesman in this case, Phil, you know what this is all +about, and we don't," directed Garry. + +Approaching the officer, Phil stated the case. The policeman looked at +them curiously, then appeared to be convinced of their honesty, and +turning to a police box, notified the station, asking that the night +lieutenant come at once. He told his superior where the place was, for +knowing that section of the city, thoroughly, he immediately recognized +it from Phil's description. + +They made their way back, and going up the stairs, went at once to the +room. Here the police officer looked about and then asked a few +perfunctory questions of the boys. + +"I guess you fellows better wait here till the lieutenant comes," he +said finally. + +"Does that mean we are under arrest?" queried Garry. + +"No indeed, just a formality. You see that is what I have to do in all +cases like this, but you can tell your story to the lieutenant." + +They waited a few minutes and then the sound of tramping feet was heard +on the stairs and the lieutenant of the police force entered the room +followed by a man carrying a black bag, evidently a doctor and probably +the coroner. + +The police officer cast a scrutinizing look over the room and then waved +the doctor to make his examination. This took only a few minutes. + +"What do you find Doc?" asked the officer familiarly. + +"This man was stabbed or cut some time ago, probably two or three weeks, +but the cause of his death seems to be heart failure, induced no doubt +by lack of care, improper nourishment, and a severe shock that finished +him off with his organically weak heart." + +"What do you mean, stabbed or cut, accidentally?" asked the officer +gruffly. + +"Not accidentally, but by a blow inflicted by someone," returned the +doctor. + +"What do you chaps know about this?" he asked, turning suddenly on the +three boys. Garry opened his mouth to answer. + +"We----" + +"Wait till I get through talking before you are spoken to. What are you +chaps, runaways, and where did you get those clothes, steal 'em?" + +A dark flush crept up under Garry's ears. + +"Look here officer, you keep a civil tongue in your head, with all due +respect to your rank and authority, and before we answer any questions, +just what is our status now?" he said. + +"If you mean, are you under arrest, you are!" + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +IN THE HANDS OF THE LAW. + + +Arrested! + +Both Dick and Phil started to make a vociferous protest but were quickly +silenced by Garry. + +"All right, officer. But we answer no more of your questions and ask to +be taken immediately to the station and the services of a lawyer +procured for us," said Garry firmly. + +"Huh, pretty smart youngsters, aren't you. Well, let me tell you one +thing, laddy buck. You'll answer any questions I ask of you and answer +them quick. Now who are you and how were you in this room at the time +this man died--or was killed," said the officer in a threatening tone. + +The three boys held their silence, taking their cue from their leader, +Garry. + +"Won't talk, eh, well we'll make you open your mouth in a hurry," and +the officer advanced on the boys. + +Just what steps he would have taken will never be known, for the +physician, who was the city coroner, interposed. + +"That will do, Murphy. You have just told these boys they were under +arrest, and you have failed to give them warning that anything they may +say can be used against them. You are barking up the wrong tree anyway. +These are no runaways nor young desperadoes. My advice is that you let +them go immediately, or else take them to the station and let the chief +talk to them. He was still there when we left the house. And, boys, I'll +see that you get a lawyer as soon as you get there unless the captain +shows more sense than the lieutenant has." + +The lieutenant glowered at the coroner. Evidently there was bad blood +between them, but he realized that he had overstepped his authority, and +was in the wrong, so he ordered everyone present to repair to the +station. + +The walk to the headquarters of the city police consumed only a few +minutes, and soon the boys were standing in the office of the Chief. + +"What's all this, Lieutenant Murphy?" he asked. + +"There's been foul play of some sort down in that old shack that's used +in the wintertime for a lumberjack boarding house. These three boys were +there at the time the man died and don't seem to be able to give a +satisfactory account of themselves. They have been put under arrest," +answered the officer sulkily. + +"Well, boys, what have you to say to this," asked the Chief as he swung +around on his chair and surveyed the three. + +By this time Garry was boiling mad. + +"I first want to ask that we get a lawyer. I don't propose to have a +continuation of the bullying that the lieutenant started down at the old +shack continued, nor do I propose to let my companions be questioned +without competent advice," he said respectfully but decidedly. + +The Chief's face darkened. + +"Have you been up to your old tricks again, Murphy?" + +"I've just been doing my duty," said Murphy sullenly. + +"I am afraid you exaggerate your duty at times, then, lieutenant. Now, +boys, what have you to say? This is only an informal questioning and you +are under no obligations to answer. I think, however, that there has +been nothing more here than the stirring up of a mare's nest, and I +think the best thing to do is to come out and say what you have to say. +If there is nothing against you, then that is your best course." + +Garry recognized that the Chief was a fair man, and decided to tell +their story. + +"We are Forest Rangers, sir, just going to a new post of duty. We were +down on that street in search of a gunsmith's shop to procure a new +rifle to replace one that one of my companions lost. We heard screams +coming from the old house and ran to see if we could be of assistance. +One of the boys found the old man who is now dead being attacked by a +younger man. He was driven out, making his escape by a window and over +the roof of the ell. Then we went and summoned the policeman from his +beat, and now here we are." + +"How does it happen you do all the talking?" asked the Chief. + +"Why, the boys have seen fit to make me the leader and spokesman at all +times. We have always done that." + +"You seem to tell a straight enough story in some ways," said the Chief. +"But I have seen a good many Forest Ranger service men go through this +town, and I never saw boys doing that work before. As far as the death +of the old man is concerned, I see nothing to hold you on, as I +understand that he died and was not killed while you were there. I am +inclined to think you are stretching things a bit, however, when you +claim to be Rangers. You are sure you boys aren't making tracks for the +Big Woods in search of supposed adventure, are you?" + +"That is the second time tonight that we have been accused of that, and +it is getting a bit tiresome. I think we can satisfy you very quickly, +however. There are probably men in town who know my father, who is part +owner of the pulp mills up the river. The best way, however, is to get +the Chief Ranger, Mr. Ardmore, on the long distance 'phone. Till then I +think we won't say anything more." + +The Chief looked at them quizically for a moment. He was still inclined +to be suspicious, but the mention of Garry's father made him think that +perhaps he was on the wrong track. He pulled an extension 'phone to him, +and called the long distance operator. + +"This is the Chief of Police talking," he said. "I want you to get the +Chief Forest Ranger, Mr. Ardmore, at Augusta. You can get his home +telephone number from the night operator at the State House. This is an +emergency, so rush it through," and he replaced the receiver on the +hook. + +"That will do for now, Murphy, and Coroner, I suppose you want to make +out your report. You will find a desk not in use in the next room. In +the meantime, you boys make yourselves comfortable for a few minutes, I +don't expect that the call will be more than five minutes in going +through," and the Chief began to busy himself with some papers around +his desk. + +The boys withdrew to a corner of the room, and found chairs. + +The minutes seemed to drag horribly. None of the boys was exactly +worried, except for the fact that they were losing precious time. They +wanted to go back to Canal Street and buy the rifle and such other +things as they might need. If they were held for some sort of a hearing +in the morning, it would delay them considerably as their train left +early, and there was no other until late in the afternoon, meaning they +would lose almost a day on their journey. + +After a few minutes of silence, Dick cautiously whispered to Garry, "How +about showing him our customs papers and badges?" + +"Only as a last resort," answered Garry in a low tone. + +They looked up when they saw the Chief reaching for the telephone. + +"How about that Augusta call?" + +He listened a moment, then hung up the receiver and turned to the boys. + +"Operator says she is still working on it, that they cannot find him +now, but are trying places where he might be. Still of the opinion you +want me to talk to him?" + +"Positively," answered Garry. + +The Chief resumed his newspaper, and the boys fidgeted a minute until +Garry bethought himself of the pocket checkerboard they generally +carried. He fished it out and suggested they play to while away the +time. Dick elected to play first with Garry, and let Phil take on the +winner. + +Seeing them at their game, the Chief walked over and stood watching. +Garry had just succeeded in getting a king after an unusually clever +play, and the Chief, who was quite a player himself, was applauding +softly when the 'phone bell rang. + +"Guess there's our call now," he remarked, as he hurried back to his +desk. + +Sure enough it was the call, and in a moment the Chief was talking with +Mr. Ardmore. + +"Listen, Mr. Ardmore, this is the Chief of Police of Bangor. I have +three boys here who were picked up after finding a dead man in a room +here. There is nothing against them on that score, but they claim to be +Forest Rangers, and I say they are too young, so to settle the matter I +am calling you. They give their names as Boone, Wallace and Durant," and +here the Chief described them. "They're all right, you say?" queried the +Chief, in a slightly surprised tone. "All right, guess I was wrong then. +All right, here's one right here." Then he turned to Garry and said: + +"He wants to talk to you." + +Garry exchanged greetings with the Chief Ranger and heard him say: + +"Can't you three take a step without running smack into something +exciting? I declare, you fellows see more and do more than men who have +ranged the woods for these past ten years. Keep it up, and keep out of +trouble. Write me all about this, not an official report, only a +personal letter, to satisfy my own curiosity. Best of luck to the +others. Goodbye. I had to leave the theatre to answer this call, and I +am anxious to get back to my seat." + +Garry hung up the receiver, and then turned and asked the Chief if he +was satisfied. + +"Indeed I am, and I wish you boys all the luck in the world in your new +station," said the Chief. The three boys then took their leave. They +returned immediately to Canal Street to see if they were still in time +to buy a rifle for Phil from the old gunsmith. + +They arrived at the shop just in time to find him locking the door. He +recognized them immediately, and had no hesitancy in opening up his +store again. Phil soon found a rifle to his liking, and Garry replaced +the compass that he had dropped when he was lost in the woods; +ammunition was also procured, and then Garry purchased a small automatic +revolver, deciding that this would be a wise project in view of the kind +of work that they might be called upon to do in running down the band +of smugglers. + +"Now," said Garry, "I wonder if there is anything more that we will +need?" + +"Yes," said Dick, "I think we should procure new, heavy pocket knives. I +have broken the big blade of mine, and you remember that Phil's was +taken away from him by LeBlanc and Anderson that time that they left him +tied to the tree in the forest." + +"That is a wise suggestion," remarked Garry, as he turned to the old man +and asked to see something in combination knives. + +"Here is something that I frequently sell, both to campers and +woodsmen," said the old gunsmith. "You see it has one heavy blade, +suitable for skinning a small animal, and in addition has a heavy +canopener." + +The knives met all requirements, so each boy procured one. The last +thing bought was an ample supply of batteries for their flashlights. + +"There," said Garry, "I think that completes everything we have to buy +except a supply of food. We can get that in the morning, and I have some +ideas of what we should buy. Of course, this time we won't have to +supply ourselves with enough food for a month, as we will probably make +the town of Hobart our base of supplies. However, my idea is to get a +very small compact bundle of concentrated foods, such as bar chocolate +and highly concentrated soup. This, with a small portion of tea and +coffee, can be packed into a very small bundle, and yet were one lost in +the woods, he would find that such a supply would last him more than a +week." + +Bidding the old gunsmith goodnight, they returned to the hotel, meeting +Lieut. Murphy on the way. "Sure boys, I hope you will forget everything +that has happened this evening. It was only last week that I picked up +three boys who were going up into the woods to shoot Indians, and I +didn't know but that you might be tarred with the same brush." + +"Don't let that bother you at all, Lieutenant. I suppose you have to do +your duty just as you see it, so we will forget about it, and say +goodnight." + +They reached the Penobscot Exchange, and getting their key from the +clerk, went directly to their room. As Garry popped open the door, he +uttered a shout of surprise, for there, making himself comfortable in an +easy chair, sat Nate Webster. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +THE TORN MAP. + + +"Well," said Nate, "it seems to me you fellows keep rather late hours. I +have been waiting for you upwards of two hours. Where have you been +keeping yourself? I calculate likely as not you fellows have been to a +theatre." + +"Half of your guess is correct," said Garry, with a laugh, "but since +leaving the show, we have had a wild time. First place, we found a dead +man, and second place, we got arrested." + +"'Sho' now, you don't say so. What have you fellows been doing that got +you in the grip of the law?" + +"Why, as to that, Nate, I can hardly say myself," said Garry. "Things +came so thick and fast, that I haven't yet found out what it was all +about, so I think now would be as good a time as any for each one of us +to tell his story, and just for the sake of having things in order, and +because I have so little to tell, I will take the first turn. When we +went into the old abandoned boarding house, for such as I discovered it +to be, I searched the entire lower floor and the cellar, and finding +nothing, was about to make my way up the stairs, when I leaned too heavy +against the balustrade, and in another moment I found myself crashing to +the floor below. Next thing I knew, Dick and Phil here came tumbling out +after me, and in another few moments, we found ourselves arrested and +taken to the police station; now that lets me out. Now Dick, your story +is the next shortest, and I don't suppose that anything happened to you +that was any more exciting than my search." + +"Don't you fool yourself on that score," said Dick, "because I think I +have some very startling news. There has been so much excitement in the +last hour or two that I have given little or no thought to it. I went, +as you know, to the top floor, and there hearing nothing or seeing no +light, I simply crept from door to door, peeking through the keyhole, +and then listening closely to see if I could hear anything stirring +within. Search of several doors revealed nothing, until I came to one +back of which I believed was several men, as I seemed to hear a low +murmur of voices. The keyhole was plugged up, so I got down on my knees; +I could see no light coming out from beneath the door. I was certain +someone was in the room, so very cautiously I turned the handle, but +the door refused to budge an inch. However, there was one way to find +out. In getting out my knife, I drilled a small hole through the door, +using the point of the knife. I had no sooner finished this, when a +small gleam of light came through the door, showing that I had not been +wrong in my conclusions. Without making any noise, I enlarged the hole, +so that I could get a clearer view of the room. There were three men +sitting about a table, playing cards. It was certain that the screams +did not come from this room, and I was about to knock on the door, when +suddenly I recognized the men. You remember the week before we went into +the big woods, and the adventure we had when we caught the three tramps +in our shack by the river? Well, right there, sitting at that table, +were the identical three men for whom we received the reward!" + +"You must be mistaken Dick," remarked Garry. "Those three were dangerous +men, but I don't believe they could have escaped from the jail in +Portland." + +"Nevertheless," said Dick, "I am absolutely certain that those are the +three. There are any number of ways in which they might have gotten +away. There is even a chance that they have been tried by this time, and +have been released." + +"That seems hardly possible," interrupted Phil. "The authorities were +sure they had the right men or they would never have given us the +reward." + +The entire matter was very puzzling to the boys, when Nate, who was +always on the job, broke in with a suggestion. "Why don't you fellows +telephone down to 'Moose Boone' and ask him if the tramps got away." + +"I don't think he would know anything about it," said Garry, "for I was +talking with him on the 'phone, when we were in Augusta, and he didn't +make any mention of it." + +Then Dick came to bat with a suggestion. "Why don't we telephone to Sam +Preston, the newspaper man, surely he would know if anybody would." The +call was immediately put in, and while they were waiting for an answer, +they made use of the opportunity, and asked Nate how it was he happened +to be there. "Why, I simply got a long distance call from the Chief +Ranger, asking me to meet you boys here, to give you whatever +suggestions I could as to the place you are going, and also to see if I +could remember the names of two or three of my friends in that part of +the country who might be of some help when you need it." + +"Why, of course, Garry," remarked Dick, "you remember the Chief of +Customs telling us he would arrange to have Nate meet us here? However, +perhaps we had better defer getting any advice from Nate until Phil has +told his story." + +That moment the telephone rang, and on answering it, Garry found that +the person on the other end of the wire was Sam Preston. After chatting +a moment with Sam, he asked if there was any news of the three burglars +whom they had caught early in the summer. There was silence for several +moments in the room, while Sam talked, and then with a goodbye, Garry +replaced the receiver on the hook, and turned around to face his +companions. + +"Well, Dick, you sure hit the matter about right. The three burglars +were brought up for a hearing, and were allowed to go free on bail, +pending their trial. They took advantage of the opportunity to +disappear. Now the authorities of Portland are searching high and low +for them." + +"Yes," said Dick, "the reason I hurried out of the house there, bringing +you fellows with me, was because I saw one of them starting toward the +door, and believe me, I knew more than to stack up against three of them +all alone. We have made enough enemies in the past few weeks without +getting others on our trail. + +"That is something we can discuss later. I suggest now that Phil tell us +what happened on the second floor, as he seems to be the one that had +the real adventure of the night." Phil told his story, and in the +speaking of it, recollected the torn piece of paper that the old man +with his dying words had given him. He pulled it from his pocket, and +the three boys, as well as Nate, spread it out on the table and began to +examine it. It seemed to be a rough, crudely drawn map with a dotted +line, running from the spot marked by a figure 1, with a circle drawn +around it. The dotted line, however, unfortunately ran direct to the +part that had been torn off when Phil seized the paper from the old +man's assailant. On the reverse of the paper, written in a laborious and +cramped hand, was the following inscription: "The lost mine lies 100 +paces from the spot marked 2. The land mark noted on the map as figure +1, is a ravine, exactly two miles east of the Shohela River, at the +point where it makes a sharp turn above the town of Jennings. Start at +the mouth of that ravine and travel directly north for about two miles +and one-half, until you come to----" + +Here the boys found that the missing part of the note corresponded to +the portion which had been torn off during the struggle. + +"Well," said Nate, "the pesky map doesn't mean to do you much good now, +does it? I know of the place mentioned in that note, but I have never +been there, so I can't tell you much about what the old something or +other might be. Without wanting to throw any cold water upon your +plans, I should say to forget about the whole business. I know the Maine +woods pretty well, and I never heard tell of any mines which have been +found in this part of the country, except, maybe, limestone mines, and +surely nobody would have a secret map as to where a limestone mine would +be, so I think you had better just tuck that piece of paper away and +forget all about it." + +The boys, however, with romantic ideas of finding a lost gold mine +hidden away somewhere in the wilds of the Maine woods, refused to be +discouraged by Nate's pessimistic remarks, and each one decided, that at +the first opportunity, they would visit the scene told of in the map, +and see if possible they could not discover the secret of the lost mine. + +"Now boys," said Nate, "we might as well get over the main business of +the evening, that being to tell you about what I know about Hobart. It +has been a good many years since I was in that part of the woods, but I +remember it as well as though I had been there only yesterday. Hobart is +a small town, nowhere near the size of Millinocket. About ten years ago +it was the center of industrial lumbering operations. As a matter of +fact, Garry, I believe that your father was interested in the timber +cutting of that place at that time. It is only four or five miles away +from the Canadian border, and about fifty miles to the south the States +of Maine and New Hampshire and the Dominion of Canada are joined +together. It is right about that point, also, that is, where the three +territories come together, that the National Forest Preserve begins; +that you know, without my telling you, is the movement recently started +by the Government for conservation of the timber lands of the State. +Eventually, every bit of forest land in the State will be under the +control of the government. That means that timber cruisers, appointed by +the government, will go on everybody's land, marking the trees that may +properly be cut. This will prevent ruthless timber owners from clean +cutting great tracts of land, and there will be a perpetual source of +new timber." + +"As for the town of Hobart itself, I have been trying to think ever +since I heard from Augusta of some people that I knew there, but can't +seem to remember a single one. However, as soon as I get back home, I +will inquire from Silas Peabody and some of the other guides if they +remember any people in that section, and I can write you in care of the +postmaster at Hobart. However, I will warn you of this, that as I +remember it, it was a mighty tough town,--border towns nearly always +are,--for you get a good deal of the rougher element of both countries. +That doesn't mean, of course, that you won't find a few mighty nice +people up there, although I don't suppose your work will allow you to +make many friends. I am sorry that I can't tell you more about the +country, but I don't doubt that you will be able to take care of +yourselves as well there as you have in your first station. The only +thing I do hope is that you have seen the end of LeBlanc and his +friend." + +The hour by this time had grown late, so the boys all hopped into bed. +Nate retired to his own room, promising to arouse them at an early hour, +so that they might get a good start for their new station. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +PHIL GETS A CLUE. + + +True to his word, old Nate woke the boys up almost with the dawn. +Hurrying into their clothes, they went into the dining-room, where a +sleepy waitress took their orders for a substantial breakfast. They +chatted merrily with Nate during the meal, and then bade him goodbye, as +his train went an hour earlier than theirs. Nothing remained for them to +do in Bangor except to buy the provisions that Garry had spoken of the +previous night. They found what they sought at a large grocery store +which, on account of the early hour, had barely opened its doors for +business. + +"There," said Garry, "that completes our work in Bangor. We might as +well take a last look at the town, because it is probable that we won't +come back here for some time." + +They proceeded to the station and found that their train was being made +up at that moment. + +"I suggest that we take seats in the smoker," remarked Garry, "for +although none of us smoke, we might make some acquaintance there as we +did with Nate when we first went into the big woods." + +This suggestion met with hearty approval from the boys, and being the +first on the train, they were able to pick a double seat, and found +plenty of room in which to stow away their knapsacks and rifles. The +train slowly filled up with a motley assemblage. There were several men +in the usual garb of the forests, as well as a number of farmers. Two or +three well dressed men looked as though they might be traveling +salesmen. Half a dozen card games were soon started, and the boys found +plenty to watch and thus occupy their time. Directly in back of Phil sat +two men clad in rough corduroys and high boots. Both of the men were +talking confidentially in the French language. Phil, as our readers +know, was as conversant with French as he was with English, and for a +time paid no attention to the remarks of the pair in back of him. Garry +and Dick, in the meantime, were chatting away like a couple of magpies. + +Suddenly Phil pricked up his ears and after a moment signalled his two +chums to keep silent. + +Garry immediately had a hunch that Phil was hearing something that might +prove to be of advantage to them later on, so in order that their +silence might not be noticed, fished out the pocket checkerboard, and +soon he and Dick were immersed in the intricacies of the game, leaving +Phil free to devote his entire attention to the conversation that was +taking place in back of him. + +After nearly a half of an hour, Phil lifted his head, and catching the +eye of Garry, made it known to him that he wanted him to follow him out. +Getting up and stretching, Phil nonchalantly made his way into another +car, followed shortly by both Garry and Dick. Finding seats in the far +end of the car, where their conversation could not be overheard, Garry +eagerly inquired what Phil had heard. + +"I want both of you boys," remarked Phil, "to pay special attention to +those two men who were sitting in back of me, and impress their +appearance upon your memories, as I believe they are the first clue to +our mission at Hobart. Unfortunately, they do not talk very much about +their plans, but from what I gather, they are on their way there to +purchase furs, and they made special remarks about the good bargains +they could drive, hinting at the fact that the furs were smuggled in +across the border. Of course, it is hardly probable that they belong to +the smugglers' gang, although, if we keep close tabs on them, it seems +to me that they will eventually lead us to the headquarters of the +border smugglers." + +"Don't you think you should have stayed there?" inquired Garry. + +"No, it was safe enough to leave," answered Phil, "because they had +begun to talk on entirely different topics, one remarking to the other +that they had better stop further talk of the furs, for fear they might +be overheard by someone. Fortunately for us, they have no idea that they +have already been overheard." + +"There is one thing we ought to consider," said Garry. "In the event +that they get off the train before we do, it seems to me that one of us +should get off at that same time and follow them. Whoever it is can +leave his knapsack and rifle behind, and the remaining two will take +care of them. In the event of such a thing, boys, I would recommend that +Phil be the one to get off the train, as he is the only one of us whose +knowledge of French is great enough to allow him to understand what a +native Frenchman is saying." + +This plan being decided upon, the boys made their way back to the +smoker. The two men had left their seats, and for a moment the boys were +worried, then remembered that no stop had been made during the time +which they had left the smoking car. A hasty search soon revealed the +fact that the men had joined in a card game at the far end of the car. +Knowing that the men would not talk business while in the game, the +boys did not bother to try and find some way of overhearing their +conversation. + +The boys, in guarded tones, so that they might not be overheard by +anyone in an adjoining seat, talked over the importance of the clue, +that they had so fortunately stumbled upon. + +"It strikes me that this is our lucky morning," remarked Garry. "Here we +might have been days and days before we ever found the slightest bit of +evidence on which to base our search for the band of smugglers, but in +less than an hour after the starting of our mission, we stumble upon +this very important bit of help." + +As Garry talked, he kept glancing out of the corner of his eye at a +tall, rangy individual, who since the boys had entered the car, had kept +constant watch on them. + +"Don't look up now," he whispered to his companions, "but a few minutes +later casually glance across the aisle two seats up from where we are +sitting, and look at that tall chap who is sitting there reading a +newspaper. Ever since we got on board the train he has been watching us +over the top of the paper. I wonder if there isn't some way in which we +could get into conversation with him, and see who he is." + +The words were hardly out of Garry's mouth, and before his chums had +had a chance to survey the stranger, the object of their conversation +threw down his newspaper and getting up sauntered over to where the trio +was sitting. The boys looked up and gazed inquiringly at the newcomer, +who seemed not a whit abashed at their scrutiny. + +"Going on a camping trip?" he inquired with a pleasant smile. + +"Why yes, we are," said Garry quickly, before either of the others could +make a reply. "Are you also?" for Garry had noticed that a cased rifle +and blanket roll were stowed under the stranger's seat. + +"Why yes and no," answered the stranger. "I am going partly on business +and partly on pleasure. Mind if I sit in with you a few minutes" + +"Why, no indeed," said Garry cordially, as he moved over and made room +for the tall stranger. "I suppose we might as well make ourselves +acquainted, so I will start in by introducing myself. My name is Garry +Boone, and these are my two chums, Dick Wallace and Phil Durant." + +"My name is Fernald, Arthur Fernald, having no particular home, nor any +particular business. Where are you boys bound for?" + +"Why," said Garry, after a moment's hesitation, "we're bound for the +border, but just where we will make our headquarters we do not know as +yet, probably just whatever the fancy seizes us." + +"Expect to get any hunting?" inquired the stranger. "Some mighty fine +specimens of moose and caribou are to be found in that locality." + +This remark made Garry suspicious, and he immediately shot this question +at the stranger. "Don't you know that the law is on moose and caribou, +and that there won't be an open season for at least five more years?" + +"Yes," said the stranger, laconically. "I just wanted to see whether you +boys knew that." + +Garry was inclined to be angry at the man's answer, but as Fernald made +the remark with a smile, Garry felt that they could not take offence at +him. + +Dick broke into the conversation with a query as to whether the stranger +knew anything about the town of Hobart. Too late, Garry gave him a +warning kick, but the danger was done. Fernald looked intently at Dick, +and then at the other two. + +"Why, yes," he remarked, "I know considerable about the town. It is only +two or three weeks since I have been there. Anything in particular that +you want to know about it?" + +"Not especially," answered Dick, who was on guard now that Garry had +warned him. "We just happened to hear a friend of ours, a guide named +Webster, saying that it was not very far above the National Forest +Reserve." + +"You aren't, by any chance, speaking of Nate Webster of Millinocket are +you?" he inquired with a smile. + +Here Garry broke in the conversation. + +"Do you know Webster?" + +"I should say I do," said Fernald. "I have known him for a good many +years. It may surprise you to know and hear," he turned to Garry, "that +I know your father, 'Moose' Boone." + +This, for a moment, seemed to free the man of suspicion, although, as +Garry told himself, the man had not said or done anything to warrant +their being suspicious of him. Garry was simply following the wise rule +not to tell any more about yourself than the other person does to you. + +They chatted for some time about many things concerning the woods, and +while the boys were careful not to mention anything that would give the +man who called himself Fernald any inkling as to their mission, they +could not help notice but that he was trying very hard to pump them as +to their reason for going to the particular part of Maine for which they +were bound. By this time, it was nearly noon and Fernald volunteered the +information that there was a restaurant in the station of a little town +where they would make their next stop, and at which the train would stop +long enough to allow them to get their lunch. Just before the train drew +into the station, Fernald remarked in a bantering tone, "I suppose you +fellows know there is considerable smuggling going on all the time, +across the International line." + +Garry looked up quickly, and met the stranger's quizzical glance +squarely. "Why, I suppose I have heard about as much of it as the +average citizen of Maine has. Why do you ask that question? Do you know +anything special about it?" + +"No," answered the stranger, "I was just merely asking for the sake of +asking a question. Well, so long boys, I may see you at luncheon, just +now I want to finish an article I was reading in a newspaper about the +low price that furs are bringing this summer." + +With that as a parting shot, he returned to his seat, leaving the three +boys wondering just who he might be. + +"I am very suspicious about this man Fernald," Garry told his two +companions. "He seems very anxious to know all about our business, and +his two hints about smuggling and the low price of furs lead me to +believe that he was trying to pump us. Do you fellows think the same, or +am I unduly suspicious?" + +Phil, who was naturally a solid-headed boy, thought for a moment, and +then agreed that there was something mighty peculiar about the actions +of their new acquaintance, while Dick claimed that he had been +suspicious of him from the moment that he had first come over to their +seat. + +By this time the train drew into the station, and the boys hastened out +of the train and into the restaurant, where they were soon eating a +hearty meal. They were joined by Fernald, who took the vacant seat +opposite Garry. Fernald ordered a cup of coffee to be brought to him +immediately, and suddenly, to the amazement of the boys, he looked +straight at Garry, and gave his cup two sharp raps against the edge of +the saucer. He waited a moment, and followed this by three taps. Garry +waited for an instant, and then deciding to find out whether or not the +tapping was accidental, gave the same signal. The man called Fernald +smiled, and gave two soft taps of the cup before he replaced it on the +saucer. The man of whom they had been so suspicious during the last +hour, was unmistakably a customs officer! + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +THE NEW STATION. + + +"Listen, boys, not a word. Wait till we get back on the train, where the +rumbling of the wheels over the rails will help to cover our words. Even +if we could talk without danger of being overheard, we would not have +time, for this train stops barely long enough to allow one to eat." + +The boys made haste to finish the meal. They had not recovered from +their surprise at finding the stranger was a customs agent even by the +time they were through eating and were back in their seats in the +smoking car. + +"I don't suppose you boys have even started to formulate a plan of +campaign, have you?" asked Fernald. + +"Not yet, sir," replied Garry. "That is, we haven't made up our minds +how to proceed after we have arrived at our headquarters. However, we +have stumbled, or rather Phil has, on what we consider to be a very +important clue, if such it may be called." + +Garry's eyes swept the car, and in a moment he had located the two fur +dealers, who had spoken of the cheap furs to be bought near the border. + +"Do you see the two men who are in the fourth seat from the front of the +car, facing us and playing cards?" he asked. + +Casually, and without attracting any notice, Fernald studied the faces +of the two men. At last, their features having been stamped on his +memory, he turned to Garry, saying: + +"Well, I'll know them if I ever see them again, but what of them?" + +Hastily Garry related the instance of their conversing together in +French, and their remark about the furs. + +"We have planned that if they get off, Phil here will follow them, so +that we won't lose track of them altogether. We are in hopes that they +will eventually lead us to the fountain head of what we are seeking," he +concluded. + +"That would have been the wise thing to do in case you were alone," +Fernald told them. + +"But my being here with you changes the complexion of the matter +somewhat. I think if they get off, it would be best for me to follow +them. That is best for two reasons. Seeing the three of you together, +would give rise to suspicions were one of you to detach himself suddenly +from the rest and try to take up the trail of these men in their own +town, for that is what it would be should they get off. Then there is +another matter to be taken into consideration. Once let the smuggler +band be caught, and only half of the job is done; the rest lies in +finding the receiving point of these furs so that they may be seized, or +the receivers be made to pay duty that they have evaded. Of course +whoever is buying these furs knows they are shipped across the border as +contraband. I shouldn't be a bit surprised if these men could lead me +direct to something that would show where immense quantities of fur have +gone in the past six months." + +"I wonder where they are going to get off," remarked Garry. + +"That is an extremely simple matter to ascertain. Why not look at the +conductor's checks that are sticking out of their hatbands?" queried +Fernald with a smile. + +"Solid ivory," said Garry disgustedly, as he rapped his forehead sharply +with his knuckles. + +"Nothing to be ashamed of at all, old fellow," said Fernald easily. "It +isn't to be expected that you should know all the tricks of the trade +that you have known about not much more than a day. I've been doing this +sort of work for twenty years now, and naturally many little bits of +knowledge such as that are second nature to me, as natural as breathing +or sleeping. Wait a minute while I go up and investigate." + +Fernald got up, and acting as though his main idea was just to stretch +his legs, strolled up to the front of the car. Passing the men, he +stopped quite naturally to watch them play. When one of the men under +observance took a trick with an exceptionally good play, he commented +audibly on it. The man turned and smiled, showing his seat check as he +did. + +The system on the railroad was to give different colors for different +stations. Fernald noticed that the checks of both men were of an +identical color, and had the same number of holes punched in them. + +After carelessly watching a moment or two longer, he returned and +without stopping to speak to the boys, went past them and into the next +car. + +Here he engaged a brakeman in conversation, and at last returned to the +boys, who were on tenterhooks to learn of his findings. + +"I have found out that they are going to get off at the third station +from here. However, we do not come to that for nearly two hours, so we +have time enough to make any plans we need. I will follow them, and as +soon as possible will come on to Hobart. However, when I get there, do +not let on you know me, as we can be of infinitely more help to each +other if it is not known that we are working together or even know each +other. Whenever the need arises, I will find some way to communicate +with you." + +For the next hour or so, the conversation switched from one topic to +another. Fernald was an interesting talker, and told the boys one or two +of his adventures in the custom work of the United States. + +Suddenly Dick slapped his leg and exclaimed excitedly: + +"By George, our old friend the Hermit has no idea where we have +disappeared to. I wish that we had had a chance at least to say goodbye +to him and explain that we have been sent to a new station." + +"Why not write him a note?" suggested Garry. "You can enclose it in one +to Nate, asking him to deliver it the next time he goes into the woods +to make an inspection trip. Mr. Fernald here will mail it for you when +he gets off the train." + +"That's a bully idea, Garry. Didn't have brains enough to think of it +myself," chattered Dick. + +"Never mind, old timer. Two heads are better than one you know, as the +barrel said," laughed Garry. + +Diving into his pocket, Dick drew forth the substantial notebook he +always carried, and was soon busy writing a note, doing it as well as +the jogging motion of the train would allow. + +Finally he finished the note to the Hermit, and hastily scribbling one +to Nate, enclosed the two in an envelope, addressed to the Deputy Ranger +in Millinocket. + +"There," he said, as he sealed the flap of the envelope. "Seems funny to +be writing a note to the Hermit, doesn't it. The shoe generally used to +be on the other foot when we were on the Patrol. By the way, there's one +thing that's been puzzling me for some little time. What led you to +think we were in any way connected with the same branch of work that you +are, Mr. Fernald?" + +"Oh, I'm no mind reader, or Sherlock Holmes," said Fernald with a hearty +laugh. "It simply happens that I saw you in the Chief's office at +Augusta, when I was there getting some final instructions. The Chief was +going to introduce me, but I told him I preferred getting acquainted in +my own way. To tell you the truth, at that time I thought the Chief had +gone crazy, sending boys, but after looking you over, and unsuccessfully +trying to pump you, I decided you boys had the right stuff in you, so +made myself acquainted. Then too, I had a quiet bit of fun with you. Own +up, now. Didn't you make up your minds that I was a suspicious +character, especially after I had tried to get out of you what your +business was?" + +The boys looked sheepishly at each other, and then began to laugh. + +"We must admit it, Mr. Fernald. We had you all ticketed as a person to +keep a sharp eye on, until you gave the signal," confessed Garry. + +"That's right, boys, one cannot be too careful. When you are on a +mission of this kind, a mighty safe rule to follow is never to trust a +person until he has unmistakably proven himself to be absolutely +trustworthy. If you follow that rule, you'll never go wrong. Once in a +while, of course, you'll find yourself in a position where you must use +your own judgment. In that case, make sure you are dealing with a good +patriotic American citizen, and you'll hit the key pretty nearly every +time. Guess that little lecture will conclude our conversation for a +while. We will be at the station where our friends disembark in a few +minutes now, and I want to beat them to the door, so they will have no +idea I am interested in their movements." + +He got up and shook hands with the trio, and then in a loud tone, for +the benefit of anyone that might be listening: + +"Goodbye Boys, have a good camping trip and don't get lost in the Big +Timber." + +The boys echoed their goodbyes, and their new friend made his way to +his seat where he unearthed a shabby old black traveling bag that +appeared to have seen long and constant usage, as well as his blanket +roll and rifle. + +In the meantime, the card players had returned to their seat near that +of the boys to get their luggage. They were chattering volubly in +French, and Phil strained his ears, hoping to catch some additional +clue, but their conversation was mainly about the pleasures of the trip +they were just concluding. + +"What are we going to do for supper?" inquired Dick. + +"There! He's off again, Phil!" declared Garry. "It's only been four +hours since he ate, and now he's thinking about supper." + +"Well, four hours is four hours, and two more will make six, and persons +should eat once every six hours. That's just human nature," protested +Dick. He knew his chums were just ragging him, as they always did about +his appetite, but he could never resist the temptation to argue with +them, and protest that there was nothing abnormal about his capacity for +food. + +"I'm going back and find the conductor and see what arrangements have +been made for feeding the hungry. And I'll bet a cooky you two are just +as interested in the matter as I am," and Dick flounced out of his seat +and went in search of the conductor. He came back shortly and announced +they would stop an hour at the next town, about an hour's ride distant, +for supper. + +"Also they put on a sleeper there, and me for that. It beats sleeping in +a day coach all hollow." + +Came at last the station, and they hustled out to the little frame hotel +that stood on the other side of the tracks. This town was more or less +of a freight junction. They had a surprisingly good dinner, topped off +with a famous New England pudding composed of Indian meal, baked, with +grated maple sugar and pure cream poured on top of it. + +Finishing the meal, they crossed the tracks back to the train. A sudden +breeze lifted Phil's hat, causing him to chase it along the side of a +string of freight cars. He stooped to recover it, looking under the +freight car, as he did so. What he saw on the other side sent him back +to his chums hotfoot. + +"Say, fellows, don't think I'm just 'seeing things,' but those three +tramps are sitting down there by the tracks eating!" + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +THE TRAIL BEGINS. + + +"Make a break for the train, boys," ordered Garry hastily. "We don't +care to have them get a glimpse of us. I'll wager that they are making +for the Canadian border, since as we know they have jumped their bail +and are probably making for the national boundary line. Bringing them +back will be a more difficult task than it would should they stay in the +State of Maine." + +"All I hope," remarked Phil, "is that they don't linger on the way, but +keep right on going. The chances are that our search for the smuggling +band will provide us with a new crop of people who are not especially +friendly toward us, and old enemies will not be welcomed at the new +headquarters." + +The boys hunted up the conductor, and provided themselves with berths +for the long night ride. They turned in early, for the adventures of the +previous night had robbed them of some of their wonted sleep. Morning +found them making their way through vast tracts of forest lands. The +train made its usual stop at an eating place and the passengers +disembarked for their morning meal. The boys hurried through the +breakfast, in order that they might avail themselves of the remaining +few minutes to make a hasty search of the train and vicinity of the +depot to see whether or not the tramps were anywhere in the +neighborhood. + +The search proved unavailing, and they returned to their place in the +smoking car, as the sleeper had been taken off at that station. The +remainder of the ride for that day passed uneventfully. About the only +topic of conversation was where they should make their headquarters when +they arrived in their new location. They discussed the feasability of +hiring lodgings in the town of Hobart, and after a short discussion +discarded this plan, since it would not be in keeping with their +characters as campers. + +"My idea," explained Garry, "is to branch out from Hobart some little +distance in the woods, and there for a time being, build a double +lean-to. The weather gives promise of being fair for some time to come, +and if we find that circumstances warrant our staying in that vicinity, +we can without a great deal of trouble build a pole cabin." + +Late afternoon brought them to the town of Hobart, and cramped and weary +from their thirty-six hour ride on the train, they gladly disembarked. + +The little town of Hobart lay on the other side of the railroad tracks. +It was like so many other small Maine towns, consisting of a huge +general store, a smithy, which was also a garage, a great ramshackle +building that was once a restaurant and a rooming house, evidently used +by trappers who came there to dispose of their furs, and lumberjacks on +their way to lumber operations in that vicinity. The boys proceeded +directly to the general store, and here made inquiries as to the owner +of the vast timber lands that entirely surrounded Hobart. + +The shrewd old Yankee storekeeper told them that all the timber land in +that section was controlled by one of the great paper and pulp companies +of the State, and that campers never bothered to get permission to use +the land. + +Further inquiry brought out the information that the national boundary +line was only about three miles from Hobart. + +The boys decided to hike directly into the woods, build for themselves a +fire, and sleep in the open, reserving the next morning to find a +suitable camping place where they might erect their lean-to. They +provided themselves with a week's supply of provisions, finding that +they could come into town often enough to replenish their supplies as +they ran out. + +"Now," remarked Garry, after their provisions had been purchased, "we +can do one of two things, either strike directly into the woods and +cook our supper over a camp fire, or we can go over to the restaurant +and have our meal there, which appeals most to me." + +"I would suggest," said Phil, "that we eat tonight at the restaurant, +not that I am too lazy to cook in the woods, but because it is probable +that a good share of the people who live in this town, but who do not +have real homes here, also eat there. In this way, we can become +familiar at least with faces of those who inhabit the place, and who +knows but what it may be the headquarters of the very crew that we are +seeking." + +"I think that's a prime suggestion," said Garry heartily, "so I move we +leave our rifles and knapsacks here at the general store, and get our +supper." + +Before leaving they inquired from the storekeeper what would be the best +route to take to bring them into the woods. They were told that to the +eastward was a small farming community, and that the timber line did not +begin in that direction for a matter of ten miles, but that to the +southwest, a half-hour's walk, would bring them to the dense forests. + +Making sure before they left their supplies at the store, that it would +remain open until they had time to finish their meal, they repaired +directly to the restaurant. Here they found a picturesque scene. A long +counter ran the entire length of the room, presided over by an old +French Canadian, clad in a red flannel shirt, rough corduroy trousers +and high boots. To one side of the room were several tables, at which +men were already seated, playing cards or checkers. A number of fine +specimens of moose and deer heads hung from the walls. + +The boys, perched upon high stools, were soon enjoying their meal. While +they were eating, they kept their ears and eyes wide open, but their +diligent attention brought them no reward. True, there were a number of +rough looking characters about the room, who might have been members of +or even heads of the particular band they had come to that country to +find. The meal over, Phil wanted them to remain for a while, in the hope +that some stray bit of conversation would give them something to work +on, but Garry vetoed this idea, for the reason that there still remained +only a half hour or so of daylight and he thought it would be wise for +them to get to a point to make themselves a camp before darkness fell. + +Retrieving their packs and rifles from the general store, they started +for the woods, first filling their canteens, for it would probably be +unlikely that they could find a spring immediately on their arrival. A +half an hour's brisk walk brought them to the beginning of the timber +line. The rapidly gathering dusk signalled the quick approach of +nightfall, and they had barely penetrated the forest when Garry called a +halt. + +The first duty was to build a fire, and in a short time they had +gathered enough brush to start their camp fire. A short search soon +resulted in their finding an old fallen tree, and in a few minutes they +had procured from this enough firewood to last them out the night. The +last task before rolling in for the evening was to get a number of +spruce boughs for making the usual mattress for anyone sleeping out in +the open in the great forests of Maine. + +Garry awoke with the dawn, and soon tumbled his companions out. Fresh +wood was thrown on the few remaining embers, and in a short time coffee +was boiling and bacon was being fried, while Dick superintended the +making of a big batch of spider bread. It was the first meal that the +boys had cooked over a camp fire in several days, and they heartily +enjoyed every mouthful of it. + +Breakfast over, the first task of the morning was to locate a suitable +place in which to pitch their temporary camp. Striking out to the +southwest, they spread out fanshaped, but not so far away that they +could not hear the sound of each other's voices. Zigzagging back and +forth, they searched for a spring. It was nearly a half of an hour +before their search was rewarded with success, when Dick's call brought +the three together. + +Accidentally he had stumbled on an ideal camp site. It was one of those +natural clearings that are so often found in the densest forests. Nearby +was a clear spring, with cold water that trickled into an ever widening +forest stream. + +The boys immediately decided that a day's search might not have provided +them with a better spot, and in a short time were bustling actively +about building their new camp. This consisted merely of throwing +together a brush lean-to. + +The brush lean-to is the simplest sort of forest home. It is made by +erecting two poles, six to seven feet in height, and about six to eight +feet apart. In back of these, at a distance of some six feet, are placed +two more poles about one-half the height of the first pair. Four poles +are laid on the tops of these, secured by cutting a cleft in the tops, +and laid so as to form the frame work for the roof of the lean-to. The +next step in the building of such a habitation is to lay poles at an +interval of a foot or a foot and a half along the roof part of the +lean-to. + +When erecting the uprights, care is taken to leave two or three bits of +branch project at intervals along the length of the poles. On these long +saplings are laid. The frame work of the lean-to is then complete, and +the finishing step consists of cutting great quantities of brush. + +These pieces of brush are hung on the saplings that have been spread +across the frame work, the branches being crudely woven in and out of +each other. The front of the lean-to is generally left open. Some +woodsmen prefer to enclose all four sides, but the case of the brush +shack being built by the boys, the front part was left open, since their +idea was to build another lean-to directly opposite and about four feet +away. In the open space between the two shacks could be built a camp +fire. + +The crude shacks thus constructed furnished them with ample protection +during fair weather, and even during a moderate summer shower. Of +course, in an extended rain, such shacks would be next to useless, as +the steady downpour of rain would soon beat through the brush roof. + +The shacks being completed, they chopped a quantity of firewood, using +parts of fallen trees, wind wracked ruins that had dried and seasoned +under the summer sun. This was stored away in one of the lean-tos. A +balsam tree being found, quantities of the branches were cut to furnish +beds for the three. The camp was now completed, and it being nearly +noon, Dick departed into the woods to knock down a few squirrels for +lunch. He was back in less than a half of an hour with three fat +squirrels, and these skinned, impaled on a sharp stick, and wrapped with +a slice or two of thickly cut bacon, were soon roasted over the red +embers of the fire. + +"Now, before we get down to business, who's for a trip to the border +line? I want to see just how it feels to be in two countries at once," +suggested Phil. + +The boys agreeing, Garry drew out his pocket map and consulted it, +bearing in mind the directions given them by the storekeeper. He decided +they were less than five miles distant from the boundary, so striking +out, they trudged steadily in what they believed was the proper +direction. A walk of about an hour and a half brought them within what +they considered was the proper location of the boundary line, then +striking out toward the north-east, they spread out in search of one of +the monuments or cairns that are erected at frequent intervals along +border lines. Luckily, a few minutes' search brought them to one of the +white stone posts which are common wherever two countries come together. +On the top of the monument, chiseled in deep letters, were the words +"Boundary Line." On the one side was cut "United States," while on the +other was the word "Canada." Dick immediately straddled the post, +exclaiming: + +"Well, this is the first time that I have ever been in two countries at +exactly the same moment." His enthusiasm was so infectious that Garry +and Phil immediately followed suit and tried the novel experience. + +Doubling back on the trail over which they had come, mid-afternoon found +them back at their camp site. Here a surprise awaited them, for making +free use of their coffee pot and one of their frying pans was a man, +cooking a meal over their camp fire. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +THE GUM HUNTER. + + +"That chap seems to be making himself right at home in our camp, doesn't +he, Garry," remarked Phil. + +"So he does, but that is the way of many of the old timers in the woods. +They consider it all right to make use of anyone's camp so long as they +take nothing and do no harm, and leave some sign that they have been +there, provided the owners do not return before he leaves. He's a +picturesque-looking old fellow, isn't he? Looks something like our old +Hermit friend. Let's go and see who he is," concluded Garry. + +They made their way to the lean-to, for they had stopped when they saw +the new occupant of the camp. + +"Howdy, stranger," hailed Garry. + +"Howdy, boys," he returned. "This your camp here?" + +"Yes, we just threw it up yesterday. Are you from round these parts?" +asked Garry. + +"Callate that's just what I am. Name's Dudley, George Washington Dudley, +generally called 'Dud' for short by my friends." + +Garry then proceeded to tell his name and those of his companions. The +old man left off his cooking long enough to shake hands, and then +resumed his turning of the bacon. + +"Got hungry and didn't want to start a new fire somewhere, and so used +your place here. Wasn't expecting to be gone so long today, and didn't +bring anything with me. Just helped myself. Will make it all right next +time I come this way. What you boys doing up here? 'Spose you're from +the city, but you don't look as though you were exact strangers to the +woods. Sensible looking clothes you've got on, too." + +"We're figuring on camping here for a time, and looking the country +over. What's your business?" asked Garry, with the true Yankee +inquisitiveness. + +"Oh, I do several things. Just now I'm a gum hunter." + +"A what?" chimed in Phil. + +"Gum hunter," responded the old man briefly, as though that settled the +question. + +"I am afraid we don't know just what a gum hunter is," confessed Garry, +speaking for his chums as well as himself. + +"No, I 'spose you don't. Can't expect city boys to know a great deal +anyway. Well, a gum hunter is just what it sounds like. I go through the +woods getting spruce gum for the drug stores. Make a good living that +way part of a year. Get a lot of druggists all way from Portland to +Boston who won't buy spruce gum from anyone but me. They know I send 'em +only the best. Understand what a gum hunter is now?" + +"Thank you, yes," said Garry. "But you said you did other things. Mind +telling us what they are? We are not inquisitive, only this is something +new to us." + +"Sure I don't mind. Sometimes I pick yarbs. There's a powerful lot of +them in the woods, like sassafras root and checkerberry and things like +that. I sell these to the same druggists that buy my gum. Then sometimes +I guide parties. In the wintertime I trap. And sometimes in the spring, +I work on the log drive on the river. There's lots of things a man can +do to make a living in these woods, if he only knows enough. And it +beats working in a store or something all hollow. You're never sick, and +mainly you are your own boss, without anyone to tell you when to work +and what to work at," concluded the old gum hunter. + +For the benefit of our readers who may not be acquainted with Yankee +dialect, yarbs is the native's way of saying herbs. + +The boys were much interested in the old man's various occupations. They +had no idea that a man could do so many different and profitable things +in the wilds of the great forests. + +"What you boys aim to do while you are camping?" inquired the newcomer, +as he ate his late lunch. "You won't find a powerful lot of shooting as +there ain't much now that the law is off. Course you can get some good +fishing if you follow that brook that is fed by the spring you get your +water from for about three miles. There's a place there where a couple +of old trees lay across the brook, blown down in some big storm, I +expect, and there are some noble trout there. If I had had time today, +I'd have gone down there and caught a couple for my meal, instead of +taking your bacon." + +"You were perfectly welcome to it, and anytime you are around here drop +right in and help yourself. You'll always find a plenty," said Garry +cordially. + +"That's the right spirit to show in the woods, young feller," and the +gum hunter slouched off to the spring to draw some water to wash the +dishes after his meal. He came back with the water, and pouring a small +quantity of it in the greasy frying pan, put it on the coals. The dish +and his knife and fork, he scrubbed first with a handful of earth, and +in a short time they were clean of the grease of the bacon. All that +needed to be done was to rinse them out. By this time the water in the +frying pan had come to a boil, and pouring it out, the pan was found to +be nearly free of the grease. An application of earth, and a rinse, and +that job was done. + +Then filling an old pipe, he stretched out near the fire, and began to +ply the boys with questions,--where they had come from, why they came so +far from home to go camping, and countless other shrewd interrogations. +For some reason he seemed to think it peculiar that they had come so far +when there were plenty of forests nearer home where they could have +established a camp. + +Garry took it on himself to answer most of these questions, and in turn +asked many of the old man. + +Finally Garry looked straight at the old fellow, and asked quietly: + +"Ever hear of any smuggling going on in these parts?" + +"That's a funny question for a young fellow like you to be asking. You +fellows haven't come up here to join some smugglers' band, that is, +supposing there were any up here? Sure you boys haven't been reading +woolly tales of smugglers on the border, or something, have ye?" he +asked suspiciously. + +Garry and the others laughed at the implication. Garry, although not so +old in years, had several times proved himself to be a shrewd judge of +character, and he had already made up his mind that the old gum hunter +was a staunch and sturdy and patriotic citizen of the State. However, he +decided to let a little time elapse before further questioning of the +woodsman, or imparting any confidences to him. + +"Where did your guide go after he fixed you up here?" asked the gum +hunter, after a short silence. + +"We didn't have any guide," answered Dick. + +"You fellows mean to tell me that you picked this site and pitched camp +yourselves?" demanded Dudley. + +"Just exactly that," responded Garry. + +"Well, it's mighty good job. Who taught you to make a double lean-to in +that fashion?" + +"Why, we've made rather a study of woodcraft, and this is not our first +experience in the woods," answered Garry. Then thinking of a way in +which he could let the old timer know that they were not merely +adventurous, inquisitive boys, he decided to reveal to George Washington +Dudley the fact that they were members of the Forest Ranger Service, +but to keep a secret the fact that they were also on Customs duty. + +On hearing this, the old man looked at them with considerably different +aspect. + +Garry explained to him, as it had been decided at Augusta to give them a +good excuse for being in the woods, that they were covering that part of +the country with a view to establishing a 'phone service for the Ranger +System, that section being unprotected in that manner. As a matter of +fact, the border line was but poorly guarded, as the meagre +appropriation by the Legislature did not allow every foot of the country +to be taken care of in the manner that it should. + +This announcement by Garry increased the respect of the old man for +them. + +"Yes, sir, boys," he said, "that's one of the biggest things that's been +done in this State for many a long year. I tell you, I've lived in these +woods all my life, and that's more than sixty years, and I love these +great trees. They all seem like so many friends to me. Of course I know +that they must be sacrificed for the good of mankind, but it makes me +sad when I think of the way the paper mill people have gone through mile +after mile of timber land, cutting it clean of every tree. Course they +should take only the big trees, that have grown old like men, and have +almost outlived their good on earth. But to cut down young trees, it's +just like killing young boys. To the paper mill people it only means +just so much more pulp. Then the fires that are so often caused by +careless campers and hunters. Yes, sir, it's sure a crime, and it's a +fine thing for boys as young as you to know about these things and help +fight the evils. But there's one thing that's been a puzzling me. What +did you ask about smugglers for?" + +"Why, it was partly curiosity, and partly because we heard that there +was considerable smuggling in this part of the country, it being so near +to the Canadian border line," said Garry cautiously. Then, carefully +choosing his words, he went on: + +"And if we did find evidence of any, we being in a branch of the State +service, it would be our duty as good American citizens to run it down +as far as possible and bring the smugglers to justice. Don't you think +it would?" he concluded, looking sharply at old Dud. + +"Yes sir," shot out the old gum hunter emphatically, and somewhat to the +surprise of Garry, who had put the question merely to see what side the +old timer would take. "I believe in upholding the laws of the land. I +came from a family that has done that always. My Daddy fought in the +Mexican War, and he was killed in Shiloh during the Civil War. I didn't +tell 'em just the truth about my age in the Spanish War, and so I was in +that myself; but they knew I was stretching the truth a little when I +tried to get in the big scrap in 1917. Ain't never one of our family +done anything but uphold the law the way she was written on the books. + +"Now as for this smuggling that you speak of, it does happen and it +happens right in this region. There's a regular nest of 'em right in +Hobart. Now mind I ain't saying anything, but if a person was to keep +watch of certain fellows that always of an evening went through the back +door at the end of the restaurant, he might some time know just who +those fellows were. One thing, though, there ain't much help to be got +from any of the townspeople when it comes to that practice. Lots of +border people can't see the justice in paying duty on stuff that comes +from a country that's as near them as Canada is. They don't seem to look +on it as a foreign country at all. Guess it's because they are too +familiar with it. And that's that. So now, boys, I'll bid ye a goodbye +and trot along. I don't just know what you boys are up to, but I'll lay +that it's all right, and I've just got this to say: Anytime you get into +a bad hole, or need some help in the worst kind of way, remember and get +to George W. Dudley, or old Dud the gum hunter. Everyone hereabouts +knows who I am and where I can be found in a short time." + +So saying, the old man shouldered his long rifle and went his way. + +"Boys," said Garry elatedly, "the trail begins here!" + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +THE NIGHT VISITOR. + + +Night drawing on, the boys prepared their supper. The night's meal +consisted of a real stew, for since they were so near to a place to +purchase provisions they were able to indulge themselves a little more +than when they were at their first station, so far away from a base of +supplies. + +Canned beef was used, and then a few potatoes and carrots were peeled +and cut into small cubes. A good meat stew is one of the easiest things +to make in the woods, provided one has a variety or two of vegetables. + +All that is necessary to do is to cut the meat into small squares about +an inch thick, then peel and cut the vegetables to the same size. Put +just enough cold water in the kettle to cover the meat and vegetables, +and then let the whole simmer slowly over the coals. From time to time +the cook should take a look at the stew and see that it does not dry. It +will be necessary to add a small quantity of water from time to time, +and in about an hour and a quarter the stew will be ready, and after a +long hike in the woods it is a dish that is fit for a king. + +While Dick superintended the cooking of the stew, Phil and Garry +replenished the wood supply. The stew put on the fire, Dick searched +until he found a piece of sapling about an inch and a half in diameter. +This is peeled off the bark and so made a rolling pin. A glass jam jar +was then emptied of its contents and laid to one side. + +"Ah, I perceive that we are going to have hot biscuits for supper +tonight," remarked Phil, smacking his lips. + +"Regular little Sherlock, aren't you?" said Garry with a laugh. "When +you see a chap make a rolling pin and a biscuit cutter, you immediately +reach the conclusion that he's going to make biscuits." + +That was what Dick was intending to do. With a hot stew, there is +nothing more palatable than a stack of piping hot biscuits cooked in a +spider over a bed of red embers. They require but little work, only one +thing being necessary, and that is to rub the shortening through into +the flour. Many amateur campers wonder why the biscuits are flat or +doughy. It is because they either do not know that the shortening should +be ground in, or else, which is too often true, are too lazy to do the +work. + +For the benefit of some of our readers who may want to go camping over +a summer week-end, the proper making of a pan of biscuits will be +described. To make a dozen biscuits, or enough for three hungry boys, +take a pint and a half of flour, a teaspoon and a half of baking powder, +half a heaping teaspoonful of salt, the equivalent of a heaping +tablespoonful of shortening, which may be bought by the can, (lard or +drippings will do equally as well) and about half a pint of cold water. +Stir the baking powder into the flour, then the salt. Then rub the +shortening thoroughly into the flour, till not a bit of it remains in +lumps or on the bottom of the mixing pan. Then stir in the water until +you have a thick dough. In the meantime have a hot bed of coals, then +dust a little flour on the bottom of one of your frying pans. + +Finally roll out your dough with the home-made sapling rolling pin, and +use an old glass jar or a small round tin to cut your biscuits out with. +Knead over the bits that are left from cutting the biscuits out until +all the dough has been used. Put them in the frying pan, and if you have +no cover, use a second inverted pan for one. + +Put this on the hot coals about twenty minutes before your supper is to +be ready, and a few moments later put on the coffee pot. + +The result will be a supper that cannot be found in the finest of +hotels, especially if your appetite is sauced by a good hike and the +fragrant balsamy air of the great forest. + +Squatting about the glowing coals of the campfire, which cast a red +reflection on the tall, sombre pines in back of them, they voted Dick a +capital cook, and the supper one of the best they had eaten since they +left the station where they had done fire patrol duty. + +The meal over and the dishes washed, they discussed the advisability of +establishing a guard as they had done when danger threatened them in +past times. + +Garry was of the opinion that it would be unnecessary for a time, as no +one knew of their mission and they had seen nothing that would tend to +alarm them. + +The others were glad of this decision, for all were tired with the work +of establishing the camp and the hike they had taken to the boundary +line. + +Shortly after midnight Garry was roused from his slumber by a nightmare +in which he dreamed that LeBlanc and he were desperately battling on the +top of a great cliff. + +The dream was so realistic that when he woke, he shuddered for a moment. +Then feeling somewhat chilly, he found that the fire had died down, and +rose to throw a few sticks of wood on the still red coals. He cast a +glance about him and in the distance saw a gleaming pair of eyes! + +Hastily drawing his flashlight from his pocket, and diving back into the +lean-to for his rifle, he made sure it was loaded and then investigated +the gleaming eyes. His flashlight was a good one, throwing a long white +beam of light into the darkness. + +What he saw was some sort of an animal that, unperturbed by the light, +was advancing slowly. Snapping off the flashlight, and dropping it to +his side, he threw his rifle to his shoulder. He took a careful aim at a +point between the shining eyes, and fired. There was a snarl and a +violent squirming for a moment, and then all was still. + +Garry's shot had sent the wild echoes chashing through the still forest, +and in a trice, Phil and Dick were awakened, and came rushing to his +side, bringing their rifles with them. + +"What is it, Garry?" shouted Phil. "Have we been attacked?" + +"No, but there is no telling what he might have done. As far as I could +make out, it's a big bobcat. I haven't gone near it yet, for I am not +sure that it is dead, although it hasn't made a move since I fired," +answered Garry. + +"Well, let's go and take a look. Load your rifle again, and we can keep +ours trained on the beast and make short work of him if he is still +alive," said Phil. + +Garry rescued his flashlight from the spot where he had dropped it when +he made ready to shoot, and the three started cautiously for the still +carcass. Arriving at the point, Dick seized a dead stick from the ground +and, throwing accurately, hit the animal in the ribs. It made never a +move, and so the chums judged it was safe to approach. + +The animal was stone dead. Garry's shot had pierced the brain right in +the forehead, and the animal had evidently died almost instantly. + +They examined the animal. It was a sort of a pepper-and-salt color with +a pencil or streak of black hair extending from the back of the ears. As +far as they could judge, it would stand about two feet tall, when erect, +and must have been almost a yard from the top of its nose to the end of +its abbreviated tail. The legs and feet were heavily covered with fur, +and bore wicked, razorlike claws. + +A snarl was on the face of the night prowler even in death. Garry seized +it by the scruff of the neck, and hefted it. + +"By George, I bet that animal weighs every ounce of thirty pounds," he +exclaimed. + +"Then it's the heftiest bobcat I've ever heard about," said Phil. + +"Well, let's get back to bed again," yawned Dick. "I was sleeping like +a log when I thought the whole shack had been pulled in about my ears. +Good thing I woke up though. I forgot to put beans to soak last night, +and I am determined to have baked beans for tomorrow night's supper. +Guess I'll put them to soak and turn in again. Bring your old bobcat +along and hang it to a branch, and we'll skin it tomorrow and try and +tan it." + +"Skin nothing," declared Garry. "I'm going to have that critter stuffed +and mounted. It's one of the finest specimens I've ever seen." + +"You fellows can argue all night if you want to," stated Phil +emphatically. "I'm going to crawl into my blanket again. Good night!" + +The boys returned to the camp, and still rubbing the sleep from his +eyes, Dick put his beans to soak, and in a few minutes quiet had again +descended on the camp, only the occasional snap of a burning knot +breaking the majestic silence of the great forest that surrounded the +sleeping boys. + +When morning came, Garry was the first to awake. Glancing mischievously +at his sleeping companions, he softly stole to where he had hung the +body of the bobcat the night before, and hid it in the lean-to in back +of the pile of cut firewood. Phil awoke a moment after, and coming out, +looked for the animal to get a closer look at it in the daytime. He +inquired in surprise where the carcass had gone. + +"If you can keep a straight face and deny everything, we will have a few +minutes of fun with Dick," said Garry with a wink. + +"Go to it, I'm on," laughed Phil. Garry proceeded to start the coffee +and slice the bacon for breakfast. + +Then walking over to where Dick lay still soundly sleeping, he stirred +him with his foot, shouting: + +"Get up, lazybones, and make a mess of flapjacks for breakfast," for it +was admitted by the boys that Dick was the best cook of the three. + +Dick rolled out of his blanket with a protesting murmur, and then ran to +the brook below the spring, where he dashed the cold water into his face +until the sleep fog had rolled away. On his way back he glanced at the +spot where the animal's body had been hung the night before. Not seeing +it, he turned to Garry and asked what he had done with the wildcat. + +"What wildcat?" asked Garry in amazement, while Phil looked at Dick with +a blank face. + +"Why, the bobcat or wildcat or civetcat, or whatever it was, that you +shot last night." + +Garry turned and shook his head sadly at Phil. + +"Poor chap, the strain of the last few days has been too much for him, +or else he is eating too much again before he goes to bed. He eats too +much anyway, that's why he has such awful dreams." + +"Dream nothing," shouted Dick, half angry, half puzzled. "Do you mean to +stand there and tell me that you didn't turn the camp upside down last +night by shooting some sort of an animal?" + +"Absolutely," declared Garry firmly. + +"That must have been some dream that you had last night," chimed in +Phil, carrying out the joke. + +Dick stared at his two companions, but seeing their sober faces, +muttered something to himself and set about fixing the flapjacks. By +this time he was firmly convinced that he had dreamed the whole +occurrence, and on being pressed by the boys, told his "dream," relating +exactly the circumstances of the adventure of the night before. + +Although it nearly killed them to do it, the others maintained a +straight face and listened with interest. Breakfast over, Dick was +wandering around the camp when he discovered the beans he had set to +soak when he was roused by the shot that killed the nocturnal visitor. +Immediately he remembered that he had forgotten to do this before +retiring, hence he must have done it when he got up. + +Without saying anything to his companions, he quietly prowled about the +camp, until he came on the body of the bobcat where Garry had hidden +it. Instantly the light broke, and he made a dash for Garry, knocking +him over and getting astride of him. Then Dick proceeded to tickle his +ribs vigorously. + +"Try to string me, will you? Holler nuff and say you're sorry you made +fun of an innocent, trusting person like myself. Holler nuff." + +"Hey, Phil, pull this wildman off me," gasped Garry between gasps of +laughter, both at the tickling and at the recollection of the joke that +had been played on the fat boy. + +But Phil was rolling on the ground laughing until the tears ran down his +cheeks. Both he and Garry had held in as long as it was possible, and +now they were making up for lost time. + +Dick at last tired of pummeling Garry, and soon he joined in the +laughter, for the joke was undeniably on him. + +While they were laughing, along came Dud the gum hunter, bearing a +chicken with him. + +"Here, boys, thought you might like a bit of chicken, and that'll help +make up for the bacon and flour of yours that I used yesterday." + +The boys thanked him heartily, and then Garry asked if he knew anyone in +that region that could stuff a bobcat, explaining how he had shot one +the night before. Dud asked to see the animal, and then exclaimed, his +eyes popping: + +"Bobcat? Why, boy alive. That's the biggest, finest specimen of Canada +Lynx I have even seen. It's one of the most savage animals to be found +in the whole North Woods!" + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +A SIGNAL OF DISTRESS. + + +"A Canada lynx!" ejaculated Garry. "Why, I thought they were to be found +only in the wilds of Northern Canada." + +"That's what a good many people think, but they can be found almost +anywhere in the northern tier of this country. A friend of mine a couple +of years ago shot one on the banks of Lake Champlain barely a mile +outside the city of Plattsburg. I don't ever recollect seeing one as +fine or as big as that one of yours. If you'd like, I'll stuff it and +mount it for you." + +"That is more than I dared hope," said Garry. "I didn't know whether I +could find a taxidermist up here or not." + +"You'll find that a good many old woodsmen are pretty skillful at it, +especially those who hire out as guides in the deer season," replied +Dud. "I mounted a fine deer head for a hunter from New York last year, +and he said it was a better job than was done by one of the high-priced +animal men in that city. But there's something else I want to tell you. +I can't say much, but there is a pernicious lot of activity lately among +a certain class of fellows who find a lot of business over the border +every now and then. Now mind ye, I ain't saying anything, but I've seen +and heard a couple of things since last night. Also, the 'lane' that is +used by these fellows isn't a million miles from here, and a nod is as +good as a wink to a blind mare. Remember I ain't said nothing at all." + +Leaving the boys to ponder over his remarks, the gum hunter threw his +bag across his shoulder and departed on his quest of spruce gum. + +"Now I wonder why he is so secretive about this business. Evidently he +knows all about it, so why shouldn't he come right out and tell what he +knows. It's a puzzle," said Garry reflectively. + +"Don't you suppose he is that way because he lives here and knows all +these people and does not want to become involved in any way, fearing +that they might seek revenge on him for giving away their secrets? +Perhaps he even has some misguided relative or friend who is mixed up in +the mess some way," suggested Phil. + +"I believe that is the only solution, Phil. At any rate, it behooves us +to be on the move and see what we can find out. He said something about +the smugglers' 'lane' being around here. I suppose that he means the +trail over which the stuff is brought. I suggest that the business of +the morning be to locate it if possible. Let's head toward the boundary +stone, and strike up along what is approximately the border from there +and see if we can discover anything in the way of a trail. First, +however, I suggest that we take all our food supplies and cache them +safely in a tree somewhere in this vicinity. Not so much for fear that +they will be stolen, but because I don't want the fact advertised of our +being here in case someone should come along in our absence. If we are +here, then all right, if we are not, these lean-tos look to be only +temporary, and no one would give them a second thought. I've also +thought it would be a good plan to search out one or two other likely +camp-sites and establish camps there. Then we can go from one to another +and not advertise our presence so blatantly. So on our march today, keep +an eye for a good spring. Now let's go and cache the stuff." + +First Garry measured out a two-day ration of food, dividing it among the +three. The rest was then packed in a cloth flour bag that Garry had +procured at the general store, showing that he had had this idea in the +back of his head since they had arrived at the border. Some little +distance away, a thick pine tree was located and careful observation +was made so that the boys could find it easily. + +Phil climbed the tree and then let down his lariat and Garry tied the +bag to the end. Phil then drew it up into the tree and placed it +securely in a crotch in one of the branches. This done, Phil clambered +back down, remarking when he reached the ground: + +"If we get a good storm it's goodbye to the sugar and flour in that bag. +The stuff will just naturally melt away. If we are going to make a +practice of caching the stuff, I suggest that we provide a number of tin +cans with tight covers. Then it can rain on the articles for days and +never hurt them a bit." + +"That's a prime idea, Phil, and next time we go to town, you are +delegated to provide said tins," said Garry. + +"Ha, that's the time I talked myself into extra work," rejoined Phil +with a laugh. + +"Believe me, young man, I'll take a lesson from that and make only +suggestions that won't entail extra work," chipped in Dick. + +"On our way now, but first Dick, you run back to the camp and empty your +canteen on the fire, and obliterate all traces of it. Then fill your +canteen and rejoin us here, and we'll be off for the boundary monument," +ordered Garry, thus proving himself to be a real woodsman and Ranger, +never forgetting that a stray spark or ember may smoulder for some +little time and perhaps start a fire that would sweep through the +forests as though they were so much tinder. + +Dick sped away to do Garry's bidding, and in a few moments was back, and +the three chums started for the boundary line. This time they were able +to proceed directly to it, without wasting precious time hunting for it. + +Arriving at the marker, they branched out fanshaped as was their wont +when they were in search of a trail or water. For some three or four +miles they found nothing in the way of a well-defined trail, or even the +remains of a camp, and were beginning to think the whole affair was +nothing more nor less than a wild goose chase, when they were called +together by a hail from Dick. + +They ran speedily to him, and found him gazing at the ground. + +"I don't know that what I've found amounts to a continental, but this is +an old abandoned tote road, and I've found the marks of three or four +different style boots, or rather, different sized boots. To my mind, it +is worth following up, as there hasn't been anything yet worth while +investigating except this. I wonder if our friend Dud isn't just giving +us a wrong steer, or is this what he meant we should find? What say, +Garry, what shall we do?" + +Garry decided immediately. + +"We'll follow this for a bit and see where it leads us. It may amount +to nothing at all, and then again it may lead us to a real clue." + +They set off down the old tote road, and after a walk of nearly an hour +came upon several shacks, all boarded up, and bearing an air of +desolation and abandonment. + +"By golly, this is a deserted lumber camp. You remember the storekeeper +told us there used to be logging operations in this vicinity? This must +have been the scene of the camp, although they had quite a haul to reach +the river for the drive. Let's take a look-see and find out what's +here," cried Phil. + +They went to the main building, that is, the largest, evidently what had +been the bunkhouse for the lumberjacks, but every window was tightly +boarded up. A little to one side was a smaller building, which had +probably been the office and home of the camp boss and timber cruisers, +who generally lived by themselves. + +This, too, had a deserted and forlorn appearance. Phil's keen eyes were +roving over the ground, but he found nothing to excite him till he came +to the rear of the building. Here was a small door. + +"Say, fellows, look at that door. It's been repaired, and only lately. +You can see that someone has tried to obliterate the fact that new +boards were put in. It looks as though some tramp or woods wanderer had +broken in at some time, and the person or persons who have been here +lately have repaired it," said Phil, dropping to his knees and examining +the ground in front of the door. + +"Why might not whoever has charge of this camp have fixed the door? It +is very likely that when the logging operations were given up that some +person in Hobart was put in charge to see that it was not destroyed, +because logging can again be carried on in this section," inquired Dick. + +"Why, I dope it out this way. If, as you say, there is a caretaker or an +agent, it would be only natural for him to repair the broken door; but +why take all the trouble to smear it with dirt and dent it a little to +make it appear that it hadn't been touched? You can see that there are +different woods used in the door, and the repaired part is of much newer +timber. I tell you, there is some reason for this secrecy. By Jove, +let's try and get in." + +As he spoke, Phil ran to one of the windows. This had been boarded up +from the outside, but one of the boards appeared to be loose. + +"What say, Garry, shall I try and make an entrance?" + +"I think under the circumstances it would be all right, since we are in +search of possible evidence," replied Garry, after a moment's +consideration. + +Carefully inserting the edge of his axe under the loose board, Phil +worked the axe handle slowly, until at last he was rewarded by the board +giving way, gently withdrawing the nails with it. In a few moments more, +he had a second board removed, disclosing a window. It had an ordinary +lock, and opening his knife, Phil inserted the blade and soon snapped +the lock back. In a few seconds the three had clambered in, and were +taking stock of the interior. + +Undeniably the place had been recently occupied. On the table were two +bottles with the remains of candles stuck in them, while in the +fireplace were the remains of a fire. A good woodsman can tell whether a +fire has been made recently or not, and the boys saw at once that this +was the case. + +On the table was a pack of cards, thrown there evidently at the ending +of a game. There were four bunks at one side of the room, and these had +been cleaned out and fresh boughs were laid there, although there were +no blankets. + +Garry discovered a closet, and on opening it, found that there was a +fair stock of provisions. + +"Guess you are right, Phil. Someone is making a headquarters of the +shack. It seems logical to think that they are doing so secretly, for if +anyone with a right to use the place were living here, they would have +removed the boards from the windows, and would have made the place a +little bit more habitable. However, we had better dust out of here, for +we don't want to be surprised by anyone that happens to come along, +especially whoever is using this place. Perhaps it would be a good idea +to establish a watch and see who comes here. The chances are whoever +uses the place comes at night, or at least in the early evening, and one +might be able to get a look at them. At any rate, let's hike out," +concluded Garry. + +Looking around carefully to see that they left no evidence of their +surrepticious visit, they went out through the window. + +"Sorry there's no way to lock that window hasp again, but since the +windows are evidently not used by the occupants, I don't believe it will +ever be noticed," remarked Phil, as he carefully nailed the boards back +in place with the back of the hatchet, being careful that his axe did +not slip and leave a mark to show that the boards had been pried off. + +"When it comes time to watch for the occupants, I have an idea of the +proper place to keep an eye on them," said Dick, "and that is the +spring. Whoever is living here must have water, and if I'm not mistaken, +that's the spring over there." + +Following Dick's lead, they went in the indicated direction, and sure +enough, there was the spring. + +"You can see fairly fresh footprints there. I wish now that we had Sandy +with us," said Garry. + +"Sandy" was Garry's big Airedale dog, which they had left with Nate +Webster when they went off to Augusta. They had not taken him on the +trip, for all those with whom they had had trouble, knew the dog, and he +would call too obviously attention to the presence of the trio of +Rangers. + +"Let's take a look at the big bunkhouse and see if that is being used +also," suggested Phil. + +They returned to the long low shack, and were in search of a window from +which the boards might be removed, when suddenly Garry said: + +"Listen, do you hear the sound of rifle shots?" + +Faintly borne on the breeze, came the sound of a distant shot. + +"Probably only some youngster from town out after rabbits," said Dick. +They waited for a few minutes, and then again was heard a shot, closely +followed by two more. + +"The forest distress signal. Some one's in trouble boys!" cried Garry +excitedly. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +THE RESCUE. + + +To explain to our readers why the three shots are known as a distress +signal is simple. One shot would ordinarily be that of a hunter. Two +could be the same thing, provided the man was using a double barrelled +shotgun, such as is used in hunting birds. The chances that a hunter +would fire three shots in regular succession is very small, hence this +is the signal that is the S. O. S. of the woods. It is reported at +intervals, and after being heard two or three times, the woods voyager +may be sure that someone is in some great difficulty, fallen and broken +a leg, or lost in the dense timber. + +"It's to the south of us," said Garry, as he wet a finger and held it up +to test the direction of the wind. "You see the breeze comes from that +direction, and the sound comes with it. Let's take it on the trot, +boys." + +So saying, he led the way at an easy lope to the southward. They had +proceeded a little distance, when again they heard the three shots, +this time much nearer. + +Breaking into a swift run, they were soon at the source of the call for +help. + +Laying on the ground, his foot caught in a wicked looking steel trap, +was an elderly man. In a feeble tone, he hailed the boys. + +"Thank God you've come, boys. I fear in a little while more I should +have been too weak to try and summon help. Release me from this trap." + +Garry and Dick sprang to the trap, which had closed on the man's ankle, +while Phil attempted to lift him up. + +"Easy, my boy, easy, my arm's broken. That's why I was unable to release +myself sometime ago. I could only reach one spring with my good arm, and +even that effort so twisted my leg that I fainted and had to give up +attempting it." + +While he had been speaking, the two boys had released the springs, and +bending back the teeth, released the man's leg. He gave a groan of +relief, while trying to raise himself up. + +"Better take it easy, sir, while I look you over and see what the extent +of your injuries are," said Garry. + +Taking his knife, the boy slit the leg of the corduroy trousers, and +then carefully rolled the woolen sock down. This disclosed an ugly +looking swollen leg. Very gently he felt of the leg, and then asked the +man if he could move his foot. After trying, the old man found he could. + +"Guess it's not broken, just very badly bruised and swollen," remarked +Garry cheerfully. + +"That's something to be thankful for anyway, for I know my arm is +broken. It was all I could do to load and fire my rifle with one hand," +said the sufferer. + +"We'll have that in splints in no time, and then see about getting you +to your home," said Garry. "Now Phil, you start a little fire and make +some coffee to brace the gentleman up with, while I put his arm in +splints." + +Very gently he ran his fingers up and down the arm, finding that it was +a clean break of one of the bones of the forearm, and not the wrist. +Searching through his knapsack, he drew out what is known to first aid +as a wire gauze bandage. This is nothing more than closely meshed wire, +and is recommended for use for a temporary splint until the doctor can +be gotten. + +Wrapping the arm with some bandage, he put on the splint, and tied it on +firmly with a strip of bandage. Then whipping his bandanna handkerchief +from around his neck, he made a sling. + +The hot coffee was soon forthcoming, and stimulated by it, the man felt +considerably better. + +Asked how he had been caught by the trap, he explained that while he was +walking through the woods in search of a partridge or squirrel, mainly +more for the pleasure of hiking than in hope of shooting anything, he +had stepped into the trap, which was carefully covered. + +"It had evidently been there for some time, for the ground over it +looked quite natural as though many successive rains had beaten down +upon it, or else I would have noticed that the covering was only +artificial. By the way, let me introduce myself. My name is John +Everett, and I used to be the Customs officer here, until Uncle Sam +decided there was no need for one, and moved the station some +twenty-five miles up the border, where another man, a politically +influential fellow, was appointed to the new office. Since then I have +been living in retirement with my granddaughter. I wonder if it is going +to impose on you to ask one of you to go to Hobart, it's only about four +miles from here, and get help to take me home, for although my leg does +not seem to be broken, I cannot stand on it, much less walk," he +concluded. + +"Don't worry about getting home. We'll have a snack of food and then +make a stretcher and have you there in no time," said Garry. + +"I am afraid that will be too much of a task for you," remonstrated +Everett. + +"Oh, it's nothing at all, sir," Garry hastened to say. + +When the man had mentioned that he had been a Customs officer, Dick had +given Phil a significant glance. There was every chance that good +fortune in being able to do a great favor for the old man might redound +to their aid. + +A hasty lunch of bacon and spiderbread was made, the man watching +admiringly the efficient and speedy manner in which the boys went about +preparing the meal. + +"You boys act as though you had been born and brought up in the woods. +Were you?" he inquired. + +"No, although we have always liked woodcraft and forest lore, and have +read about it and practiced it in a small way. We are in the Forest +Ranger service, doing some special work, and so we have to know +something about it," answered Garry. + +Lunch over, the effect of the food on the old man being to cheer him up +and strengthen him, the fire was stamped out, and then Phil and Dick +proceeded to make a litter while Garry cut two strong, tough saplings to +make the handles. + +They made the litter by taking off their coats and buttoning them +securely. Then the coats were turned inside out, so that the arms were +inside the jackets. Through the arms were thrust the two saplings, +which had been cut sufficiently long to allow them to project a foot and +a half or so beyond the two coats. A blanket was then laid atop the +coats, and the litter was ready. + +Dick and Garry took the first turn at carrying, while Phil went ahead +carrying the rifles. Every few moments, the third boy would relieve one +of the others. Frequent rests were necessary, and they were not able to +make much more than a mile an hour, so that it was late afternoon when +they finally reached the outskirts of the town. + +"There's my home there, the white house set back in from the street," +said Everett. "I am afraid you boys are rather tuckered out." + +As a matter of fact they were, for the four-mile hike with the burden on +the litter was no mean task. + +They had hardly turned in the gate, when a pretty girl of about +seventeen or eighteen rushed out to meet them. When she saw her +grandfather on the stretcher, she turned pale, and in anxious voice +asked what the matter was. + +"Don't be alarmed, Ruth, I just had a little accident in the woods and +broke my arm. Otherwise I'm fit as a fiddle. Now don't worry, and hold +the door open for these young men to carry me in and then run over and +get Dr. Mills." + +Once in the house, Mr. Everett was laid on a couch and made as +comfortable as possible for the time being. + +"This is my granddaughter, Ruth," he told the boys. "In the excitement +of the day, I quite forgot to ask your names, so you will have to +introduce yourselves to her." + +This Garry, acting as master of ceremonies, did, and then the girl +hastened after the doctor. She returned with him in a few minutes, and +the physician promptly began his examination. + +He confirmed Garry's finding that the leg was not broken, and +complimented him on his neat job of putting on the temporary splint. +Since the break was simple, and the old man protested that a little +twinge of pain was nothing, the arm was immediately set and the +permanent splints set in place. + +The chums assisted the doctor to get Mr. Everett to bed, and then bade +him goodbye, promising to look in very soon to see how he was getting +along. + +"Don't fail to call on me, boys, if I can be of any service to you," +were his parting words. + +"Well, sir, we may do that very soon," said Garry. + +"You'll find that I won't fail you," promised Everett. + +As they were on their way out, the girl stopped the chums and expressed +her gratitude for their rescue of her grandfather. + +"I don't know how to thank you boys. Just think, if you hadn't come +along, he might have died out there in the woods before someone found +him, and he is the only relative I have. I am sure there is nothing I +wouldn't do for you that was within my power," she declared. + +"Do you really mean that, Miss?" said Garry. + +"Indeed I do. Just let me know what I can do," she answered eagerly. + +"I don't want you to think I am asking this as a matter of reward," said +Garry, "but it's something that is very vital to the success of our +mission here. I feel that we can be frank with you, since your +grandfather was once in the Customs service. I can't explain just now +how we are connected with the matter, but you could do us and the State +a great service if you could tell us if you know anything about +smuggling operations here. You are practically the only one that we have +given so much confidence, and I am sure that you will respect it." + +"Oh, of course I will. I don't know who or what you are, but I am sure +you are all right. As for what you ask, I don't know much about it, +although Granddaddy has confided his suspicions to me many times. +Unfortunately, though, they are only suspicions, and he has never been +able to get any tangible evidence, for they cover their tracks very +cleverly, and especially with him, since they know that he was once in +the service. I can tell you this, though, keep sharp watch of a man +called Lafe Green. He is a great big red-haired man, and he hangs around +that restaurant that is run by a man called Joe Canuck. It's practically +the only one in town, perhaps you know of it." + +"We do know of it, and we sure thank you for what you have told us, and +you will never regret it. Sometime we can tell you more about all this. +I hope we shall see you again, for we will come at the first opportunity +to see how your grandfather is getting along," said Garry, as the three +took their leave, bidding goodbye to the pretty girl. + +Out on the street again, Dick could scarcely restrain himself from doing +a war dance on the sidewalk. + +"Gosh," he ejaculated exuberantly. "Talk about casting your bread upon +the waters and having it come back a whole shipload of angel cake. This +is luck. Boys, at last we're on the track of the smugglers, and if the +firm of Boone, Durant and Wallace doesn't run them down, I'll go back +home and spend the rest of the summer working in a grocery store or on a +farm pulling weeds!" + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +THE COMING OF THE BEAR. + + +"Listen fellows, let's duck back towards the woods for a bit and have a +council of war," ordered Garry. "There will be less chance of our being +observed there, and no chance of our being overheard." So saying, Garry +led the way back for about half a mile. + +"We must strike while the iron's hot, and it seems to be hot tonight. +What with the young lady's information about watching this Lafe Green +person, and Dud's hint that there was something brewing, it strikes me +that we ought to get going. There's only one logical place to start, and +that is this restaurant," said Garry emphatically. + +"We must understand one thing, though. There's an element of danger +connected with this, and I don't want to lead anyone into anything that +I wouldn't do myself, so I offer to make the first reconnoitre," he +concluded. + +"That's mighty white, Garry, but I want to make a suggestion. I'm not +looking for any personal glory out of this, but I declare I think I am +the logical person to go. You know I am the only one of us who can talk +French and understand it, and as we have already had one clue in that +manner, there's every chance that others may follow in the same way, so +I move that I go." + +Garry saw the force of the argument, and as Phil was backed up by Dick, +decided that after all this was the best move. + +A plan of campaign was hastily drawn up. It was decided that the other +two should return to the lean-to, and there wait Phil's return. Phil's +rifle and knapsack were to be carried back by his chums, while Phil was +to take the little automatic that Garry had purchased at Bangor. + +"This is only as a measure of safety, Phil," said Garry. "And under no +condition show it or use it except as a last resort. Now there's one +other thing. We want to keep a check for safety's sake on your +movements, yet you want to have time enough to follow up any clue that +may arise. So let's make it a point that you be back at the lean-to by +sundown tomorrow night. If you are not there by then, we will know that +you are in some sort of a pickle and plan to come to your aid. Don't try +to do anything single handed; your mission tonight is to find out what +is going on if you can. If you can return tonight, so much the better. +From now on too, we'll establish a watch, taking two hour sentry duty. +There may be no need of it yet, but we will get back in the habit of it, +and an ounce of precaution is worth a pound of cure. Now go to it, old +topper, and the best of luck." + +The chums shook hands, and then went their different ways, Garry and +Dick back to the lean-to in the woods, and Phil back to town. + +Just before he left the fringe of woods that bordered the edge of the +town, Phil did a peculiar stunt that was later to stand him in good +stead. Taking his knife from his pocket, he made a small slit in the +under side of his coat lapel. In this he slipped the knife, and then +held the coat at arm's length to see if there was any lump observable. +The coat, made as it was of thick khaki, showed no noticeable +difference. Satisfied with the appearance, he slipped his coat on again, +and went his way. Phil was thinking of the time he had been left chained +to the tree in the woods by Anderson and LeBlanc, with no weapon with +which he could free himself, and he was determined that this would never +happen again if he could prevent it. He was satisfied that the ruse of +hiding the knife would not be discovered were he captured, unless his +coat was taken away from him. + +In a short time Phil had approached the restaurant, and entered. Taking +his seat on one of the high stools at the lunch counter, he ordered some +supper. The bearded Frenchman, evidently the proprietor, who approached, +shot at him a question in French. + +Phil know perfectly well that he was asking him in French what he +wanted, but he just stared blankly at the man, who, believing that he +did not understand, spoke to him in broken English. + +"M'sieu does not spik the French, hein?" + +Phil shook his head and repeated his order in English. Satisfied, the +man turned to the stove back of the counter and dished up a mess of +piping hot baked peas, cooked with bacon instead of pork. This is a +favorite dish with the French of Canada. A great slab of johnny-cake and +a cup of hot coffee seemed to be the only thing on the bill of fare. For +dessert there was apple pie and cheese. + +The whole was put before him at once, and Phil, with the appetite of a +healthy boy, fell to and soon dispatched the food. He ate a second +portion of the peas, which evidently pleased the proprietor who was at +once cook and waiter. + +Following the order for the second helping, the big Frenchman entered +into conversation with Phil. He seemed satisfied with Phil's answer to +his query as to what he was doing in those parts, when Phil told them +he was camping there for a short time, preparatory to a fishing +expedition. + +Supper over, Phil walked over to one of the tables, where he found a +week-old Bangor paper, and a Canadian French paper. Carefully avoiding +taking up the French paper and thus betray his knowledge of the +language, he took the _Commercial_ and read steadily for an hour or +more. During this time the place was steadily filling. Men came in, got +their supper, and took seats at the many tables scattered about. Later +others came in, evidently villagers who made a sort of a clubhouse of +the place. A half a dozen card games were in progress, and at three of +the tables couples were playing checkers. By this time Phil had read all +the news and was beginning on the advertisements in order to have some +ostensible purpose in remaining where he knew nobody. Another half hour +passed, and then he decided to get up and watch one of the checker games +that was in progress near him. + +Both of the players were fairly expert, and he watched for some time +with great interest. During the second game, one of the players made a +bad move and let his opponent sweep off three pieces and land in the +king row to boot. As he made the move, Phil could not repress a little +gasp. The lucky opponent looked up at Phil and grinned, and Phil smiled +back. The game was lost for the first man, and his friend proceeded to +rub it in a little. + +"I declare, Hoke, you're gettin' worse every day. You ought to see that +I would clean the board if you made that move. I declare, I bet this +young fellow here can beat you." + +"Bet a doughnut he can't," said the man called Hoke. + +"Take ye up on that, an' if you lose I'll make you walk home and get +one. They never have 'em here at night. What say, young feller, will ye +give this feller a trimming for me?" + +"Why, yes, I would like to play a game," said Phil. He wanted to play +for two reasons. First, it would give him a legitimate excuse for +loitering there a little longer without attracting attention, and +secondly, he really enjoyed a good game of checkers. + +Phil disposed of his man very easily, for he was a remarkably good +player. At the conclusion of the game, the defeated man demanded that +his friend try a game with Phil, and accordingly changed places with +him. Here was a harder opponent, and Phil was devoting his entire +attention to giving him a run for the honors of the game, when the door +opened and a couple of men slouched in. + +Phil's heart stood still, for they were two of the trio of tramps they +had caught in their shack outside their home town. Phil was in a +quandary. He couldn't leave the game and rush out of the restaurant +without doing the very thing he least wanted to, that was draw +particular attention to himself. + +There was only one thing to do, and that was stay and face the music. He +doubted if the tramps would start anything in the room, but would +probably wait outside and seek to wreak revenge on him for being one of +those instrumental in their capture that time in the shack. + +Then to his great surprise, they passed by him, giving him only a casual +glance, but no sign of recognition. + +Phil breathed a sigh of relief, and then reflected that it was not +strange that they failed to recognize him. In the first place, they +would hardly expect to find him in that northern town, and then his +khaki clothes were of the sort that is common to the woods, but not to +the town where their arrest had taken place. So it was a simple matter, +their not knowing him. + +He turned his attention to the game again, and had made two moves, when +a phrase, spoken in French by a man at the table in back of him, +startled him into alert attention. + +The man had said: + +"Well, Pierre, 'The Bear' will be here in a few moments now." + +What was he to do? "The Bear" could be no one but LeBlanc. + +He must get out of the room at all costs, but how was he to avoid +running into LeBlanc? + +There was precious little chance that the guide would fail to recognize +him, and he knew that he would be in real danger here among the +half-breed's friends and cronies. + +Then, too, he must make his exit naturally, so as to arouse no suspicion +in the minds of the checker players, who might be foes just as well as +friends. + +Already the watcher at the table was demanding they finish the game +quickly so that he could have another chance at Phil. + +His mind working rapidly, Phil figured out what the best course to +pursue would be. The main point was to get out of the restaurant, but +there was the danger that at the precise moment of his exit, Jean +LeBlanc might be coming in the door. + +It was not wholly fear of LeBlanc that made him want to escape +unobserved, he didn't want the treacherous guide to know that he or his +chums were in the vicinity, for it would immediately destroy their +usefulness; at least it would hamper their work to a great degree. + +While his opponent studied the board, Phil was looking about the room. +At one side of the room there was a window looking out on a side street +or alley, Phil did not know which. Right beside it was a door. He +decided that this was the best means of exit, for in the dark alleyway +he could pass anyone coming in without their seeing who it was, and once +in the shadows, he could look up and down the street, and make his +escape as soon as it looked clear. + +The immediate thing to be done was to bring the game to a close. His +opponent had made his move, and concentrating on the game, Phil saw an +obscure move, which, once made, would give his opponent the game. +Without further hesitation, he made it, and the other player seized the +advantage and won the game. + +While he was chuckling over his victory, the other man was demanding a +return chance at Phil, but the Boy Ranger forestalled this by pleading a +headache from the heat and the smoke-filled room. + +"Tell you what," he said. "You two play a game, while I go outside for a +few minutes and clear my head, then I'll come back and take you on +again." + +This proved to be agreeable to the others, and in another moment they +were absorbed in the start of the game. Carefully edging his way over to +the side door, he waited till no one was looking at him, then opened the +door and slipped through--not into an alleyway, but into another room! + +He had been fooled by the close proximity of the window, never dreaming +that there was an ell-like extension beginning flush at the side of the +window. Hastily glancing about, he saw another door, and running to it, +threw it open, only to have Jean LeBlanc enter just as he opened it. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +TRAPPED. + + +Phil's hand darted to his pocket for the automatic that Garry had given +him before he started on his mission, but he was not quick enough, for +in less than an instant LeBlanc had leaped upon him, pinioning his arms +to his side. Phil was helpless in the grasp of the half-breed. LeBlanc +called in French for help, and in another moment the black moustached +proprietor came rushing in. + +While LeBlanc held Phil, Canuck searched his pockets, taking from him +what little money he had, and the automatic revolver. Evidently +suspicious that Phil might have some other weapon concealed about him, +they made him unlace and take off his shoepacks; here, of course, they +found nothing, but fortunately they did not notice the secret pocket +that he had made in the lapel of his coat, in which reposed safely his +heavy scout knife. + +In the meantime, the French restaurant proprietor and LeBlanc carried on +a swift conversation in French, all of which, of course, Phil +understood perfectly. + +"We shall take him up to the room on the third floor that we know about, +and keep him there until we shall have decided what to do with him." + +Phil was unceremoniously hustled out through the rear door, and with a +couple of brutal shoves, was taken up the dark stairway. Still, a second +flight he went up, and was then drawn into a dark room. Just before they +closed the door upon him, his heart sank, as he heard LeBlanc tell the +proprietor: + +"This is the fourth time that I have met this boy. He seems fated to +work me harm. Once I left him for dead in the Great Woods, but he seemed +to have a charmed life and escaped. This time, I promise you he will +not." + +So saying, they slammed the door, and Phil heard the rasp of the heavy +lock being turned in the door. Groping his way about, he found that the +room was bare of all furnishing, except for a decrepit old cot, and a +rough table. Feeling for the top of the table, he discovered there was +an old bottle, with a good-size piece of candle in it. He went through +his pockets carefully to see if by chance his searchers had left behind +them a stray match, but his hunt was not rewarded. + +There was nothing to do but make the best of the darkness. He groped +his way to the cot and sat down, taking stock of the situation. There +seemed to be nothing he could do except to wait for the morning, +provided that he would be allowed to see the morning come, then to look +about the room in search of some method of escaping. Thanks to his +foresightedness, he still had his knife, and this might prove to him to +be salvation as far as escape was concerned. He laid down on the cot, +thinking, and after nearly a half of an hour jumped to his feet, +inwardly calling himself names for his forgetfulness. + +Not until that moment had he remembered that he generally carried +several matches, wrapped in a bit of oil silk and tucked under his hat +band. It was a trick that Garry had taught him when they first went in +the woods. + +Fumbling inside of the hat band, he came upon a little package of half a +dozen matches, still securely wrapped in the oiled silk in which he had +placed them, almost a month before. + +"What a fool I was," he muttered to himself. "All that time that I was +tied and chained to a tree by LeBlanc and Anderson, I had those matches +and never once thought of them." + +So saying, he carefully struck one of the matches and lighted the +candle. He now had a chance to examine the prison room that he was in. +Save for the door, the only other means of egress from the room was a +solitary window, but a quick examination showed that escape in this way +was impossible, for the shutter of the window, instead of being composed +of wood was made of a solid piece of iron. + +Phil then examined the door, finding that this was evidently made of +several thicknesses of hard wood, so thick was it, that when he rapped +strongly with his knuckles, it gave forth a dead heavy sound, showing +that it was unusually thick. It was so thick and hard, in fact, as to +defy any effort to cut it through with his knife. Phil hardly knew what +to do; all way of escaping seemed barred to him. + +There was one chance, however, and that was a possibility of attacking +whatever guard came to bring him food in the morning, for he did not +believe that they intended to starve him to death. + +Grasping the bottle that held the candle, he went over and made an +examination of the cot. It was an old folding cot, made of fairly heavy +cross braces, bound with substantial pieces of metal. + +Phil unshipped his knife from the coat lapel cache, and immediately set +to work to whittle away one of the cross pieces that supported the cot. +He whittled in such a fashion that on one end remained one of the iron +braces, screwed securely to the stick of wood. Hefting it in his hand, +and then swinging it about his head, Phil discovered that he had a +weapon that would almost fell an ox. His plan was to wait beside the +door in the morning until whoever brought him his food should have +unlocked the door, then to strike him down, and while he was stunned, +take a chance on escaping from the house. + +The broken cot did not offer a very comfortable sleeping place, but Phil +propped it up the best he could and lay down upon it. It was too +rickety, so stripping the tattered blanket from it, he lay upon the +floor. + +This was no hardship to him, as he had spent many a night of his life +sleeping upon the hard, solid earth, which is not a whit softer than a +flooring made of pine boards. + +As he lay dozing, he almost fancied that he could hear a very low murmur +of voices. Telling himself that it was only his imagination, he rolled +over again and tried to sleep, but the excitement and the uncertainty +made him sleepless. Again he heard a low mutter of subdued voices, then +he sat straight up in his blanket. + +Since he could not sleep, he felt that he might as well be busying +himself about something, so drawing a blanket over to a corner of the +room, he laid down flat upon it, and with the drill punch on his scout +knife, began to bore a hole in the floor. He remembered that the +ceiling of the restaurant was made of boards and not of plaster, and he +decided that this was probably the case all through the rest of the +house. There was probably a double thickness of boards, and the longer +he drilled the more certain he became of this. + +Finishing, he could feel that he was within the merest fraction of an +inch of piercing the double thickness of boards, through which he had +carefully bored his way. Instead of piercing his knife blade straight +through the thin bit of board that was left, he began to enlarge the +hole that he had already made. When he had done this to his +satisfaction, he blew out the candle, for he wanted no stray gleam of +light to betray to whoever was in the room below him his course of +action. + +Having extinguished the light, very carefully and slowly, he dug away +tiny splinters of the thin bit of board that separated him from hearing, +and perhaps seeing, what was taking place in the room below. As he made +the hole, the murmur of voices became more and more distinct. At last, +the sharp point of the knife pierced the board, and then working as +carefully as though he were handling the most deadly explosive, he began +to enlarge the little chink that he had made. + +Having completed his peep hole, he glued his eye to it, but was unable +to make out anyone in the room below him. Evidently, the occupants of +the room were outside of his field of vision. Giving up trying to see +what was going on, he lay on his side with his ear pressed closely to +the aperture that he had made. He could distinguish LeBlanc's voice, +also that of the French restaurant proprietor. There seemed to be two +other men in the room, for he could make out the difference in voices, +but they were strangers to him. Evidently, the two strangers could not +speak French, for LeBlanc and the proprietor were talking in English. + +Phil could hear the conversation as plainly as though he were sitting in +the room with them. As soon as he discovered what they were talking +about, he became very much excited, for they were discussing the details +of a fur smuggling trip that was to take place that very week. Phil +thought to himself, that if he could only get out of the prison room, he +had the most valuable clue that he or his chums had yet discovered. He +thought it strange that they made no remark about the deserted logging +camp, for Phil was certain that this was the headquarters, or at least a +rendezvous, of the smuggling band. + +Phil had wondered that he had seen or heard nothing of Anderson, for he +expected wherever LeBlanc would be, the other would be found also. +However, from the conversation he learned that Anderson had already +crossed the border line, and was even then busily engaged in buying +quantities of furs from Canadian trappers. When they had consulted the +minor details of the trip, without, however, mentioning at what point +they crossed the border, much to Phil's disappointment, LeBlanc then +told his companions that as soon as they had completed the deal in furs, +that he had something very much bigger that would net them all a +fortune. In fact, he told them, he would not have bothered with the fur +trip at all, except that he and Anderson had used practically all their +available money in buying furs. + +From the bustling sounds of the room below, the others evidently crowded +nearer to hear what this new scheme was, when suddenly there was a +commotion at the door of the room below, and a voice was heard, +demanding admittance. + +"Ha," exclaimed Jean LeBlanc, "that is P'tit Vareau. I don't like him, +and he shall not come in with us on this big scheme. Tomorrow night I +shall discuss it with you at our friend M'sieu Henderson's place. Now, +you may let him in, but not a word of anything other than about the +furs." + +Vareau made his entrance, and there was some desultory conversation, and +then all of them left the room. + +Phil's heart was bounding in excitement. Here he had all the details of +the plot at his finger ends, and all that needed to be done was to keep +close tabs on LeBlanc, and he would lead them direct to the headquarters +of the smuggling crew. + +Truly his attempt at escape next morning must not fail. + + * * * * * + +Garry and Dick, back at the lean-to, were discussing the possibility of +Phil's stumbling upon important information, not knowing at that moment +he was a prisoner, trapped in the old French restaurant, and in the +hands of the most vengeful enemy that the three possessed. + +Throughout the night they kept up a constant sentry duty, not that they +really expected anything to happen, but just because it seemed to be +better on the safe side--a case of rather be safe then be sorry. Morning +came, and they prepared their breakfast. They did not dare to stir from +the camp, for there was no telling at what moment they might get a +message from Phil, telling them that their help was needed. + + * * * * * + +Despite the fact that he was worried, Phil slept the normal sleep of a +healthy boy, awaking in the morning both hungry and thirsty. He +immediately secured the iron tipped stick that he had fashioned the +night before, and took his place at the door, ready to strike down +whoever entered, and make a dash for liberty. Nearly two hours elapsed, +and the strain was beginning to tell upon him, when he heard a sound of +shuffling footsteps outside the door. Grasping his club firmly in his +hand, he prepared to act, but to his keen disappointment, however, the +door was opened only an inch or two, and he heard LeBlanc's voice, +bidding him out. Through the crack of the door, he could see LeBlanc's +form, and immediately in back of him, that of the big restaurant keeper. + +He made no response for a moment, and suddenly the door was thrown open, +and LeBlanc and the proprietor came rushing in. LeBlanc seemed to be +possessed of second sight, for he seemed to know that Phil had +contemplated an attack on whoever came in the room, and he foiled this +by rushing at Phil, jamming him close to the wall, and making it +impossible for him to raise his club, much less than to use it. + +"Aha, mon brave would fight would he? I thought so, and came prepared to +care for you. We will see that he has nothing left to fight with." + +Bidding his companion in French remove the cot, LeBlanc cast a hasty +glance around the room to see if anything was left that by any artifice +whatsoever could be converted into a weapon. Phil had carelessly thrown +the blanket over the hole that he had made on the floor, and in a fold +had tucked away the piece of candle. + +LeBlanc paid no attention to the blanket, seeming to think that with the +cot broken the boy had slept on the floor. The table and the empty +bottle that had served as a candlestick were removed, and then food and +water was brought to him and left there. + +"Tonight I am ver' busy, but tomorrow you shall be taken from here in a +trunk, and you shall be dropped in the river. How you will like that, +hein?" and with an evil grin he left the room, leaving Phil again in the +darkness to eat his food as best he could. + +Phil rescued his candle, and lighted it to eat by, and then carefully +extinguished it, for he knew it would not last a great while were it to +burn steadily. + +He had one wild idea left. It was dangerous in the extreme, it might +mean death, but it was death if he stayed in the clutches of the +renegade half-breed. This idea was to try to set fire to the door, in +the hopes that it would burn enough without setting the whole room on +fire until he could battle his way out. + +This idea he meant to carry out only as a last resort. There were two +chances left to him. One was that he could find some other method of +escape, the other was that his chums would come to his rescue when he +failed to return at the appointed hour of sundown. + +At any rate, he would wait until the last minute before trying his +desperate scheme. LeBlanc, he knew, would be gone the greater part of +the night, for they did not plan to start until almost midnight for Lafe +Green's house. + +The long day dragged on and he got hungry and thirsty. No one came +again, evidently one meal was all that he was to have. Presently he +decided that it must be past sundown, and he lay down on the blanket, +and before he knew it dropped off to sleep. + +Then out of a sound and dreamless sleep he heard a number of mysterious +tappings on the iron shutter that guarded the window. + +He ran to the window and listened again. + +Yes, there they were, being repeated in a sort of a staccato yet +rhythmic measure. + +Suddenly it dawned on him what it was. The tappings were dots and dashes +of the International Code, and they were spelling out: + + P-H-I-L- P-H-I-L- P-H-I-L- + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +CHUMS TO THE RESCUE. + + +To return now for a while to the lean-to we shall see what happened when +sundown came and no Phil appeared. + +"Oh, Dick, I'm sorry I let Phil go alone. We should have gone together, +then there would have been less chance of anything having happened," +said Garry brokenly. + +"Cheer up, Garry, it's only a little past sundown, perhaps he didn't +allow himself enough time to get back here, may have thought the +distance was less than it was. You know he has been over this distance +only two or three times. We'll give him a little while longer and then +set our heads together and see what we can do. I have a lot of +confidence in Phil, he manages to pull himself out of his scrapes pretty +well most of the time," comforted Dick, although he too feared that Phil +had gotten into some scrape that proved too much for him. Dick's fear +was that Phil had run afoul of the tramps, for neither he nor Garry +knew that LeBlanc was in that vicinity. + +Nearly an hour passed, and then Garry sprang to his feet. + +"There's no use waiting any longer. Phil would move heaven and earth to +keep up to the agreement that was made as to the hour of return. Now we +must do something. Get your rifle and lariat and hatchet. Stick the +handle of the hatchet inside your trousers so that it will not be so +evident, or better yet, we can do it just before we get to town. Then, +too, we can coil our riatas over one shoulder, and slip our coats on +over them. In that way we won't attract so much attention. The rifles +won't appear to be out of place, for it would be only natural that we +should take them, seeing we are supposed to be campers who will have to +go back through the dark woods to camp. First, before we start, take our +knapsacks, there's nothing in them that we will need, and cache them in +the branches of a nearby tree. Then we'll leg it to town just as fast as +we can." + +Before Dick cached the knapsacks, Garry poured all the water in the +canteens on the fire, thoroughly extinguishing it. Then in a trice the +knapsacks were hidden in a tree, and the pair were ready to start for +town. + +Garry set a terrific pace at first, until Dick toned him down with: + +"Look here, Garry, we don't want to get to town all tuckered out. If we +do we will be useless if it comes to a pinch. I'm just as anxious about +Phil as you are, but we must conserve our strength. We may need it +before the night is over." + +"Guess you're right old chap, but I just keep thinking that minutes may +mean more right now than hours would some other time." Nevertheless he +moderated his pace, and in a trifle under an hour they were in the town +of Hobart. + +Dick was for making at once to the restaurant to institute inquiries as +to whether or not Phil had been there and when he was last seen. Garry +by this time had grown calmer and cooler and again assumed the +leadership. + +"That would be a mighty foolish thing to do. If Phil has gotten into a +scrape, there is just as good a chance that it was in that place as out +in the street. You know we were warned that it wasn't a regular drawing +room by any means. I have an idea, and I think you'll agree with me that +it is a good one. We'll hike to the home of the chap we towed home with +the broken arm the other day, and see if his granddaughter can give us a +tip of any sort as to what sort of a place the restaurant is and what +sort of a chap runs it and who hangs out there. Of course there is one +great chance that Phil stumbled onto a real clue and followed it, but +that is very remote, for I don't believe Phil would disobey an order +that had been agreed upon by all as a safety measure." + +"Jolly good idea, Garry," said Dick. "Let's go." + +In a few moments they were at Mr. Everett's house, and were glad to find +a light still burning there. They knocked on the door, and Ruth herself +answered the knock. + +"Goodness gracious," she exclaimed, in a surprised tone. "I never +expected to see you boys at this time of night. Where's your other +companion?" + +"That's just what we would give anything in the world to know right +now," remarked Garry. "We've come to you to see if you can give us a bit +of help or information." + +Then rapidly he told of the plans they had made to try and get evidence, +and the agreement that Phil was to have returned at sundown that night. + +"You say he went to the restaurant? Oh, that's a wicked place, and if +he's gotten into trouble, that place is just where it would have been +likely to happen. The owner of that place is dreadful. He helps those +smugglers and sells contraband rum, and he and that half-breed LeBlanc +have been suspected of several crimes along the border." + +"What's that you say?" burst out Garry. "LeBlanc, you don't mean Jean +LeBlanc?" + +"Why, yes, do you know him or know of him?" returned the girl, amazed at +Garry's sudden outburst. + +"Yes, to our sorrow we do. I haven't time to tell you all we know of him +now, except that he hates us like poison, since we were instrumental in +having him jailed for kidnapping once, and then he broke out. Is that +diabolic villain in town?" + +"He is, I saw him only this afternoon. He used to be around here a great +deal, for his original home is in a town not far on the other side of +the border. I am so sorry to say it, but if your chum was in the +restaurant and LeBlanc saw him there, he could have made him prisoner +with the greatest of ease, for he has many friends there, and there are +many who would do anything that rascally proprietor told them to." + +"Does your grandfather know the ins and outs of that house?" inquired +Garry. + +"Yes, he does, but he is asleep, and as he had a bad day, the doctor +says that he is not to be waked up under any circumstances, so I'm +afraid you'll have to put up with my help, such as it is. All you have +to do is wait till I run across the street and get Mr. Allen to come in +and watch granddaddy and then I'll be ready to help you." + +"You're a brick, Miss," said Garry enthusiastically, "but we couldn't +think of letting you in for any danger." + +"I guess you don't know the border girls, sir. We aren't afraid of +anything in the woods or the towns. We've been brought up to take care +of ourselves. Besides, I've heard Granddad tell about the Rookery, as he +calls it, many times. An' I've an idea that if your chum is held a +prisoner in that house, I know just where it is. So just you let me be +your guide for a little while." + +So saying, she ran across the street and soon returned with an elderly +man, the Mr. Allen of whom she spoke, and then bidding the boys wait a +minute, she dashed upstairs. In an incredibly short time she was back +again, clad in a khaki skirt, high boots, and a heavy sweater. A knit +tam was perched on her head, making her quite one of the most attractive +girls the boys had ever seen. + +"I'll lead you around to the back of the restaurant, where there won't +be much chance of you're being observed. There's one window that has +always puzzled me. It has a great heavy shutter on it, and I don't ever +remember seeing it opened. I've always imagined it was the dungeon keep +of the place, like the ones they used to have in old castles, long years +ago." + +Evidently, thought Garry, the young lady was of an extremely romantic +turn of mind. + +In a very few minutes she had led them through a dark back street to +where they could command a view of the rear of the restaurant. + +"There, wait till the moon comes out from behind that cloud. Now. See +that window there all barricaded? That's what I think is the prison room +for the Canuck's house," said Ruth. + +The boys looked and saw the sinister window, which although they did not +know it then, was the one to the room in which Phil was at that moment +soundly sleeping, worn out by the mental and physical strain that he had +been under for the past twenty-four hours. + +Under the shuttered window ran a dark alleyway, and the other windows in +that side of the house were dark and deserted looking. On the other side +of the alley was a low blacksmith shop. + +"Well, Garry, if you don't mind my calling you that, have you decided on +what you are going to do?" asked Ruth. "I am afraid that you haven't +much chance of getting upstairs if you go into the restaurant, for even +if the proprietor is not there he has a couple of strong, ugly +assistants, and if you tried to force your way upstairs at the point of +a rifle, you would only bring the whole place down on you like a swarm +of hornets. It's up to us to think out some scheme." + +"I think I have that worked out now. See that chimney on the roof? It is +just over that dark shuttered window. Now what I propose is this: Dick +and I will get up on the roof of the blacksmith shop here, and from +there we can throw a lariat up over the chimney, then one of us will go +up hand over hand and call to Phil to see if he is in that room. If he +is, we'll have him out as soon as you could say Jack Robinson. Miss +Ruth, I'm going to ask you to stand guard for us, and if danger +approaches, give us some sort of a signal. I suppose you can imitate a +whippoorwill?" asked Garry. + +"Indeed I can," and in a soft tone she proved it to the satisfaction of +both Dick and Garry. + +"There, then that much is accomplished. Believe me, I'll be overjoyed if +I hear Phil's voice in answer to my hail," said Garry. + +"Say, listen Garry. A fine business you'd make of calling through a +thick shutter. First place maybe he couldn't hear it, but it's a cinch +that everyone on the street will. Use your imagination. What did you +ever learn wigwagging and signalling and things for? When you get to the +window, take your knife and rap out a message in International Code. +That will make no noise down here, but will penetrate into the room, for +the shutter will form a natural sounding board." + +"Fine, Dick. I must be wool gathering not to have thought of that +myself. Now up on the roof with you." + +Bracing himself against the wall, Garry formed a step for Dick to crawl +up on the roof. Once arrived there, he lay flat, and extending his arms +over the edge, gave a pull, and helped Garry up. + +It took only four throws to settle the noose of the lariat over the +chimney, and they let it swing down on the side of the building. +Clambering down from the roof, Garry made ready to go up the rope. He +went up in agile fashion, and soon was tapping on the shutter. It was +his call that had awakened Phil. + +When Phil heard it, he fished out his knife, and soon they were carrying +on a brief conversation. Phil told Garry the inside of the shutter was +sheathed with iron. Also he told him if anything happened to prevent +them getting him out, to keep watch that night on Lafe Green's house, as +there was a great plot on the way. + +"I'll have you out in a jiffy now." Garry tapped the message to him, and +then he slid down the rope. Dick and Ruth came running to him. + +"Must have something to pry off that shutter with. My axe isn't strong +enough," he told them. + +"Oh, I know what," whispered Ruth. "I stumbled over something a minute +ago, and it was a crowbar. Darius, the blacksmith, must have forgotten +to take it in." + +"Fine, let's have your riata, Dick. There, I'll loop it around my wrist +and go back up the rope. In the meantime, you tie an end of it to the +crowbar and I can haul it up to me." + +So saying, Garry swarmed up the rope again. Arriving at the height of +the window, he manoeuvered until he had twisted the free end of the rope +around his foot several times, thus preventing himself from slipping. + +Then he set to work to pry the shutter loose. Fortunately it did not +long resist. + +"Look out below," he warned softly, and with a loud thud the shutter +fell into the alley below. Phil was waiting in the window. + +"Quick, slide down after me. Lose no time, Phil," ordered Garry. + +Down he went, the friction smarting his hands. In less time than it +takes to tell, Phil was down after him. "Never mind the riata on the +chimney. Away we go," said Garry. + +"Follow me," ordered Ruth, and she sped away followed by the three +chums. They were out of sight not a moment too soon, for as they turned +a corner, running across a lawn to deaden their footsteps, they heard a +howl of rage. + +"That's the proprietor's assistant. We just got away in time," said +Ruth. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +THE PLOT. + + +Ruth led the boys to her home, explaining that it would be better for +them to get out of sight as quickly as possible, lest they come upon one +of their enemies. + +"There's no danger of that just now," interrupted Phil, "for I know +where most of them are at just this minute. However, it would be nice if +you would take us to your home for a minute, for I think I have the +keynote to the whole business right now, and I would like to tell my +discoveries to Garry and Dick, and also get some directions from you, if +you will sit in our council of war and act as chief advisor." + +"Come right along. I must be getting back and let Mr. Allen go home. +Also Granddad might have waked up, and we can get his advice," said +Ruth. + +Silently they followed her home. They heard no suspicious sounds, so +evidently were not being followed. The chances were that the assistants +of the restaurant keeper did not know what to do, and as Phil knew, +none of the principals were about, and all that could be done was to +await their return. + +Garry hated to sacrifice his lariat, as it was an especially fine one, +but there was no help for it, since getting it down would have led them +all into certain capture again. + +Arriving at the house, Ruth found that her grandfather was still asleep, +while Mr. Allen was reading a magazine. He told Ruth that he would +finish his story before going home, so that gave her an opportunity to +hear Phil's story. + +Hastily Phil went over the details of what had happened to him since +leaving the boys the day before. + +"Now the key to the entire matter seems to be the conference that is +going to be held tonight at the home of this Lafe Green. He seems to be +the leader of the entire business, but LeBlanc holds some sort of +position of authority and will probably take the lead tonight, as he has +some sort of a scheme to tell the others. They are planning a fur +smuggling trip in the very near future, because Anderson is now in +Canada buying skins for the trappers. Just what this new plan is I don't +know, for just as he was going to tell it, a man called Vareau came to +the room, and LeBlanc shut up like a clam, seeming not to like him." + +"I wonder," said Garry reflectively, "if we couldn't get hold of this +Vareau of whom you speak, and tell him his partners are leaving him out +in the cold, and so get him to help us by leading us to the smuggling +lane?" + +"Don't have a thing to do with him," warned Ruth. "I don't blame LeBlanc +for not wanting him to come in on any big plan, for he is like a snake +and cannot be trusted even by those he is working for. Very likely if +you tried to get his help, he would turn around and betray you to +LeBlanc, hoping thereby to be taken in on the new plot." + +"That's sound advice," said Garry. "On the whole, it is better for us to +play a lone hand in this game, without taking anyone into our +confidence, except you, Miss Ruth, for without you we might have failed +tonight, and Phil lost forever." + +"The first thing to do is to find Lafe Green's house and see if there is +not some way in which we can get in to hear what they are planning. I +know of no other way in which we can get the proper information, unless +we appeal for help to the Customs authorities up the line, and have the +entire outfit seized, but that would do us very little good, for we have +no evidence on which to have them convicted, and besides that, we would +lose all chance of stopping whatever big scheme is now in the wind. I +suppose you can tell us where to find Green's house, can't you," asked +Phil, turning to the girl. + +"Yes, it is about a mile outside of the village in a lonely and secluded +place. It is ostensibly a farm that he lives on, but I guess farming +occupies but a small place in his mind. I only wish that I could go, and +I believe I will see if I can't get Mr. Allen to stay here so I can +guide you to the place," she answered, her eyes sparkling with the +thought of the possible adventure. + +But Garry firmly put his foot down on her running any chance of danger. + +"In the first place, it would be bad enough if we were strangers to this +crowd, for they would brook no interference with their plans, but there +is the added danger in the fact that LeBlanc already has it in store for +us, and anyone that takes side with us will meet with his vengeance and +that of his friends. Besides, it is almost midnight," he said. + +Reluctantly the girl gave up the idea of being in on the adventure. + +"But what are your plans now?" she asked. "It seems that you are going +on a wildgoose chase, just to go to Green's house, and besides, with all +his friends there, you would have no chance of escape if your presence +was discovered at the farm." + +"Well, to tell the truth, all we can do is go there and be guided by +circumstances. We cannot afford to let the slightest chance slip by us, +and that seems just now to be the scene of plot, in fact it is the crux +of the entire affair," responded Garry. + +At that minute, however, fortune favored them. Mr. Allen came down +stairs and told them that Mr. Everett was awake, and wanted the boys to +come upstairs a minute and say hello to him. + +After giving this message, he went home, and led by Ruth, the boys went +upstairs to see Mr. Everett. + +"Talk about luck!" whispered Garry to Dick. "Now we can get some real +dope on all this." + +Arriving at Mr. Everett's bedroom, they found him sitting up in bed with +a heavy blanket thrown around his shoulders. He expressed his pleasure +at seeing the boys again, and then inquired how it was that they +happened to be around at such a late hour. + +"Time is precious, so we'll have to give you an abbreviated account, +sir," said Garry. "Phil, here, was captured by LeBlanc, one of our most +vengeful enemies, and through the help of Miss Ruth here, we were able +to rescue him," and Garry briefly told how they had broken open the +window of the prison room, and released their chum. + +"Now we have found out that something is going to take place at Lafe +Green's house sometime after midnight, and it is imperative to our +success that we go there immediately and see what can be done to find +out what is being plotted. I am sure that we can put every trust in you, +so I am going to confide in you. We are at present doing some work for +the Customs authorities of the State, and as you are a former Customs +agent, we are asking you for whatever aid you can give us," concluded +Garry. + +"H'm," said Everett. "Seems to me you are pretty young to be engaged in +that kind of work. I suppose you have your credentials?" + +"Indeed we have," and Garry drew from the cunningly made pocket in the +waistband of his trousers the little gold shield that stamped them as +members of the service. + +"That is enough," said old Mr. Everett. "If it wasn't for my misfortune +in being laid up, I would be with you tonight and between us we would +have the goods on this outfit. As it is, you will have to take the +chance yourselves, for I believe I can tell you just what to do. Some +little time ago, I discovered a secret passage to Lafe Green's house. It +is unlikely that anyone else in the village outside of myself and Green +and his accomplices know about it. It wasn't built by Green, but by a +former owner of the farm, who was in the same nefarious business. It may +even be that Green does not know about it, although that is unlikely. +This passage leads from the barn to the house, and was used to store +contraband goods in. You see the stuff could be brought to the barn in a +load of hay, or wood, and no one be the wiser. Then it could be hidden +away in the secret passage, and a search party could look through the +house and barn till doomsday and never discover it. Then, too, if the +men were in danger of arrest, they could make their way to this passage, +and after nightfall escape by way of the barn, as the authorities would +of course have only the house under guard. + +"This passage is entered by moving a feed box that stands at the end of +the barn. When the box is moved away, you will see what appears to be +nothing more nor less than ordinary flooring, but if you look carefully +you will see a knot in one of the boards near the wall. Pry this out +with your knife, and you will then be able to lift the cunningly +contrived trap door. This leads to the passage, which is more than forty +feet long. The passage leads to the cellar of the house, entrance to the +house being made by moving the trapdoor upwards. This requires a little +effort, as it is covered by the dirt floor for three or four inches. In +this trap is a ring to lift it when you want to get back to the passage. +Once you have gotten through the trap, smooth the dirt back over it, +leaving a chip or something directly over the spot where the ring is so +you will waste no time in finding it when you want to go back. + +"I must tell you this, however; once you get in the house, you will be +in great peril, as these men are unscrupulous in the highest degree. +Green would be behind the bars long before this except for good luck and +the extreme precautions that he takes. Add to this the fact that many of +the people in this section see no harm in smuggling, and would never +give information even if they had it, and you can see how Green has so +long managed to escape paying the penalty for his misdeeds. Now that is +all I can tell you, and you had better be getting along on your work, as +it is now midnight, and it will take you at least fifteen minutes to get +to Green's barn." + +Mr. Everett concluded by giving them minute instructions as to how to +reach the farm of the suspected smuggler leader. + +"I know all this is dangerous," said Mr. Everett, "but you boys are now +working for your country, and as you have taken the responsibility you +must be prepared to carry it out to the end. For safety's sake, however, +I am going to propose the following measure. Come back to the house as +soon as you have either succeeded or failed in your mission. If you are +not here by six o'clock, I will take it on myself to summon help from +the Customs authorities up the line, or arm a posse here and search +Green's house. I hope that won't be necessary, for it would put an end +to discovering what is in the wind, but that is better than that you +boys should fall into trouble. Now God speed you on your way." + +They said goodbye to Mr. Everett, after shaking hands with him, and once +again hearing his wishes for good luck. + +Ruth led the way to the door, shyly adding her own wishes for their +success. + +"Now you are sure you know the way?" she asked, as she opened the door. +"I know I won't sleep a wink till you come back in the morning. Just +ring the bell whenever you get back, and I will let you in. Good luck to +you." + +Walking at a brisk pace, they started for Green's farm. There was no +moon, and it gave promise of rain, which suited the boys exactly, as +there was now little chance of a stray shaft of light disclosing their +presence when they arrived at their destination. At the end of fifteen +minutes they reached the farm, and carefully making their way across the +field, came to the barn, standing like a great black hulk. The boys +thrilled with excitement, for they felt they were on the last lap in the +search for the smuggler band, that it was their mission to put an end +to. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +DANGEROUS BUSINESS. + + +"Now fellows," whispered Garry, "duck around the side of the barn here, +while I tell you what I doped out as we walked along. Keep an eye out +for dogs." + +They followed Garry's lead around the barn. + +"Here's what I doped out. Only one of us can enter the house. To have +more do it might spell disaster to our plans, for in case of danger one +could find a hiding place where two could not. Two of us will go into +the barn, while one stays out here as guard. Once in the barn, the feed +box will be moved, and the one to enter the passage will do so, while +the other replaces the feed box, and rejoins the man on guard. It is now +twelve-thirty, and the man who enters the house ought to hear all that's +going on and be able to make a getaway in at least three hours and a +half, probably a lot sooner. That is allowing the men an hour or more +for talking, as they probably will take no longer, and two hours or two +hours and a half for everything to get quiet and allow the man in the +house to get away. Now to settle who goes into the house, we will follow +our custom of drawing lots. Phil is out, for he has already been in +danger once, and furthermore, he has had his share of adventure. That +leaves it up to either Dick or I to go in. Phil, get your knife out and +hold it in one of your hands. Then Dick and I will each choose a hand +and the one who guesses rightly will enter the passage." + +Phil did as he was bade, and then Garry told Dick to take first choice +of hands. + +"Right hand," said Dick, after a pause. + +"Garry goes," whispered Phil. "I had my knife in my left hand." + +Dick muttered a muffled exclamation of disappointment, for he had +counted on being the one to undertake the dangerous mission, but he +abided by the lot. + +Leaving Phil on guard outside the door, Garry and Dick noiselessly +rolled back one of the folding doors just enough to allow them to slip +through. + +The inside of the barn was as black as a pocket. Standing there for a +minute or two, the boys waited in silence. They could hear the uneasy +stamping of a horse, awakened probably by their entrance. + +After what they judged to be a safe interval, Garry snapped on his +flashlight, and threw the beam of light playing about the floor, +keeping it on only long enough to get a general impression of the +interior, and being careful not to allow its rays to strike upward lest +it be seen through a window. + +What they saw made it apparent that Mr. Everett's words about farming +playing a small part in Green's life proved true. There was a single +horse in the barn, and one good wagon. The farming implements appeared +to be suffering from long disuse. + +Garry located at the end of the barn the feed box that marked the +passage entrance. + +Hastening to it, they moved it forward, and there, as told them by +Ruth's grandfather, was the knot. Getting his knife out, Garry dug at +the knot which yielded to his efforts and came out. + +The trap was lifted, and Garry, shaking hands with Dick, made ready to +enter. A musty odor emanated from the passage, making it evident that it +had not been used for a long time. + +"Push the box back over the passage when I get in," he whispered to +Dick. "When I come to get out, I can tip it over when I push upward on +the trap. Now you hustle back out and rejoin Phil. Wait for me down the +road under that big elm tree that we passed on our way here. I noticed +that there was a field back of it, and in case you hear anyone coming +along, you can slip back into it and hide until he or they have passed +on. Now see you later," and snapping on his flashlight, went down the +crude ladder that gave entrance to the passageway. + +He waited at the bottom of this ladder until he heard the crunching +sound of the feed box being pushed back over the trap door. Then the +light of the flashlamp ahead of him in a dancing beam, his heart beating +rapidly with excitement, he pushed on. + +He was almost startled into an exclamation of dismay, as there came the +sound of a squeal, and a small form scurried across his feet. Then he +laughed with relief, for it was nothing more than a small rat. + +After walking what he judged to be about twenty feet through the +passage, which was shored up and roofed with timbers much after the +manner of a mine tunnel, he approached a spot where the passage widened, +and he found he was in a sort of room. + +At one side were a number of casks, but these were empty, as Garry found +when he stirred one of them with his feet. At the other side of the room +was a crude table, built of pine boards. On this table reposed a stack +of fine fur, roped into a bundle. Garry examined it and found the skins +to be those of fine seals, caught in Canadian waters, and destined to be +sent to New York and sold to some woman who would have no idea that the +law of the land had been broken by the making of the coat or neckpiece +that she would be wearing. + +They had been there for some time, Garry judged, for the dust was thick +enough to denote that no one had been there for some days. + +He pushed his way on through the passage, and came at last to the end. +There was a box to stand on so that one might get up high enough to get +a good purchase on the trap. + +Now came a crucial moment. There was no telling whether or not the +cellar was occupied. All that Garry could do was to push upward and +trust to chance. Very carefully and slowly he pushed upward. + +It required some exertion, but finally gave way. Pushing it three or +four inches, Garry paused, and both looked and listened. There was not a +sound, and no beam of light came to disclose the presence of anyone in +the cellar. + +Giving the trap a last upward fling, Garry was soon in the cellar. +Pressing the snap of his light so that it would continue to shine, he +covered the trap with the dirt, smoothing it with his hands so that it +would show no signs of having been recently displaced. + +The first step had been successfully negotiated. Now remained the +difficult task of getting upstairs and in a place where he could hear +what was being plotted by Green, LeBlanc and their friends. + +Walking as near the edge of the steps as he could, for it is at this +point that they are less apt to creak, he made his way up the cellar +stairs. + +Every step was now one of potential danger, for the throwing open of the +kitchen door would disclose his presence, and he would be trapped, for +there was no exit from the cellar except through the passageway, and he +knew that if he were discovered, some of the men would run to the barn +and guard that exit. His rifle had been left with the boys, for it would +only be a hindrance in his movements in getting into the house. + +After a few moments he reached the top of the stairs, and with his ear +pressed to the door, listened for sounds that would tell him whether or +not the kitchen was occupied. He heard nothing, and then bent to where +the latch pierced the door. He could see no bit of light shining through +the small crevice, and then carefully raised the latch, taking nearly a +minute to do so, that it might give no sharp, warning click. + +The latch once raised, he pushed the door open carefully, shoving it +barely a fraction of an inch at a time. + +After what seemed almost ages, Garry stepped into the kitchen. He knew +it was dangerous to press the button on his flashlamp, but there was +nothing else to be done, for he could not go moving through the dark, +taking the chance of crashing into a chair or table, and thus +advertising his presence in the house. + +Throwing the beam of light sweeping along the floor for an instant, and +concentrating with all his might, he impressed on his mind a mental +picture of the interior of the room, noting two doors and locating the +various pieces of furniture in the kitchen. + +His next act was to untie hastily the strings of his shoepacks, and +slipping out the footgear, knotted the laces and strung the shoepacks +about his neck. He was now able to move noiselessly. + +Standing silently, he listened. He could hear the murmur of voices +beyond one of the doors. His heart leaped, for there were probably the +plotters. He crept to the door, and listened, but could make out nothing +of what was being said. Only an indistinct murmur reached his ears. + +It would be foolhardy to try and open the door, for he could not hope to +do it without letting those in the room know it, even with all the luck +in the world. + +Garry was stumped. He began to wish that he had taken a chance and +approached the house from the outside, trusting to fortune to get to a +window through which he might both see and hear. + +The boy stood for a moment and debated as to what was the best course to +pursue, whether to go back through the passage and try and approach +from the outside, or what. + +Then he recollected the other door. Knowing that the construction of old +New England houses generally called for a front and back stairs, he +guessed that this other door would lead to the upper part of the house. + +Noiselessly crossing the floor, he cautiously opened the door, and found +that his guess was right, for a single flash of his lamp showed a flight +of stairs. + +His stockinged feet making no sound, he crept up the stairs. At the top +of the flight was another door, and opening this a bit at a time, he +entered the room. All was darkness and silence. + +He swept his flashlamp around the room, and made a discovery that +promised the means of hearing what was going on in the room the plotters +were in. + +In most small towns, and especially in farm houses, a furnace is an +unknown quantity. So to provide heat for the upper rooms without going +to the expense of getting extra stoves, holes about a foot in diameter +are cut through the ceiling, and an iron grating called a "register" is +installed. This allows the heat to mount to the upper rooms. + +Garry mentally estimated the location of the room he was in, and decided +that it was over the kitchen. Hence the next room on that floor must be +the one over that in which the conference of the smugglers was taking +place. + +Walking as though the floor were covered with eggs, he proceeded to the +other door of the room, and pursuing the same tactics of taking several +moments, cautiously opened the door. He found that he was in a bedroom. + +He stood stock still, and listened. + +The room was unoccupied, for there was no sound of breathing coming from +the direction of the bed. Deciding to get his bearings before going +further, he looked about. By this time his eyes had become accustomed to +the dark, and he did not make use of his lamp. A faint bit of light +proved to be coming through the window. Creeping across the floor, he +examined. It was open, for the night was warm. + +Outside the window was a great maple tree. One branch was almost on a +level with the sill and not more than two feet distant. + +This done, he searched for the light that would disclose the location of +the register, and his heart fell when he found nothing. It seemed as if +his carefully planned move had fallen like a house of cards. + +Since there was evidently no register in the room, it seemed safe to +flash his lamp. + +It must be explained that Garry's examination of the room occupied only +a matter of seconds. + +Just as he was about to press the button of the flashlight, he heard the +purring voice of LeBlanc, muffled and indistinct. + +With a thrill of excitement, he knew that there was a register in the +room after all. Getting down on his hands and knees, he felt about the +floor. Only the bare boards were his reward, until as he approached the +bed he felt a heavy rag rug. + +Feeling over this, he discovered it to be slightly raised in the middle. +Carefully rolling it back, he was rewarded by seeing light and hearing +the hum of voices. + +At last Garry was an unseen listener to the plot being hatched below! + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +THE RUSSIAN'S TALE. + + +Garry crawled under the bed, laying so that he could both look down into +the room and hear what was being said. Then he arranged the rug that it +could be flipped back into place in an instant. + +Then he peered down into the room below. One was Jean LeBlanc, who, of +course, he knew. The second man he placed as Lafe Green, a great hulk of +a man with flaming red hair. He recognized him from the description +given by Ruth. The other three were strangers. Two wore the ordinary +garb of the woods, but the third was dressed in well-made clothes. He +was a striking looking man with a lustrous black beard and moustache. + +As Garry listened, LeBlanc again took up the conversation. It seemed +that the details of the trip to bring the consignment of furs across the +border had been settled. Garry was sorry he was too late to hear this, +but of course there was no help. + +"Now we shall come to the main business of the evening, ma fren's. I +have already told you, this man, his name is Boris Borefski, who comes +from Russia with a great scheme, a fine scheme, oui, it is magnifique. +Beside it, the bringing of a few furs is nothing. Were it not for the +fact the furs have been bought, pouf! we should throw away the plan like +so many dead leaves. M'sieu Boris shall himself tell you his story. He +speaks not the English, so me, I shall act as the interpreter and tell +you what he says as he goes along. Eh bien, M'sieu, begin." + +Speaking rapidly in French, as many well educated Russians are able to +do, and being stopped occasionally by LeBlanc while a translation was +being made, Boris began: + +"My new acquaintance and already my good friend LeBlanc has told you +that I have a plan. True I have, one that will make for us all much +money. + +"I was for many years the private secretary to the Grand Duke Sidis in +Russia, a man immensely wealthy. Among his prized possessions were a +number of magnificent jewels. They were only second in value to those of +the Grand Duke Boris, cousin to the Czar. + +"Of course you know what happened during the war, how the masses arose +against the Czar and took the government away from the ruling classes. +At first all went well, and then the Bolshevists began their reign. +When the homes of the wealthy were raided and despoiled of their +valuables, my master confided in me, and together we contrived a secure +hiding place for the jewels. + +"To save my own life, I pretended to be one of the Bolshevists. But, +bah, they were nothing to me. All the time I thought and thought of the +magnificent jewels hidden away from the light of day where the Grand +Duke and I had placed them. + +"The more I thought, the more I pondered over why I should stay in that +land, or why I should continue to live a life of poverty. Confiding in +my brother, who had joined the Bolshevists as I had, merely to protect +his life, we decided that we should make a break for liberty, taking +with us the jewels of the Duke. + +"Scraping together all the money we could by any means whatsoever, we +took the gems one night and fled. Of the long trip across Siberia I +shall not bother to tell you; it is sufficient to say that we suffered +much. Finally we reached the end, and in a big Japanese fishing vessel +were brought to the western part of Canada. + +"In British Columbia we made an attempt to cross the border, but in some +way suspicion rested upon us, and again we fled. A Canadian Customs man +followed us all the way across Canada, but we managed to give him the +slip and we landed in the home town of my good friend LeBlanc. Fortune +favored us, for we made his acquaintance. + +"He has agreed that he will help us bring the jewels across the border, +and more than that, he will help us sell them in places he and his +companion Green know about. For all of you there is much pay if you +help. And that is all there is to tell you," concluded the Russian. + +Without waiting for any reply, the Russian fished in an inside pocket, +and brought out a small leather bag. + +"See, here is only one small part of the fortune," and as he spoke he +unloosed the string and shook out on the table a magnificent bracelet, +set with diamonds. + +In the light of the oil lamp that stood on the table, it flashed and +sparkled. The men gazed admiringly at it, and Garry himself could +scarcely restrain a gasp of astonishment. + +LeBlanc silenced the talk of the men and said: + +"We shall help this man in his work, for the pay will be great, very +great. The plans to be made are simple. Tomorrow night we shall bring +the furs over the regular route and store them in Green's place here +till our friends with whom we deal come after them. Saturday night when +all is quiet we shall bring the jewels here, where our friend will give +us as pay a share of the jewels." + +Turning to the Russian he explained something that Garry had wanted to +hear since he and his chums had started on their mission; this was the +location of the lane over which the stuff was brought. + +"We cross the border at a point almost on a line with Green's house +here, for then we can come down through the woods and across the fields +with little danger of being seen by anyone. Once we are here we are +safe, for Lafe here has a place to hide things that is beyond +discovery." + +Although pressed to stay for a while and join a card game that was about +to start, he refused, declaring that he was tired and needed sleep, and +would return to the place he was staying for the night, meaning, Garry +decided for himself, the restaurant and rooming house conducted by +LeBlanc's French friend. + +Lafe let the Russian out and then returned to the room, rubbing his +hands together with the thought of the big reward they would get for +their help in the smuggling of the jewels across the border. + +As he returned, one of the men asked: + +"I say, Jean, what pay will we get for all this business?" + +"Ah, ma fren's, we will get big pay, trust Jean to see to that. Did I +not tell you tonight I had the big plan in my head? You have not heard +the whole of that plan. Once we get those jewels across the border, we +shall simply help ourselves to the whole of them. That will be our pay, +share and share alike." + +The others looked at Jean in amazement, for this thought had never +entered their heads. + +"What about old Whiskers, the Russian, and his brother?" asked one. + +"Pouf, what can they do? They can appeal to no one, for they are trying +to break the law and would only get prison for their pains. We have only +to laugh at them. Now let us have a little game of cards, while Lafe +goes to the cellar for some of that very excellent stuff he has in +there." + +Garry thanked fortune that he had not obeyed an impulse to hasten to the +cellar and make his getaway while the Russian was being let out. + +Then he was startled almost out of a year's growth at the turn that +events took at that moment. + +"You fellows can play cards all you want, but go out in the kitchen. +There's a big table there," said Lafe. + +That meant to Garry that his retreat was to be cut off as long as the +card game was in progress. This might be so long as to exceed the time +limit set for his return to Dick and Phil, and consequently give them +cause to worry. + +Then followed disaster number two. + +"If you chaps want to play cards and drink, you can do it without me. +I'm dog tired, too tired even to go home, and I'm going upstairs and +turn in for a while," said one of the quartet. + +"All right, if you want to, take the room over this one," said Green. + +Escape seemed to be cut off at all angles from Garry, not to mention the +chances of detection. + +Quickly flipping the rug back in place over the register, he rolled back +under the bed, hugging up against the wall as close as he could. He +didn't know what he was going to do. For the present the only thing +possible was to remain where he was, trusting to chance not to be +detected. + +For a moment he thought of making a dash for the hall or the other room, +but decided the danger was too great. It was well that he remained where +he was, for the door opened, and the man came in, yawning audibly. + +He threw his clothes off and tumbled into bed, while Garry hardly dared +breathe for fear that his presence would be detected. + +Fortunately the man was so tired that he did not lay awake long, and his +stentorous breathing soon told Garry he was asleep. Garry took counsel +with himself as to what was the best course to follow. He could stay +where he was till the card game broke up, and then steal down the stairs +and back through the cellar passageway, or he could make his way down +the front stairs and try and let himself out of the front door. There +was one drawback to this. Green might have locked the front door and +pocketed the key, and then, too, there was the danger that one of those +remaining up might go wandering through the house just as Garry made the +attempt. + +There was one other alternative. He could remain in the house till +morning, and then when they had all gone, make his way out easily. Then +Garry remembered that this was impossible, as Everett would have a posse +come to the house if he were not back at six. That would be disastrous +now, for it would halt the bringing of the jewels across the border, and +Garry was determined that their seizure should be part of the grand +finale in cleaning up the smuggler gang. + +He must get out of the house as soon as possible. But how? + +Then he bethought himself of the tree outside of the window. He +remembered that the branch swung very close to the house. Could he make +his way out of the window, then he could swing onto the branch, and so +descend to the ground with no danger of being discovered. + +The only element of danger was that the man should wake as he was making +his escape. Still Garry reflected, he had been in a tight place ever +since the moment he had entered the passageway, and this would be no +worse. + +Assuring himself that the man was still sleeping soundly, he began to +edge his way from under the bed. His way across the floor was one of +infinite precaution, taking many minutes. After he had squirmed for a +foot or so, he would stop and listen to see if the regular breathing of +the man on the bed continued. Once as he was half way across the floor, +he heard a creak, as the sleeper rolled over in his slumbers. + +Garry didn't dare to move for nearly five minutes after this. Then he +started again, and after what seemed an age, reached the window. + +Cautiously he raised himself up, and thrust a leg out of the window. +Then followed the other, and he was sitting on the sill. Leaning out, he +let his body fall towards the limb, caught it, and swung clear of the +window. + +In a trice he had thrown his leg up over the tree, his practice in the +gymnasium making this an easy feat. Crawling carefully along the limb, +he worked his way to the trunk, and then the descent to the ground was +accomplished without trouble. Without bothering to put on his shoepacks, +he sped away from the house. + +Finally he reached the road, and here he slipped the heavy shoepacks on, +and in a few moments had rejoined his companions where they were +nervously waiting under the big elm. + +They hailed his coming with delight, pounding him on the back and +shaking hands gleefully. + +"What luck, old topper?" was Dick's first question. + +"All the luck in the world, boys. Tonight our quest was crowned with +success!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +FERNALD COMES. + + +"Tell us all about it," demanded Phil. + +"All in good time," responded Garry. "First thing to do now is to put a +bit of distance between us and that house. Don't want any of that gang +to come and find us snooping around. Everything has gone as slick as a +whistle so far, and we don't want any foolish oversight to queer it. I +move we make a break for town and hive in somewhere and wait for +daylight. Of course we can go to Everett's house, but we shouldn't bust +in on him in the middle of the night. He's a sick man, you know." + +"Wonder where we can go and talk things over," asked Dick. "I suppose we +could go and duck in the woods a ways and build a bit of a fire, for it +seems a bit chilly." + +"There's one place we can go and never be bothered. That's down to the +station. It never opens till six o'clock. I inquired of the agent when +we arrived; didn't know but what the information might come in useful +some time. Besides, there's a bench in front where we can sit and gas +away without anyone hearing us. Then just before six we can hike to +Everett's house, so that he won't be raising a rescue party." + +All this conversation took place as the boys were walking. In a short +time they had arrived at the station. The fitful gleam of an oil lamp on +a bracket over the bench was the only light, although in a short time, +now, the first light of early dawn would begin to break. + +The weary boys threw themselves on the bench, while Garry proceeded to +give an account of his night's venture. The chums listened with +breathless interest as he told of the developments, and held their +breath as Garry told of the dangerous business of getting out of the +room with the man there on the bed. + +"Gosh," said Dick, "I'd have given a good bit to be in on that. Strikes +me that you and Phil have had all the fun out of this proposition." + +"Sure we've had some fun out of it, but it's only evening things up a +bit. Remember that it was you who had the honor of finding the hermit +that time we were in search of him, and Phil had to stay behind without +getting a chance, although he got into a pickle afterward," said Garry +consolingly. + +"Guess we can't have everything in this world," answered Dick. "Next +thing to do now is to plan our new campaign. Of course we won't bother +with them tomorrow night, for that is small potatoes compared to the +jewel plot. Isn't that LeBlanc a cold blooded specimen of a human being? +He'd double cross his own father. I doubt if he would have the slightest +hesitation about putting the Russians out of the way if he couldn't +achieve his ends in any other way." + +"Dare say you're right, Dick. At any rate, we must now put our heads +together and dope out just what to do in this smuggling case. What must +be done is to capture them just as they get over the border. Then the +gems will be found in their possession, and they will be caught dead to +rights. If they are allowed to reach Green's house, there are any number +of ways they can squirm out of the mess provided they have a clever +lawyer. I don't know but what the best plan is to tell this whole +business to Mr. Everett and see what he suggests. I imagine that his +advice will be to get help from the Customs house up the line, and then +lay in wait for them. There'll probably be a hot time taking them, so +you'll come in for a share of the excitement after all, Dick." + +This having been settled, there was nothing more to do except to chat +away the time till morning. As they talked, the first faint flush of +dawn appeared in the east, giving promise of a fine day despite the +fact that the moonless night had hinted of rain. + +Finally Garry looked at his watch. + +"Just five o'clock," he announced. "In another few minutes we start for +the Everett home. By the way, that Miss Ruth is a brick." + +He said it so enthusiastically that Dick and Phil looked at each other +and then burst into a shout of laughter. Both saw a chance to have a +little fun at the expense of their leader. + +"What do you know about that, Phil," said Dick, giving Phil a nudge as +he spoke. "I believe upon my soul that Garry has been smitten with the +charms of the fair lady." + +"Looks very much that way," responded Phil, falling into the spirit of +the joke. + +Garry turned a dark red. + +"Of all the confounded foolishness, that is the worst," he sputtered. +"Why, I've only seen the girl a couple of times." + +"Methinks thou dost protest too much," quoted Dick. + +"And as for me, I'll have something to tell a certain young lady back +home," announced Phil. + +Garry again broke into indignant denials. + +"By George, Phil, I only said that in joke, but now I think that I hit +the nail on the head," declared Dick. As a matter of fact, both he and +Phil were now sure that their joke was more flavored with truth than +jest. + +Just as they were preparing to leave, they heard a distant rumble. + +"There's a train headed this way. Wonder if it's a freight or a +passenger," remarked Phil. + +"Must be a freight, there are no passengers scheduled to pass here at +this time of day," said Garry. "Shall we wait and watch it go by? That +seems to be the only thing in the way of excitement that is promised for +this morning." + +The others being agreeable, they waited a moment. Soon the puffing +engine appeared at the curve, and the rumbling grinding cars passed +them. The boys amused themselves by checking off the various railroad +lines that were represented by the markings on the different freight +cars. They noted the Grand Trunk and Canadian Pacific predominated, +giving rise to the thought that this was bound for the far west via the +Canadian Rockies. + +As the caboose appeared in sight, the train seemed to slacken speed for +a bit, and a man jumped off the back end, waving a goodbye to the train +crew as he did. + +"Well, talk about luck," shouted Garry, as he saw the features of the +man. "There's Fernald, the Customs agent!" + +He was right, and as soon as Fernald saw them, he hailed them, asking in +surprise how they knew he was going to arrive at that time, and on a +freight instead of a passenger train. + +"To tell you the truth, Mr. Fernald," explained Garry, "you were the +last man on earth that we expected to see right this minute. The reason +for our being here involves the telling of a long story, and we must +keep a six o'clock engagement in order to prevent an armed posse from +going in search of us. Perhaps you'd better come along, and then we can +tell you the story at the same time we tell Mr. Everett." + +"Who's Everett?" asked Fernald quickly. + +"Oh, he's a fine old chap, used to be collector at the Customs House +when it was located here some years ago. We did him a slight favor a +little while ago, and he repaid us very handsomely by giving us +information that was the means of our getting a clue that means the +capture of the gang Sunday night," answered Garry, as they walked along. + +They reached the Everett house just on the stroke of six, and were +admitted by Ruth even before they rang the bell. Evidently she had been +watching for them from the window. + +"Oh, I'm glad you are back all safe and sound. I worried so that I +hardly slept, and Granddad woke me three or four times to know if you +had come back. His orders were to have you go right up the minute you +came. But who is this gentleman?" + +"Pardon me, Miss Ruth, this is Mr. Fernald, one of the men of the +service, and he will take charge from now on. We're thankful he came, +for we were almost up a stump as to how to proceed now," said Garry. +Indeed all three were thankful that Fernald had arrived, for they felt +the need for the counsel of an older head than theirs, and one more +experienced in the work of capturing a smuggler outfit than were they. + +They found Mr. Everett in the act of struggling to tie a tie with one +hand, and muttering fiery exclamations at his failure to accomplish the +feat speedily. Garry did the job for him, and after Fernald had been +introduced, they went over the story again. + +Just before he started, old Mr. Everett, looking searchingly at Fernald, +said: + +"I remember you now. You were connected with that Harworth smuggling +case nearly eighteen years ago. I was one of the witnesses then." + +"Why, I remember you too, now," said Fernald, his face lighting up. At +first he had been a little dubious about the boys having confided so +much of their business to a stranger, but this new development cleared +away all doubt. + +Garry told the whole story of the night's happenings, amazing his +hearers with the tale of his pluck and good fortune. + +After the telling of the story, Ruth hastened away to prepare breakfast +for all, insisting that they stay, although they protested against +causing so much trouble. + +"Oh, it won't be a bit of trouble. It will be fun, because it isn't +often that I cook for anyone but Granddad and myself. Besides, I'll +probably make Garry help me wipe the dishes." With that she darted from +the room. + +Phil and Dick burst into a shout of laughter. + +"Aha, it seems that the same arrow has hit two people," Dick whispered +to Phil, but loud enough so that Garry could hear. He blushed furiously, +but could be drawn to make no comment or denial. + +"Now the next thing on the docket is to discover the exact trail taken +by these men on their smuggling trip. We know it will be the same on +both nights, but of course we won't molest them on the first trip. This +big gem plot overshadows all others. The question is, just how to find +that trail." + +"If you will allow me to make a suggestion, I think I can solve that +problem after I ask a question or two of Mr. Everett," interposed Garry. + +"Go to it, you boys have done the trick so far, now go on and finish +it," said Fernald heartily. + +"First, then," said Garry, "how far is the boundary line at a point +just back of Green's farm, and how dense is the woodland there, Mr. +Everett?" + +"Why, as the crow flies, it is about three miles, maybe a little less. +And as for the woodage, it is quite sparse. You see the logging +operations extended that way, and they very nearly clean cut that land. +There are, however, a few big trees scattered here and there. On the +other side of the border, the forest gets considerable thicker." + +"Fine, I see a way very clearly now," said Garry. "Sometime today, +LeBlanc and Green, with the other two men, whose names I do not know, +will cross the border, for they are due to return tonight with furs. +Dick, Phil and I will estimate as near as we can the point on the line +at the back of Green's farm. Then we will take positions about a +sixteenth of a mile apart, perhaps a little more. We can mount one of +the taller trees, and with our glasses can keep a sharp lookout for the +point where they cross the line. It is likely that from force of habit +they will take the same route going as returning. That will allow us to +cover a quarter of a mile, counting in what we can see without glasses +on either side. Then on Saturday we can repeat the operation, if +necessary, thus getting a double check on the route. We know how to get +our bearings and mark the trail so that we can find it again, even in +the dark." + +"That's the ticket. That will be your work for today then, while I go up +the line and arrange for a posse of Customs men and deputies to effect +the capture of Sunday night," said Fernald. + +They could detect the welcome smell of boiling coffee and bacon and +eggs, and at that moment Ruth called them to breakfast. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +SMUGGLERS' LANE. + + +"Shall we give you a lift downstairs, Mr. Everett?" asked Garry. + +"Say, do you fellows take me for a confounded child?" snorted Mr. +Everett. "Just because I get bruised up a little is no sign that I'm a +helpless invalid. I'll go downstairs by the help of myself and no one +else." + +"What's that I hear, Granddad?" demanded Ruth, from the bottom of the +stairs. "You are not to stir a single step unless you let two of the +boys help you." + +"There, dang it, Ruthie, can't you let me save my pride in front of +these youngsters? All right, all right, have it your own way. But I warn +you, one of these days you'll boss me too much, and then well see, we'll +see." + +As the boys, a little embarrassed by the turn of events, were helping +him down the stairs, he whispered delightedly: + +"Bosses me round just like a youngster, that girl does. Only way I can +save my pride is to let on that I'm awful put out about it. But Lord +bless you, if she didn't boss me, I wouldn't know what to do," he +concluded with another chuckle of pleasure. + +The boys then perceived that Ruth's "bossing" was evidently a daily +occurrence, a sort of family joke, and joined in laughing with old Mr. +Everett, who seemed to take such keen delight in "saving his pride." + +Breakfast was a jolly affair. The eggs were done to a turn, the bacon +crisp, the coffee like drops of amber, and the hot biscuits would fairly +melt in one's mouth. They chatted merrily while they ate. Suddenly it +occurred to Garry to ask how it was Fernald had arrived that morning. + +"Why I got the whole dope on the receiving end of the fur smuggling by +your tip on the two buyers, and have that ready to clean up any time I +want to. Then I got worrying about you boys here in a strange country, +and decided to hop on and lend what assistance I could. I got as far as +I could by passenger train, and then because of bad connections, got +waylaid and found I would have had to lay over. Fortunately that fast +freight came along, and by dint of a little persuasion managed to +convince the trainmen that I was not a tramp, but on government +business, with the result that I arrived here fourteen hours quicker +than I would have otherwise. It was a piece of good fortune, for I guess +I am here in just enough time to see the finish of a thrilling case, +minus the thrills for me." + +Breakfast over, Fernald said he was off for the Customs House, while the +boys prepared for a long vigil at the border to spot the "lane" used by +the smugglers in their trips. + +Ruth insisted on preparing a lunch for them, and packed it so it could +be comfortably slipped in the pockets, so that no excess baggage would +bother them. + +Before starting out, Garry climbed to the attic of the Everett house, +and getting the range with his glasses, computed the distance by means +of the Mill scale on the glasses. This gave him a working plan to use +when they hit the border, and could direct their steps so as to come out +almost exactly back of the Green farm. All that they needed to know was +the distance from the Everett House to the border. Ruth informed them it +was a matter of almost exactly three miles and a half, so they were now +sure of their distances and course. By making straight north for the +border, they would have the advantage of avoiding going through the main +part of the town. + +Starting out, the three made their way directly to the approximate +location of the border line. They kept track of the distance by using a +careful thirty inch step, such as is used in the regular army, and +counting their paces as they went. A pace consists of two steps, and is +measured by starting off with the right foot and counting every time the +left foot strikes the ground. This makes each pace just five feet, and +as there are five thousand, two hundred eighty feet in a mile, one can +estimate when he has paced a mile within a very few feet. + +Arriving at the general point where the imaginary line ran, they +branched off at right angles and walked the necessary distance to bring +them to a location in line with the Green farm. To make sure, Garry +climbed to the top of a tree, and with his glasses soon spotted the +farm. + +Garry elected to stay at this point, and instructed his companions to +pace a sixteenth of a mile to either side, and there find a likely tree +and mount it to keep their long vigil. + +"We ought not to have to wait a great length of time, for they will have +to get to their destination to get the furs and come back again, since +they intend to bring them tonight," said Garry. "There doesn't seem to +be any way that we can signal to each other in the event that they see +the men pass, so I suggest that a full half hour wait be made after the +man or men, for they will probably all go together, or at very near +intervals, have passed and then duck back to this tree where I am +holding out, and report. We all know what LeBlanc and Green look like, +but Dick here never saw the other two accomplices, so I'll describe them +carefully. Wait until they have all crossed before leaving your post, +and when you do, be on your guard every step of the way, to prevent +surprise." + +Garry then described the men for Dick's benefit, and assuring himself +that all instructions were understood, dispatched the chums to their +posts, and then selected the tree that he intended to use for a post. +Climbing up into the branches so that he would be out of sight, and yet +be able to command a view, he made himself as comfortable as possible, +although there was no rocking chair ease. Taking off his coat he made a +sort of a cushion of it, in the crotch formed by the juncture of two +heavy branches and made ready for his wait. + +Nearly two hours passed without his seeing a sign of any approach, and +the uncomfortable seat began to be irksome. Occasionally he stretched +himself by climbing up into the tree a ways, and then back again. + +He was beginning to think that he had bargained for too much, to +guarantee to stay there and watch for the approach of the smugglers. + +Another hour passed, and he began to be stiff and strained. At that +moment he heard a whistle, a succession of different notes which he at +once recognized as a signal often used by the three when they were +approaching each other. + +In a few moments Dick loomed into view. + +Garry, rescuing his coat and rifle, slid down the tree and hailed him +with the all important question as to whether he had found what they +came in search of. + +"Bet you I did," promptly responded Dick, when the question had been +put. "They came in a clump almost. First the two chaps you described, +and about five minutes after, LeBlanc and Green breezed by, not letting +any grass grow under their feet. I've marked the spot well, and have +located a good trail all the way, using private signs of our own that +would be meaningless even to a woodsman familiar with all trail markings +and signs. Fact I discovered one or two unfamiliar trail signs, that I +could not recognize, and I believe they are the ones put there by a +smuggler band. I'm pretty certain that is the regular trail used. Are +you stiff? Believe me, that is the last tree sentry duty I want for a +long time to come. I'd as soon sit two hours on a telegraph wire as the +limb of a tree. Let's hike after Phil and return to town. Guess we've +done all that we can." + +"Yes, nothing remains now to be done except wait for the big doings +Saturday night. Let's go, and keep a sharp lookout all the time. By the +way, how near did they pass to you?" + +"Not more than twenty feet above where I was located. Evidently they do +not cut a straight line from the farm, but slant a little, unless our +reckoning was a bit off. It is likely that they swerve a bit, because +there may be a pathway across the farm that they use to get here. +Believe me, I held my breath as they went by, although there was little +danger of their seeing me. I strained my ears to see what they might be +talking about, but could get nothing, as they talked in a low tone," +answered Dick. + +In a few minutes they had come to where Phil was perched, and he +clambered down and met them. They told him the latest developments, and +then struck out for town. + +"I'm all in for a little sleep. I move we go back to Everetts', and ask +them to loan us a couch or a bed or something for a couple of hours or +so. I believe I could sleep for a year." + +"That's a good idea. Mr. Everett said that we were to consider the house +as headquarters until the game was bagged, so there would be no danger +of our running into a scrape and spoiling the plans," remarked Garry. + +The thought of a nap made them hasten their steps, and soon they were +back at the house. Ruth admitted them, and after telling her and her +grandfather of their success, proposed a nap. + +"You deserve it, certainly. You can use the big double room, there are +two beds in it, and turn in till suppertime. Fernald won't be back +before then, and there's nothing to keep you up," said Mr. Everett. + +The tired boys soon tumbled into bed, and without any preamble, dropped +off to sleep. They had slept what seemed to them to be only a few +minutes, when they were awakened by Fernald. + +"Tumble up now, it's six o'clock, and the young lady downstairs says +that supper will get cold if you wait any longer." + +A liberal application of cold water soon aroused them, and in a little +while they were doing justice to the ample meal served up for them. + +As they were eating, Fernald told them he had made arrangements for four +men to come from the Customs House and help in the capture of the band. + +"That will give us five men, and with the element of surprise in our +favor, we will have little trouble in capturing them," he said. + +"How do you figure five?" broke in Dick. + +"Why, myself, and the four men who are coming," he answered. + +"Well, where do we come in?" demanded Phil, seconded by Garry. + +"Oh, I had forgotten about the possibility of you're wanting to be +there. I'm afraid that it is too dangerous," said Fernald gravely. + +The protests of the three came almost in one voice, until Fernald, +unable to keep a straight face any longer, broke out into a shout of +laughter. The boys then saw that he had been indulging in a quiet bit of +fun at their expense, and they were not to be cheated out of their share +in the capture of the outfit. + +After supper the boys pitched in and helped wash and wipe dishes, +although Miss Ruth protested. Used as they were to camping, washing +dishes was no new experience to them. + +A pleasant evening was passed, and then the chums trooped off to bed, +Fernald sharing the big room with them. + +"Just think, while we are sleeping, LeBlanc and his outlaws will be +coming across the border with their cargo of furs," said Dick, as they +prepared for bed. "And we don't get any excitement now till the night +after tomorrow. It will seem an age, the waiting." + +They were up with the sun, and after breakfast Fernald left to loiter +around the town, and see what could be seen, or hear any gossip. Of +course by this time LeBlanc knew that Phil had been rescued, so Fernald +judged that the safest thing for the boys to do was to keep either in +the house or close to it, thus giving LeBlanc the idea that the trio had +decided that discretion was the better part of valor, and had gotten out +of such a dangerous locality. + +"I'd like to have seen LeBlanc's face when he found out that Phil had +given him the slip. I'll bet he was mad enough to chew nails," chuckled +Garry. + +The day did not prove half so long in passing as the boys expected that +it would. Mr. Everett told them many a tale of the early days on the +border, and other stories of smugglers along the coast line, where he +first entered the Customs service. + +There was a piano in the parlor, and the boys found that Ruth played in +excellent manner, and found hearty enjoyment in singing while she +played. Garry was greatly pleased to find that Mr. Everett played chess, +and they enjoyed several games. + +Fernald returned in the evening with the report that LeBlanc had not put +in an appearance, but that Green had been much in evidence all through +the afternoon, and wore an aspect of being greatly pleased. + +"Tomorrow night he won't be quite so tickled about things as he appeared +to be this afternoon," the agent remarked. + +"Tomorrow night is a long way off, wish it was tomorrow night right +now," half grumbled Phil. + +"Patience, my boy, patience. You know all things come to those who +wait," said Mr. Everett. + +Mr. Everett had gained considerably in strength, and with the exception +of his broken arm, was as well as ever, showing what a fine healthy +constitution he possessed. + +The second day seemed to be even longer in passing, for staying so much +in the house began to pall on the boys, who craved excitement. + +In the later afternoon, the four men from the Customs House came, +arriving singly. They gathered in the big dining room, and there +received instructions from Fernald, who had assumed the lead. + +The instructions were simple. The boys were to lead them to the "lane," +as they called it, and there they would deploy slightly and lay in wait +for the quarry. + +"I procured at the Customs House a star shell, such as was used during +the war. When the men are over the line, and almost upon us, I will +light it, and each one will pick a man and cover him. There will +probably be seven of them, LeBlanc and Green, their two aids, the two +Russians, and the man Anderson that you boys speak of. There are eight +of us here, and we will be joined when we start out by the sheriff of +this county and two deputies, who will arrive here after dark. That +makes a force of eleven, enough to do the work." + +"You mean there are twelve of us," broke in Everett. "I am going to be +the twelfth man. Just because one arm is laid up doesn't mean that the +other one cannot do double duty." + +All protests were unavailing, and rather than deny him the pleasure of +being one of the party, Fernald allowed that he could go, first +demanding and getting a promise that if there should be a mix-up he +would lose no time in getting to safety. + +"We'll lay back a bit from the spot where they cross, because the arrest +must be made on this side of the border, otherwise we would get in a jam +with our neighbors to the north of us, and the arrest would not be +valid, for they are not smugglers till they have crossed the line. One +of your duties, boys, will be to keep your flashlamps going after the +star shell has dimmed. That will last long enough to show them our +force, and I anticipate no resistance." + +Shortly after dark fell, the party was joined by the sheriff and his two +deputies, and the little force, led by the three chums, made their way +over the course taken the morning they set out in search of the point of +crossing made by the smugglers. + +Walking in Indian file, with no conversation other than an occasional +direction or order given in a low tone of voice, they reached the border +line. The boys felt a thrill of excitement at the thought of the part +they were playing on this adventurous night. Soon they reached the point +where Garry had watched, and from then on, Dick was the sole guide. +Flashing his lamp only often enough to find the trail marks he had left, +he led the way unerringly to the point where he had seen them cross. + +There was no light save the feeble bit given by the stars, for it was in +the dark of the moon. + +"Now," whispered Dick to Fernald, "it was at this point that they +crossed the border." + +"All right, now men, follow me." + +Fernald led the way back about twenty feet, having received the +assurance of Everett, who was thoroughly familiar with that part of the +country, that they were on the American side, and ordered the men to lay +down, keeping their rifles and revolvers constantly at hand. + +"No man is to make a move till I explode the star shell, then each one +here pick a man. If orders are implicitly obeyed, there will be no +trouble and no bloodshed." + +"Beg pardon, sir," said Garry. "If we are laying down and you explode +the shell, we'll be at a disadvantage, losing precious seconds in +springing to our feet. I suggest you and I stay close together, and a +few seconds before you are going to explode the shell, give me two taps +on the shoulder. Then I can give the cry of a hoot owl, and each man can +jump to his feet to be ready when the shell lights up the surroundings." + +"Fine. Every man here know the cry of an owl?" + +All did, so Fernald gave the order to lie down. The long, long minutes +dragged into an hour, and the hour into a second. The boys were so +restless that it was hard to lie quiet and still, but they forced +themselves to. + +It was almost midnight, but it seemed like a week to the boys, when the +cracking of twigs and the crunch of feet warned of the approach of men. +It proved to be the party, for they heard a low growling imprecation +from Green as he stumbled over some object. Garry nudged Fernald, and +immediately felt two sharp taps on his shoulder. At once he imitated the +plaintive hoo-o-o- hoo-o-o- of an owl. + +The men sprang to their feet. Fernald pressed the detonator of the star +shell, tossing it into the air as he did so. It fell to the ground and +shed its light, making it seem as bright and glaring as it would be in +the noonday sun. + +The attacked party halted as though turned to stone for a moment, so +great was their surprise. Then Green let out a mighty cry. + +They had no chance, for the businesslike rifles and revolvers of a dozen +men were pointed straight at them. The two Russians were unarmed, and +consequently unable to do anything had they wished. Every man gave up +except one. + +That was the half-breed, LeBlanc. With a cry of rage he fired his rifle +into the midst of the men, fortunately hitting no one, and then turning, +ran fleet as a deer back across the border. One of the deputies raised +his rifle to shoot, but was speedily checked by Fernald. + +"Shoot above his head to try and stop him, but don't hit him. He's on +the other side of the border now!" + +Then ordering the men to extend their hands, the Customs agents soon had +them securely handcuffed. + +Just at that moment an appalling thought came to Garry. + +"Oh, Mr. Fernald. Suppose LeBlanc had the jewels!" + +Truly the thought was a chilling one, but Fernald, always a man of +action, made no reply, but sprang to the side of one of the Russians and +searched him hastily but carefully. His search revealed nothing. Then +he turned to the second, and in a minute uttered a jubilant shout. + +"This fellow has a chamois money belt on, and unless I'm greatly +mistaken, that's where the jewels are." + +Making the Russian strip off his shirt, he unhooked the money belt, and +while Garry held his light, examined the pockets. + +Each one was crowded with magnificent gems that flashed under the rays +of the flashlamp! + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +THE MAP AGAIN. + + +The men were marched away to the village, where they were incarcerated +in the village lockup. In order that there would not be the slightest +chance of their escaping, or being rescued by friends, who might in some +way learn of their capture, Fernald ordered the Customs agents and the +sheriff and his deputies to stand guard the rest of the night, keeping +the prisoners constantly under surveillance. + +Himself taking charge of the precious belt, he led the way to the +Everett house. Here they found that Ruth had not retired, but had stayed +up, nervously awaiting their return. + +Carefully drawing the shades of the windows, Fernald emptied the pockets +of the belt out onto the tablecloth. + +For moments all stood spellbound at the beauty and magnificence of the +gems. + +Then Fernald, almost with awe in his voice, said: + +"Why, there's a king's ransom here!" + +After the party had examined the gems, and commented again and again on +their beauty, it occurred to Ruth to ask what would be the disposal of +the jewels. + +"I imagine that in this case, since they are recovered after a theft, +that an effort will be made to get in touch with the rightful owner. In +the case of ordinary smuggled jewels, they would be seized by the United +States. This, however, is a slightly different case. It is up to the +department at Washington, where I shall go immediately to turn this +fortune over to the proper persons. I confess, the quicker they get out +of my care, the better I shall like it. They are too fabulously valuable +to allow me to keep cool while in possession of them. Every minute I +shall feel that someone is trying to get them. I'm off to Washington as +soon as day comes, and I can get a train," concluded Fernald. + +"And now, before we trot off to bed, what are your plans, boys? Will you +return to Augusta to get your old station back again, or what?" asked +the Customs man. + +"Why, to tell you the truth, I should like a chance to stay here for two +or three days and get a little hunting and fishing. We didn't have much +chance for that while we were on this mission. I guess perhaps we could +wire the Chief Ranger and ask for a little furlough. Also, we must wire +the Customs Chief that we have done our work. I think probably the boys +feel the same way that I do," said Garry. + +"Well, if that is what you would like, it is very simple, and is a +modest request. Leave that all to me. I'll stop off at Augusta and fix +it for you. By the way, now that everything is all over, I may as well +tell you that I am in complete charge of all Customs agents and houses +for the entire northeastern part of the United States, so I guess I have +influence enough to get your furlough fixed up for you," said Fernald, +to the surprise of the boys. + +Mr. Everett, however, proclaimed at once: + +"I knew that all the time." + +"Yes, I fancy you did," he said with a smile. "Now, I'm for a few +minutes' sleep before morning train time." + +"Yes, I guess we can all use a little," said Everett. + +All trooped off to bed, having been told by Everett first that they +could sleep until nine, as there was no train out that Fernald could +take until ten o'clock, and he would have time for breakfast before +starting back for Washington. + +Rising time came all too soon, and the boys walked to the station to see +Fernald off. Then they went back to the Everett house to get their +rifles, and bid them goodbye, for they wanted to be off for their +lean-to in the woods, there to plan out how to spend the week furlough +they were depending on Fernald to secure for them. + +They found the lean-to as they had left it, and their knapsacks and +groceries were retrieved from their caches in the trees, as safe and +sound as they were when they were put there some days before. + +"I wonder if we are safe from LeBlanc?" asked Garry. + +"I should say yes to that question, Garry," answered Phil. "He has been +beaten at every turn. His friends are on their way to jail in Bangor, to +be held for hearing before the United States Commissioner there, and he +knows that the Customs service men will be relentless in their watch for +him now that he has broken the law of the country. Besides, we shall +soon be away from here, for I suggest we hike out soon for Lake Umculos, +which is about thirty miles from here, and get some good fishing. The +lake trout ought to be biting fine just about now, and we could get in +some good swimming too, and that would please old heavyweight Dick." + +Dick, as some of our readers know, was like a fish in the water, as most +fat people are. + +As they prepared lunch over the campfire, Phil broke out with: + +"Do you know, fellows, in the stress and excitement of the past few +days, we have never given a thought to the adventure of the lumberjack's +boarding house, and the map that was bequeathed me by the old man just +before he died? I wonder if there isn't some way we can dope out what +the rest of it was. And while I'm asking questions, here are two more. +What became of the tramps, and who was it that so carefully fixed up the +shack at the deserted logging camp?" + +"That's quite a bundle of questions, Phil," said Garry with a laugh. "To +try and answer the first one, I am afraid that it is impossible. All we +have to go on is that you start somewhere from the mouth of some small +ravine. There is no telling how many small ravines there are in the +State of Maine. Guess that is just a mysterious page in our book of +adventures. As for the tramps, the fact that they were in this part of +the country at all, points to just one theory, and that is, that having +jumped bail, they are making tracks for the boundary line, thus getting +themselves out of the country, so there will be less danger, if any, of +their being captured and brought to trial. As for the last question, +that too is a mystery, but there is one thing we can do, if you want to +postpone your trip to the lake for two or three days, that is, solve the +mystery. What's the vote?" + +"I'm for solving a mystery any day in preference to fishing. We can +fish almost anytime, and the lakes will keep, but we don't have a nice +mystery served up on a silver platter everyday," announced Dick. + +"That's my vote," agreed Phil. + +"Then the question seems to be carried. The chair will now entertain a +motion for the mode of procedure," announced Garry in a parliamentary +tone. + +The boys reflected for a moment or two, and then a suggestion was +offered by Phil. + +"Seems to me that the only way to do anything is to keep watch there for +a while. We could take turns at it, while the other two took hikes or +did a little hunting. We could take it in half day shifts, for it isn't +very far from here." + +"That seems the only feasible thing to do, but how could we keep watch +without the person or persons who inhabit that place discovering our +presence?" asked the practical Garry. + +"There's one way out of that difficulty," offered Dick, "and that is to +effect an entrance to the big bunkhouse, and rig up some sort of a +peephole, and keep watch of the place in that manner. It is unlikely +that place would ever be entered by those who are using the shack. Then +here's another thing. You could rig your wireless here, and use one of +the sending sets in the bunkhouse, so that the lookout could summon help +if necessary." + +"The bunkhouse idea is great, really it's the only feasible way. But the +wireless 'phone is not such a good idea. It would entail staying right +here all the time waiting for a possible message, and would be too +irksome, besides losing all chance of hunting or fishing. I for one am +anxious to try that trout brook old Dud told us of. Besides, there +should be no especial danger, if there was I'd advise against having +anything to do with it. Shall we draw lots for the first whack at +watching?" + +This was agreeable to all, and Garry drew watch number one, which they +decided was to begin in the morning. All three would go to the +bunkhouse, effect an entrance, and plan a way of speedy exit in case of +need. + +After lunch they overhauled their fishing tackle, and made for the +brook, determined to catch a good mess of trout for their supper that +night. Starting for the spring, they followed the course of the brook, +until they reached a place where it was considerably wider and deeper. + +Under the natural culvert, formed by the trunk fallen across, they cast +their lines, using flies from their hook. Not having rods with them on +this trip, they were forced to use slender saplings, but they were after +food and not sport, so they did not mind pursuing the amateur way of +flipping the fish on shore without playing him in the fashion dear to +the hearts of anglers. + +"If we go to the lake, we'll make up for this, for we can procure rods +there, and have a real battle with some of those fine big lake trout," +promised Garry. + +"There isn't much sport to this, it is true," remarked Phil, as he +flipped a fine specimen weighing at least three-quarters of a pound to +the shore, "but they're going to be mighty fine eating just the same." + +The fish were biting unusually well, and in less than no time they had a +fine mess sufficient for supper. Returning to the lean-to, they cleaned +the fish, and then spent the rest of the afternoon lounging about, for +they had lost much sleep in the past two or three days, and no one was +feeling particularly spry. + +They had the fried fish, garnished with bacon, and hot biscuits and jam +for supper, with of course the coffee that always goes with an +out-of-door meal. + +As soon as it was dark, they rolled in their blankets, and with their +feet to the fire, were soon deep in sleep. + +They were up with the dawn, and after breakfast headed towards the +deserted logging camp. They approached carefully, and when within sight +of it, waited and reconnoitered. + +"Guess no one is at home or there would be a sign of smoke from the +chimney, unless whoever is living there is eating raw food. Let's take a +look at the spring," said Garry. + +At the spring they found no sign of anyone having been there lately. +This was easily seen, for the ground was soft about the bubbling spring, +and would have retained a fresh print. + +"All right then, now for the bunkhouse," ordered Garry. + +They entered by prying loose one of the shutters and hopped inside. The +interior gave no sign of having been used for years, as the dust was +thick everywhere, and nothing could be found that looked as though it +had been touched in some time. + +In an old cupboard they found a box of nails of all sizes, and this gave +Garry an idea. Cutting his bandanna handkerchiefs in strips, he doubled +them up, until he had oblong pieces about two inches in width and four +in length. Then he removed the shutter entirely, and fastened the cloth +hinges he had made to it. While the others held the shutter in place +again, he fastened the other ends of the crude hinges to the top of the +window casing. A piece of string from his pocket was utilized to hold it +tight against the bottom of the sill. + +"You see, this string holds the shutter in place, and from the outside +no one would ever suspect that it had been touched. You see I've used a +window that is not in view of the shack. Now should it become necessary +for any reason to leave this place in a hurry, a sharp push will break +the strings that holds the shutter in at the bottom, and pushing out the +shutter, it's only a matter of seconds in getting out. Then you can use +your legs in getting clear of the vicinity," explained Garry. + +At the opposite end of the shack, in a shutter, was pierced a peephole +that commanded a view of the door of the shack that the boys believed +was the one used by the occupant or occupants of the building. + +"There, everything is set. You chaps hike, and then Dick is to return at +noon to relieve me, leaving Phil the first watch tomorrow morning," +ordered Garry. + +Garry's watch was unavailing, for when Dick came at noon he had nothing +to report. It was arranged that no one should come for Dick, but that he +should be back as soon after dusk set in as possible. In order to be +sure of Dick's safety, it was agreed that if he were not back by eight +o'clock the others should come and see what was up, or if anything was +the trouble. + +Dick turned up at the lean-to just as dark set in, and reported that +there was nothing stirring. + +The boys were almost of the opinion that the whole business was a wild +goose chase, but Phil was determined to take a hand at watching, and it +was agreed that he should stand the morning watch, and be joined at noon +by the others, who would finish the day together. + +In case nothing developed they would put an end to the watching and +start for Umculos Lake the following morning. + +Phil started for his post the next morning. As he went, he said: + +"I've a hunch something breaks this morning, hope my hunch comes true." + +He had been gone not much more than an hour when he came tearing back, +just catching the others as they were setting out on a short hike into a +new and unexplored part of the woods. + +"The mysterious occupant has come, and guess who it is!" he shouted. + +"LeBlanc?" questioned Garry. + +"The tramps?" hazarded Dick. + +"Both wrong. It's the chap who was in the room with the old man in that +house in Bangor. The one who got away with the missing portion of the +map!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + +THE QUEST OF THE MINE. + + +"Well, talk about luck!" shouted Dick. "Let's dig back there as fast as +we can, and rescue the missing portion of the map. He cannot have found +the mine, for his part of the map was as useless to him as the part you +have, Phil, was to us." + +This seemed to be the best course to pursue, for the missing portion of +the map was Phil's by every right, legally and morally, and they felt +they had a right to pursue any tactics to get it back in their +possession. + +Without waiting to make any special plans, they secured their rifles and +hatchets, but dispensed with their knapsacks, and left post haste for +the old logging camp. + +So fast was their hike that they were almost breathless when they +arrived within sight of it. + +Calling a halt, Garry bade them get their breath back, and then proposed +a council to see what was to be done. + +"I think it would be a good idea to try and pry off that window shutter. +One of us can stand guard at the front door, the other at the rear, and +the third can play with the window. In that way we can cover all +retreat. There is a possibility of his being armed, of course, but that +is a chance that we must take," suggested Phil. + +"I think I know a better scheme than that," interrupted Garry. "What do +you do when a coon takes refuge from the dogs in a tree?" + +Both of his hearers were silent for a moment, and then Dick burst out: + +"Why, you smoke him out of course!" + +"Exactly. That is what I propose to do with this fellow." + +They gathered a quantity of dry brush, and then proceeded to wet a +portion of it in the spring. + +"What are we going to do about letting it down the chimney? If we drop +it all the way to the fireplace the chap can put it out, and if we use a +piece of lariat, it will burn it off," said Phil. + +"I thought of that, and have a solution for you. When Dick and I started +for our hike, or rather were about to start when you came back with the +news, we thought we might climb a tree or two, and so we put some wire +in our pockets to use for a ring in climbing. That will work like a +charm and drive him out in no time," answered Garry. + +The wet and dry brush was rolled into a sort of a bundle, care being +taken so that there was enough dry wood and twigs to catch fire +properly. When these had caught fire, the wet brush would burn less +easily, and cause a thick acrid smoke to be given off. + +The bundle was then secured with a piece of the wire, while the other +was attached to it by an end. At the other end of the free wire, a hook +was bent, so that it could be hung over the edge of the chimney, +allowing the smoking bundle to drop about two feet down the chimney. + +"I'm counting on this chap thinking that the shack may be on fire, and +will not investigate the chimney and try to pull the bundle down," said +Garry, "so we must make no more noise than is absolutely necessary." + +Cautiously they approached the house, and here Dick and Garry, being the +heaviest, formed a sort of a human ladder and allowed Phil to mount to +their shoulders. It was then easy for him to clamber noiselessly to the +roof. + +The bundle of brush was thrown up to him, and then they stripped their +coats off and tossed these to him. The coats were to lay over the top of +the chimney and keep the smoke from following its natural course upward. + +In a few moments the bundle of brush was afire and in the chimney. + +"Now we'll get action in a little while," opined Garry. + +He was not mistaken, for in a minute they heard the sound of some one +hurriedly groping at the fastenings of the back door. They raised their +rifles and trained them on the door. + +Phil had slipped down from the top of the roof and joined them, making a +sizable force to greet the illegal owner of the piece of map they so +much desired. + +The door was thrown open and the man dashed out, to stare in a +bewildered manner at the tree. Upon Garry's sharp order, he elevated his +hands skyward and then asked what they wanted. + +"We want a certain piece of paper that you got away with a few nights +ago in an old boarding house on Canal street in Bangor," said Phil. "Out +with it!" + +A cunning look crept into the man's eyes, which Garry did not fail to +detect. + +"I threw it away right after I left the house, because I didn't know +what it was all about or whether it was any good," he declared. + +"I don't believe you," said Garry promptly. "Dick and Phil, you keep +your guns trained on him. I'm going to slide through his pockets." + +At these words, the man involuntarily looked down at his chest. Garry +noted this glance, and immediately decided that the search would not +have to go further than the two pockets in the woollen shirt the man was +wearing. + +The two boys closed in on him, with their rifles-pointing directly at +his head, while Garry advanced to look through the shirt pockets. The +man looked for a moment as though he were about to resist, but the sight +of the two rifles made him use common sense. + +The first pocket revealed nothing, but in the second was an old +envelope, and in this was a piece of paper which at a glance was +recognized as the missing portion of the map. With this in his hands, +Garry backed away. + +"Now," he said sharply, "this belongs to us. It was given by the dying +man to our chum here. We are not going to give you in custody, for the +coroner found that the man had not died by foul play. However, if we +catch sight of you again, you will be seized and given to the +authorities, and a charge of theft of this paper from us will be lodged +against you. Now dig out of here. You have three minutes before we +shoot. Forward, march!" + +"Can I get my blanket?" asked the man. + +"Certainly, and anything else you have in the shack, only we'll go in +with you while you get it," answered Garry. + +Sullenly the man went in and got his blanket and what tinned food there +was left, also a hand axe which he stuck in his belt. He had no weapon +other than a wicked hunting knife, and this he was allowed to keep. +Muttering threats under his breath, he left the shack, and started +slowly up the trail to the town, stopping once or twice to look back and +shake his fist meantime to see if the boys meant business. Finally Garry +lifted his rifle and sent a shot whistling several feet over the man's +head. Immediately he put on a burst of speed that didn't decrease until +he was far out of sight. + +"That's that. I think we have seen the last of him," said Garry. + +As a matter of fact, this was the last they saw of him, for he never +stopped until he reached the station, where he hid until he had a chance +to steal a ride on the rods of a freight train. + +Back at the lean-to, they pieced the map together again, and were able +to find the second missing location. According to the remainder of the +note, mark number two consisted of three great stumps, close together in +triangular form. The directions were to dig between them, where the +secret of the mine would be disclosed. + +Garry fished out a map of the State, and found that the Shohela river +ran not more than forty miles away. The town of Jennings was marked, and +proved to be a small village, deserted almost in the summer, for the +tourists had not penetrated to that section, but quite a center in the +winter for lumberjacks coming and going to their work in the woods. + +The river itself was used for the log drives in the spring. Somewhere +above was the bend in the river, from where they could guide their steps +until they found the secret mine. Just what kind of a mine it would +prove to be, none of the boys had any idea. It would hardly be silver or +gold, for there never had been one found in that State. They thought +there was a chance of there being copper, as in Wisconsin there were +great copper mines. + +Figuring out their course, they decided to start that afternoon, and by +easy marching, arrive at Jennings late the following day. + +They repacked their knapsacks, using part of the food they had stored in +the tree cache, and then left the remainder of it in the lean-to with a +note addressed to old Dud, saying he could have it, and bidding him +goodbye for the time being. + +They intended to come back after they had found or failed to find the +lost mine and say goodbye to the Everetts. + +After a march of about five hours, they camped under the trees for the +night, and were soon eating a supper cooked over the open campfire. For +safety's sake they kept sentry duty up through the night, not fearing +anyone in particular, but with the idea that an ounce of prevention was +worth a pound of cure. + +After breakfast they took up the march again, stopping an hour for +lunch, and then resuming the journey, reached Jennings just at sunset. + +"Let's dodge the town altogether for the present, and go around it, and +find a spot where we can camp for the night. Then in the morning we can +follow the river up its course till we come to the bend mentioned in the +note on the back of the map," suggested Dick. + +This suggestion met with the approval of the others, and so they circled +Jennings, and found a desirable place to sleep and eat. + +Sun-up found them awake, and after a hasty breakfast, so anxious were +they to find the mine, they made for the river bank, without losing +time. + +Up the river they went, getting more and more excited with each step. A +walk of less than an hour brought them to what was unmistakably the bend +in the river that was the first mark noted in the note. Here, using the +sun as a guide, they proceeded east for the necessary two miles. True +enough, here was a ravine, small enough, but still a ravine. The region +was only sparsely wooded, and the boys knew enough about geology, which +they studied the preceding winter at school, to know that the formation +of the land in that section was quite rocky, there being evidence of +much granite. + +"You don't suppose the old chap that fixed that note was mixed in his +terms through ignorance, and meant that there was a good granite quarry +there, do you?" asked Dick dubiously. + +"Never can tell," answered Garry. "Only thing to do is follow directions +and see what happens." + +Following directions, they paced about a mile and a half, keeping a +sharp lookout for the triangle of stumps. To make sure they would not +miss it, they deployed and marched about twenty paces distant from each +other. Phil was the one to spy the landmark. His shouts brought the +others running to him. + +"Let's dig, and dig quick," pleaded Phil. "I want to see if we've found +a fortune, or are only the victims of a practical joke, or gigantic +hoax." + +The others were as curious as he, and using their axes, as a sort of +combined pick and shovel, dug away at the ground surrounded by the +stumps. In a few minutes, Phil's axe struck something hard, and +abandoning his axe, he scratched the earth away with his fingers. The +hard something was a tin can, evidently, about which had been wound +several feet of tape such as is used to repair bicycle punctures and +such. Fishing his knife from his pocket, Phil proceeded to cut away the +taping, while the others, with bated breath, awaited the result of the +find. It took some minutes to scrape and cut away the hardened tape, but +at last it was accomplished. + +Tearing the cover from the can, they found an old envelope, which was +soon opened, disclosing a letter, written in the same cramped hand as +was the note whose directions had guided them there. It said: + +"One hundred paces due east from here is a sharp ridge of granite, that +projects above ground for nearly thirty feet. After the granite enters +the ground, there the treasure begins. I know it is there, for I have +been a miner all my life, and know geology as well as though I had +gotten it out of books. The granite ridge is rich in quartz and in +tourmalines. I got some out and had them cut and polished, and they are +the finest ever found in Maine. This secrecy is necessary, due to the +fact that a partner who went back on me has tried to wrest the secret +from me, also the fact that I must wait until I can buy the land the +ridge is on from its owners." + +The three boys stared at each other. + +"Tourmalines," said Garry. "Why, those are the semi-precious stones +known as the State of Maine gem. They are delicate pink and green, and +when cut make beautiful stones for jewelry. Don't you chaps recollect +the ring my mother wears? Well, that is a pink tourmaline. As far as I +know, they are found in only three other places in the State. If there +is any quantity of them, there is a neat sum of money to be made by +mining them. Let's go and look at the ridge and see if we can see +anything, although I doubt it, since they are under ground and we have +nothing to dig properly with, neither have we geologists' hammers or +blasting powder to shelve off parts of the ledge. Also, we don't own +this land, and would be liable under the law as trespassers." + +They paced their way to where the ridge was, and looked at it carefully. +It gave evidence of having been blasted two or three times, but they +could see nothing that looked like the matrices of the tourmaline gems. + +"Well, we know all about it, and can find it again, so I move we destroy +all notes about it, and telegraph Dad to see if he can find out who owns +this. He will know, because you see at no little distance from here +begins timberland, and he knows who owns most of the big tracts. Phil, +you are in luck." + +"Why me?" asked Phil in surprise. + +"Because the old fellow made you his legatee by his spoken last will and +testament. All that remains is for you to buy about an acre of this +ground for your operations, and get busy mining," answered Garry. + +"Not by a long shot. We've shared our dangers together. Twice you boys +have rescued me from death, and this mine will remain a secret for +someone else to find out about unless you fellows go in on a share and +share alike basis. I mean that, absolutely flat, and won't listen to any +discussion or debate about it," declared Phil in resolute tones. + +Both Dick and Garry attempted to argue with him, but he was firm and at +last they agreed. At first it was decided to call it the Ranger Mine, +and then Phil, with a nudge at Dick, proposed that they call it the Ruth +Mine, and give her the first gem taken out, as a testimonial for the +help she had given them in their quest for the smugglers. Garry reddened +like a beet, and thought he was being joshed, but seeing Phil was +serious, they voted it to be so. + +"Now back to Jennings and the telegraph office, and start the ball +rolling for the purchase of some of that land, and then maybe we win a +fortune, and again perhaps we don't, but it's worth a chance," said +Garry. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +CONCLUSION. + +They found that they could send a telegram from the railroad depot, and +so Garry addressed the following query to his father: + + "Can you find out immediately who owns land about five miles west + of Jennings, just at edge of what appears to be big lumber tract. + If not, can you refer us to someone in Jennings who knows? + Important, rush answer. + GARRY." + +"Now all we can do is wait for the answer. In the meantime, let's look +around the town a bit," said Garry. + +This they did, but found little to see. They did not care to inquire +about the ownership of land from anyone in the town, as it would mean +dodging the questions of the curious natives of the little village. + +Several trips were made to the station, and finally they got an answer. +It said: + + "I do. Why? + FATHER." + +The boys did a war dance on the platform, giving the station agent good +cause to think they were a little bit touched in the head. + +Garry immediately sent the following telegram: + + "Have made important discovery. Do not under any circumstances, + please, sell the land till you get letter from us, which leaves + today. + "GARRY." + +Borrowing Dick's ever ready notebook, and tearing out several of the +pages, Garry wrote a long note telling of the discovery and asking that +they be allowed to buy an acre of the land, since they had discovered +the mine, or if they couldn't buy an acre for any reason, that they be +allowed to purchase the mineral rights, and lease enough land for +operations. He told his father to address him at Hobart, care of John +Everett. + +The letter was dispatched special delivery, and then Garry said: + +"It will take this letter at least two days to reach Dad, and by that +time we will be back in Hobart. Then it will take two days for the +letter to get back, perhaps three, and we can have a bit of a vacation +in that time, and get a better look at Hobart and see something of the +town." + +"And see something of the pretty little granddaughter too," said Phil in +a low tone to Dick. + +"I wish you fellows would stop ragging me about that. I think she's nice +and pretty and all that, but why try and make a romance? Why, we're +nothing but boys yet, plenty of time to think of love and romance after +school and college," protested Garry, blushing. + +"Course you're only a boy, but that doesn't stop you greatly admiring +the young lady, and of course Phil and I are only boys, but that doesn't +mean that we don't have eyes and brains in our head and don't see +through you like a piece of glass," and the fat boy laughed till his +sides shook, at the blushing face of his good chum. + +"Well, that's enough of that. Let's take a good chunk out of the journey +back to Hobart today, and get there by mid-afternoon tomorrow. Let's +fill our canteens and get going," ordered the leader. + +The return trip was made without any unusual event, and they repaired at +once to the Everett home, where Ruth and her grandfather were told of +the discovery, under the pledge of secrecy. + +The young lady was evidently more than pleased about the mine being +named for her. Mr. Everett was as right as a trivet again, barring the +fact that his arm was of course still in bandages and splints. + +For the next two days they hiked about the country, with Mr. Everett as +guide, of course accompanied by Ruth, and heard many tales of that +section in the early days. + +Finally the long-looked-for letter came, and as it bears on the +succeeding adventures of the boys, it will be given: + + "DEAR GARRY: + + "As I told you in the telegram, I own that land. I have a wide + strip there for a right of way for that timber tract to the river. + Of course you boys may have it, but I suggest that you lease it and + the mineral rights. I will sell you the lease for one dollar, just + to make it legal, and the mineral rights I freely give you three + boys as a present in pay for something that you are going to do for + me very shortly. It will necessitate getting a leave of absence + from the Ranger Service, but I can arrange that. Meet me in Bangor, + as soon as possible, at the Bangor House. + + "I will be waiting your arrival. I cannot tell you much about it + now, except that you may have a chance to play a part in a big + timber war. All this will be explained to you when I see you. + Congratulations from all of us in your success in the smuggler + capture. The Chief has written all about it to me. + + As ever, + "DAD." + +"Hurrah! Here's a chance for new adventures. We'll take the next train +and be on our way. Boys, this is some summer. Fires and captures and +smugglers and a treasure mine discovered, and now a timber war. All +aboard," shouted Dick. + +Bidding the Everetts goodbye, and promising to keep in constant touch +with them, they went to the station, where, luckily, a train was soon +due. + +Of the stirring adventures of the boys in the great timber country, and +how they circumvented a group of timber thieves who were bent on ruining +Mr. Boone, and more about LeBlanc, will be told in the next book, Volume +Four of the Ranger Boys, entitled, "THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER +THIEVES." + +THE END. + + + * * * * * + + +The Ranger Boys Series + +BY CLAUDE H. LA BELLE + +A new series of copyright titles telling of the adventures of three boys +with the Forest Rangers in the state of Maine. + +Handsome Cloth Binding. + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + * * * * * + +THE RANGER BOYS TO THE RESCUE + +THE RANGER BOYS FIND THE HERMIT + +THE RANGER BOYS AND THE BORDER SMUGGLERS + +THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES + +THE RANGER BOYS AND THEIR REWARD + + * * * * * + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + +The Radio Boys Series + +BY GERALD BRECKENRIDGE + +A new series of copyright titles for boys of all ages. + +_Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs_ + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + + * * * * * + +THE RADIO BOYS ON THE MEXICAN BORDER + +THE RADIO BOYS ON SECRET SERVICE DUTY + +THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE REVENUE GUARDS + +THE RADIO BOYS' SEARCH FOR THE INCA'S TREASURE + +THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION + + * * * * * + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET NEW YORK + +The Boy Troopers Series + +BY CLAIR W. HAYES + +Author of the Famous "Boy Allies" Series. + +The adventures of two boys with the Pennsylvania State Police. + +All Copyrighted Titles. + +Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs. + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + * * * * * + +THE BOY TROOPERS ON THE TRAIL + +THE BOY TROOPERS IN THE NORTHWEST + +THE BOY TROOPERS ON STRIKE DUTY + +THE BOY TROOPERS AMONG THE WILD MOUNTAINEERS + + * * * * * + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + +The Golden Boys Series + +BY L. P. WYMAN, PH.D. + +Dean of Pennsylvania Military College. + +A new series of instructive copyright stories for boys of High School +Age. + +Handsome Cloth Binding. + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + * * * * * + +THE GOLDEN BOYS AND THEIR NEW ELECTRIC CELL + +THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE FORTRESS + +THE GOLDEN BOYS IN THE MAINE WOODS + +THE GOLDEN BOYS WITH THE LUMBER JACKS + +THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE RIVER DRIVE + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + + * * * * * + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + +The Boy Scouts Series + +BY HERBERT CARTER + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years + +All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +New Stories of Camp Life + + * * * * * + +THE BOY SCOUTS' FIRST CAMPFIRE; or, Scouting with the Silver Fox Patrol + +THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE BLUE RIDGE; or, Marooned Among the Moonshiners. + +THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE TRAIL; or, Scouting through the Big Game Country. + +THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE MAINE WOODS; or The New Test for the Silver Fox +Patrol. + +THE BOY SCOUTS THROUGH THE BIG TIMBER; or, The Search for the Lost +Tenderfoot. + +THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE ROCKIES; or, The Secret of the Hidden Silver Mine. + +THE BOY SCOUTS ON STURGEON ISLAND; or, Marooned Among the Game-Fish +Poachers. + +THE BOY SCOUTS DOWN IN DIXIE; or, The Strange Secret of Alligator Swamp. + +THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE BATTLE OF SARATOGA; A story of Burgoyne's Defeat +in 1777. + +THE BOY SCOUTS ALONG THE SUSQUEHANNA; or, The Silver Fox Patrol Caught +in a Flood. + +THE BOY SCOUTS ON WAR TRAILS IN BELGIUM; or, Caught Between Hostile +Armies. + +THE BOY SCOUTS AFOOT IN FRANCE; or, With The Red Cross Corps at the +Marne. + + * * * * * + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET NEW YORK + +The Boy Allies + +(Registered in the United States Patent Office) + +With the Navy + +BY ENSIGN ROBERT L. DRAKE + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +Frank Chadwick and Jack Templeton, young American lads, meet each other +in an unusual way soon after the declaration of war. Circumstances place +them on board the British cruiser, "The Sylph," and from there on, they +share adventures with the sailors of the Allies. Ensign Robert L. Drake, +the author, is an experienced naval officer, and he describes admirably +the many exciting adventures of the two boys. + +THE BOY ALLIES ON THE NORTH SEA PATROL; or, Striking the First Blow at +the German Fleet. + +THE BOY ALLIES UNDER TWO FLAGS; or, Sweeping the Enemy from the Sea. + +THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE FLYING SQUADRON; or, The Naval Raiders of the +Great War. + +THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE TERROR OF THE SEA; or, The Last Shot of +Submarine D-16. + +THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE SEA; or, The Vanishing Submarine. + +THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALTIC; or, Through Fields of Ice to Aid the Czar. + +THE BOY ALLIES AT JUTLAND; or, The Greatest Naval Battle of History. + +THE BOY ALLIES WITH UNCLE SAM'S CRUISERS; or, Convoying the American +Army Across the Atlantic. + +THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE SUBMARINE D-32; or, The Fall of the Russian +Empire. + +THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE VICTORIOUS FLEETS; or, The Fall of the German +Navy. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + + * * * * * + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET NEW YORK + +The Boy Allies + +(Registered in the United States Patent Office) + +With the Army + +BY CLAIR W. HAYES + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +In this series we follow the fortunes of two American lads unable to +leave Europe after war is declared. They meet the soldiers of the +Allies, and decide to cast their lot with them. Their experiences and +escapes are many, and furnish plenty of good, healthy action that every +boy loves. + +THE BOY ALLIES AT LIEGE; or, Through Lines of Steel. + +THE BOY ALLIES ON THE FIRING LINE; or, Twelve Days Battle Along the +Marne. + +THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE COSSACKS; or, A Wild Dash Over the Carpathians. + +THE BOY ALLIES IN THE TRENCHES; or, Midst Shot and Shell Along the +Aisne. + +THE BOY ALLIES IN GREAT PERIL; or, With the Italian Army in the Alps. + +THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALKAN CAMPAIGN; or, The Struggle to Save a +Nation. + +THE BOY ALLIES ON THE SOMME; or, Courage and Bravery Rewarded. + +THE BOY ALLIES AT VERDUN; or, Saving France from the Enemy. + +THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE STARS AND STRIPES; or, Leading the American +Troops to the Firing Line. + +THE BOY ALLIES WITH HAIG IN FLANDERS; or, The Fighting Canadians of Vimy +Ridge. + +THE BOY ALLIES WITH PERSHING IN FRANCE; or, Over the Top at Chateau +Thierry. + +THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE GREAT ADVANCE; or, Driving the Enemy Through +France and Belgium. + +THE BOY ALLIES WITH MARSHAL FOCH; or, The Closing Days of the Great +World War. + + * * * * * + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET NEW YORK + +The Jack Lorimer Series + +BY WINN STANDISH + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + + * * * * * + +CAPTAIN JACK LORIMER; or, The Young Athlete of Millvale High. + + Jack Lorimer is a fine example of the all-around American + high-school boys. His fondness for clean, honest sport of all kinds + will strike a chord of sympathy among athletic youths. + +JACK LORIMER'S CHAMPIONS; or, Sports on Land and Lake. + + There is a lively story woven in with the athletic achievements, + which are all right, since the book has been O. K'd. by Chadwick, + the Nestor of American Sporting journalism. + +JACK LORIMER'S HOLIDAYS; or, Millvale High in Camp. + + It would be well not to put this book into a boy's hands until the + chores are finished, otherwise they might be neglected. + +JACK LORIMER'S SUBSTITUTE; or, The Acting Captain of the Team. + + On the sporting side, this book takes up football, wrestling, and + tobogganing. There is a good deal of fun in this book and plenty of + action. + +JACK LORIMER, FRESHMAN; or, From Millvale High to Exmouth. + + Jack and some friends he makes crowd innumerable happenings into an + exciting freshman year at one of the leading Eastern colleges. The + book is typical of the American college boy's life, and there is a + lively story, interwoven with feats on the gridiron, hockey, + basketball and other clean honest sports for which Jack Lorimer + stands. + + * * * * * + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET NEW YORK + +Our Young Aeroplane Scout Series + +(Registered in the United States Patent Office) + +BY HORACE PORTER + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + + * * * * * + +A Series of Remarkable Stories of the Adventures of Two Boy Flyers in +The European War Zone. + +OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN FRANCE AND BELGIUM; or, Saving The +Fortunes of the Trouvilles. + +OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN GERMANY. + +OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN RUSSIA; or, Lost on the Frozen Steppes. + +OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN TURKEY; or, Bringing the Light to Yusef. + +OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN ENGLAND; or, Twin Stars In the London Sky +Patrol. + +OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN ITALY; or, Flying with the War Eagles of +the Alps. + +OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS AT VERDUN; or, Driving Armored Meteors Over +Flaming Battle Fronts. + +OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN THE BALKANS; or, Wearing the Red Badge of +Courage Among Warring Legions. + +OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN THE WAR ZONE; or, Serving Uncle Sam in the +Great Cause of the Allies. + +OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS FIGHTING TO THE FINISH; or Striking Hard Over +the Sea for the Stars and Stripes. + +OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS AT THE MARNE; or, Hurrying the Huns from +Allied Battle Planes. + +OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN AT THE VICTORY; or, Speedy High Flyers +Smashing the Hindenburg Line. + + * * * * * + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET NEW YORK + +The Boy Spies Series + +These stories are based on important historical events, scenes wherein +boys are prominent characters being selected. They are the romance of +history, vigorously told, with careful fidelity to picturing the home +life, and accurate in every particular. + +HANDSOME CLOTH BINDINGS + + * * * * * + +THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF NEW ORLEANS + + A story of the part they took in its defence. By William P. + Chipman. + +THE BOY SPIES AT THE DEFENCE OF FORT HENRY. + + A boy's story of Wheeling Creek in 1777. By James Otis. + +THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF BUNKER HILL. + + A story of two boys at the siege of Boston. By James Otis. + +THE BOY SPIES AT THE SIEGE OF DETROIT. + + A story of two Ohio boys in the War of 1812. By James Otis. + +THE BOY SPIES WITH LAFAYETTE. + + The story of how two boys joined the Continental Army. By James + Otis. + +THE BOY SPIES ON CHESAPEAKE BAY. + + The story of two young spies under Commodore Barney. By James Otis. + +THE BOY SPIES WITH THE REGULATORS. + + The story of how the boys assisted the Carolina Patriots to drive + the British from that State. By James Otis. + +THE BOY SPIES WITH THE SWAMP FOX. + + The story of General Marion and his young spies. By James Otis. + +THE BOY SPIES AT YORKTOWN. + + The story of how the spies helped General Lafayette in the Siege of + Yorktown. By James Otis. + +THE BOY SPIES OF PHILADELPHIA. + + The story of how the young spies helped the Continental Army at + Valley Forge. By James Otis. + +THE BOY SPIES OF FORT GRISWOLD. + + The story of the part they took in its brave defence. By William P. + Chipman. + +THE BOY SPIES OF OLD NEW YORK. + + The story of how the young spies prevented the capture of General + Washington. By James Otis. + + * * * * * + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +publishers. A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 East 23d Street, New York. + +The Navy Boys Series + +A series of excellent stories of adventure on sea and land, selected +from the works of popular writers; each volume designed for boys' +reading. + +HANDSOME CLOTH BINDINGS + + * * * * * + +THE NAVY BOYS IN DEFENCE OF LIBERTY. + + A story of the burning of the British schooner Gaspee in 1772. By + William P. Chipman. + +THE NAVY BOYS ON LONG ISLAND SOUND. + + A story of the Whale Boat Navy of 1776. By James Otis. + +THE NAVY BOYS AT THE SIEGE OF HAVANA. + + Being the experience of three boys serving under Israel Putnam in + 1772. By James Otis. + +THE NAVY BOYS WITH GRANT AT VICKSBURG. + + A boy's story of the siege of Vicksburg. By James Otis. + +THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE WITH PAUL JONES. + + A boy's story of a cruise with the Great Commodore in 1776. By + James Otis. + +THE NAVY BOYS ON LAKE ONTARIO. + + The story of two boys and their adventures in the War of 1813. By + James Otis. + +THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE ON THE PICKERING. + + A boy's story of privateering in 1780. By James Otis. + +THE NAVY BOYS IN NEW YORK BAY. + + A story of three boys who took command of the schooner "The + Laughing Mary," the first vessel of the American Navy. By James + Otis. + +THE NAVY BOYS IN THE TRACK OF THE ENEMY. + + The story of a remarkable cruise with the Sloop of War "Providence" + and the Frigate "Alfred." By William P. Chipman. + +THE NAVY BOYS' DARING CAPTURE. + + The story of how the navy boys helped to capture the British Cutter + "Margaretta," in 1775. By William P. Chipman. + +THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE TO THE BAHAMAS. + + The adventures of two Yankee Middies with the first cruise of an + American Squadron in 1775. By William P. Chipman. + +THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE WITH COLUMBUS. + + The adventures of two boys who sailed with the great Admiral in his + discovery of America. By Frederick A. Ober. + + +The Girl Comrade's Series + +ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS. + +ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES. + +A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular +authors. These are charming stones for young girls, well told and full +of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting motives +vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl readers. + +HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING. + +A BACHELOR MAID AND HER BROTHER By I. T. Thurston. + +ALL ABOARD. A Story For Girls. By Fanny E. Newberry. + +ALMOST A GENIUS. A Story For Girls. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + +ANNICE WYNKOOP, Artist. Story of a Country Girl. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + +BUBBLES. A Girl's Story. By Fannie E. Newberry. + +COMRADES. By Fannie E. Newberry. + +DEANE GIRLS, THE. A Home Story. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + +HELEN BEATON. COLLEGE WOMAN. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + +JOYCE'S INVESTMENTS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + +MELLICENT RAYMOND. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + +MISS ASHTON'S NEW PUPIL. A School Girl's Story. By Mrs. S. S. Robbins. + +NOT FOR PROFIT. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + +ODD ONE, THE. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + +SARA, A PRINCESS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + + * * * * * + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +publishers. A. L. BURT COMPANY. 114-120 East 23d Street. New York. + +The Girl Chum's Series + +ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS. + +ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES. + +A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular +authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and full +of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting motives, +vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl readers. + +HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING. + +BENHURST, CLUB, THE. By Howe Benning. + +BERTHA'S SUMMER BOARDERS. By Linnie S. Harris. + +BILLOW PRAIRIE. A Story of Life in the Great West By Joy Allison. + +DUXBERRY DOINGS. A New England Story. By Caroline B. Le Row. + +FUSSBUDGET'S FOLKS. A Story For Young Girls. By Anna F. Burnham. + +HAPPY DISCIPLINE, A. By Elizabeth Cummings. + +JOLLY TEN, THE; and Their Year of Stories. By Agnes Carr Sage. + +KATIE ROBERTSON. A Girl's Story of Factory Life. By M. E. Winslow. + +LONELY HILL. A Story For Girls. By M. L. Thornton-Wilder. + +MAJORIBANKS. A Girl's Story. By Elvirton Wright + +MISS CHARITY'S HOUSE. By Howe Benning. + +MISS ELLIOT'S GIRLS. A Story For Young Girls. By Mary Spring Corning. + +MISS MALCOLM'S TEN. A Story For Girls. By Margaret E. Winslow. + +ONE GIRL'S WAY OUT. By Howe Benning. + +PEN'S VENTURE. By Elvirton Wright. + +RUTH PRENTICE. A Story For Girls. By Marion Thorne. + +THREE YEARS AT GLENWOOD. A Story of School Life. By M. E. Winslow. + + * * * * * + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +publishers. A. L. BURT COMPANY. 114-120 East 23d Street. New York. + +The Girl Scouts Series + +BY EDITH LAVELL + +A new copyright series of Girl Scouts stories by an author of wide +experience in Scouts' craft, as Director of Girl Scouts of Philadelphia. + +Clothbound, with Attractive Color Designs. + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + * * * * * + +THE GIRL SCOUTS AT MISS ALLEN'S SCHOOL + +THE GIRL SCOUTS AT CAMP + +THE GIRL SCOUTS' GOOD TURN + +THE GIRL SCOUTS' CANOE TRIP + +THE GIRL SCOUTS' RIVALS + + * * * * * + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + +Marjorie Dean College Series + +BY PAULINE LESTER. + +Author of the Famous Marjorie Dean High School Series. + +Those who have read the Marjorie Dean High School Series will be eager +to read this new series, as Marjorie Dean continues to be the heroine in +these stories. + +All Clothbound. Copyright Titles. + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + * * * * * + +MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE FRESHMAN + +MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE SOPHOMORE + +MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE JUNIOR + +MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE SENIOR + + * * * * * + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + +Marjorie Dean High School Series + +BY PAULINE LESTER + +Author of the Famous Marjorie Dean College Series + +These are clean, wholesome stories that will be of great interest to all +girls of high school age. + +All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + + * * * * * + +MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL FRESHMAN + +MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL SOPHOMORE + +MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL JUNIOR + +MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL SENIOR + + * * * * * + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET NEW YORK + +The Camp Fire Girls Series + +By HILDEGARD G. FREY + +A Series of Outdoor Stories for Girls 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + + * * * * * + +THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS IN THE MAINE WOODS; or, The Winnebagos go Camping. + +THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS AT SCHOOL; or, The Wohelo Weavers. + +THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS AT ONOWAY HOUSE; or, The Magic Garden. + +THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS GO MOTORING; or, Along the Road That Leads the Way. + +THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS' LARKS AND PRANKS; or, The House of the Open Door. + +THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS ON ELLEN'S ISLE; or, The Trail of the Seven Cedars. + +THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS ON THE OPEN ROAD; or, Glorify Work. + +THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS DO THEIR BIT; or, Over the Top with the Winnebagos. + +THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS SOLVE A MYSTERY; or, The Christmas Adventure at +Carver House. + +THE CAMP FIRE GIRLS AT CAMP KEEWAYDIN; or, Down Paddles. + + * * * * * + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET NEW YORK + +The Blue Grass Seminary Girls Series + +BY CAROLYN JUDSON BURNETT + +For Girls 12 to 16 Years + +All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +Splendid stories of the Adventures of a Group of Charming Girls. + + * * * * * + +THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS' VACATION ADVENTURES; or, Shirley Willing +to the Rescue. + +THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS' CHRISTMAS HOLIDAYS; or, A Four Weeks' +Tour with the Glee Club. + +THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS IN THE MOUNTAINS; or, Shirley Willing on a +Mission of Peace. + +THE BLUE GRASS SEMINARY GIRLS ON THE WATER; or, Exciting Adventures on a +Summerer's Cruise Through the Panama Canal. + + * * * * * + +The Mildred Series + +BY MARTHA FINLEY + +For Girls 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +A Companion Series to the famous "Elsie" books by the same author. + + * * * * * + +MILDRED KEITH + +MILDRED AT ROSELAND + +MILDRED AND ELSIE + +MILDRED'S MARRIED LIFE + +MILDRED AT HOME + +MILDRED'S BOYS AND GIRLS + +MILDRED'S NEW DAUGHTER + + * * * * * + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET NEW YORK + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Ranger Boys and the Border +Smugglers, by Claude A. Labelle + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RANGER BOYS *** + +***** This file should be named 25514.txt or 25514.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/5/5/1/25514/ + +Produced by Barbara Tozier, Bill Tozier and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/25514.zip b/25514.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..cf852a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/25514.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..01abf52 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #25514 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/25514) |
